IADC HSE Reference Guide.docx

This document contains recommendations from an IADC Task Group established to give the drilling contractor a basis on which to build a Health, Safety and Environment program. The recommendations made by this Task Group have been reviewed and endorsed by the IADC Board of Directors. IADC publications may be used by anyone desiring to do so. Every effort has been made by IADC to assure the accuracy and reliability of the data contained in them; however, IADC makes no representation, warranty, or guarantee i n connection with this publication and hereby expressly disclaims any liability or responsibility for loss or damage resulting from its use or for the violation of any federal, state, or municipal regulation with which this publication may conflict. No suggested method, practice, precaution or program set forth in this document shall be deemed to establish a legal standard of conduct or a legal duty, the violation of which would constitute negligence of any degree in any legal proceeding. IADC is not atte mpting to fulfill any duties or obligations of employers, manufacturers or suppliers to warn, properly train, or equip their employees or others who may be affected by their activities, concerning any health, safety or environmental risks or precautions. Nothing contained in this document is to be construed as granting right, by implication or otherwise, use of the IADC name, logo, or trademark, for the manufacture, sale, or use of any method, apparatus, or product. Suggested revisions to the guidance are invited and will be considered along with future changes to these recommendations. Suggestions should be submitted to Joe Hurt International Association of Drilling Contractors, 10370 Richmond Avenue, Suite 760, Houston, TX 77042. Copyright 2004 by the International Association of Drilling Contractors Release date 1 January 2004.

Health, Safety and Environmental Reference Guide

Published by:

International Association of Drilling Contractors P.O. Box 4287 Houston, Texas 77210-4287 USA Phone: 1/713-2921945 Fax: 1/713-2921946 Internet: http://iadc.org

Revised Edition January 2004 Copyright © 2004 International Association of Drilling Contractors All rights reserved.

FOREWORD

This guide is designed to supplement company HSE programs and operating procedures. It is based on experience and careful study over many years. Practicability has been substantiated by the adoption of the safe operating procedures set forth herein, in part or whole, by many drilling contractors and government regulatory bodies. This information does not propose to be a complete Health, Safety and Environmental Manual. Its purpose is to present the results of IADC’s Health, Safety and Environmental Committee’s research and experience in order to help companies prepare their own meaningful Health, Safety and Environmental program. Nothing herein shall be deemed to establish minimum or maximum standards of drilling Health, Safety and Environmental (HSE) operating procedures. While this guide cannot cover all the problems that may arise, it does give the drilling contractor a basis on which to build a Health, Safety and Environmental program. Employees and management must be alert to changing conditions and new equipment that present additional hazards and problems. The Rig Managers (Toolpushers), Drillers, and other supervisors must share the greatest responsibility for the success of any accident prevention program. However, the whole-hearted support and cooperation of all personnel is necessary, from top management to the rig trainee. The International Association of Drilling Contractors is grateful to the members of the Health, Safety and Environment Committee who participated in revising this guide. The IADC appreciates the efforts of these individuals and their employers, who have donated their time, materials and resources to make the latest revision of this document possible.

Health Safety and Environmental Reference Guide

HEALTH SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL REFERENCE GUIDE Table of Contents Page HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROGRAMS 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 1.11

Safety Policy Statement HSE Meetings Safety Inspections and Logbooks Health Safety and Environment Committee Job Safety Analysis Incident Reporting Procedures Incident Investigation Personnel Selection Visitor / Service Personnel Orientation Health Safety and Environment Management Plan Job Safety Analysis Form New Arrival Reception Outline

1-1 1-1 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-7 1-7 1-8 1-9 1-9 1-12 1-13

GENERAL GUIDELINES AND HEALTH CONTROL 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13 2.14 2.15

General Housekeeping Sanitation Personal Hygiene Alcohol, Drugs and Firearms Fitness for Duty Smoking Horseplay Proper Lifting Techniques Chemical Hazard Communication Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material (NORM) Heat Stress and Heat Related Conditions Cold Weather Considerations Bloodborne Pathogens Model Exposure Control Plan Illustrations

2-1 2-2 2-3 2-3 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-5 2-5 2-6 2-10 2-10 2-14 2-21

EQUIPMENT SAFETY 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14

Electrical Equipment Control of Hazardous Energy – Lockout/Tagout Hand Tools Drill Pipe / Collar Slips and Elevators Spinning / Cathead Chains and Breakout Tong Cable (Line) Lifting Slings Catheads Hoists (Winches / Tuggers) Pipe Tongs and Lines Rotary Table Area Portable Ladders Decks, Floors and Walkways Equipment Guarding Derricks and Masts

Page T-1

3-1 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-14

3.15 3.16 3.17 3.18 3.19 3.20 3.21 3.22 3.23 3.24 3.25 3.26 3.27 3.28 3.29

Pipe Racks and Bins Derrickman’s Escape Device Drilling Line, Crown Block and Traveling Block Drawworks, Brakes, Clutches and Sand Reel Mud Pumps and Equipment Mud Pits and Equipment High-Pressure Lines and Fittings Engines Air-Operated Equipment Blowout Prevention Equipment BOP Accumulators, Pulsation and Suction Dampeners Stabbing Board Handling Tubulars Electrical Area Classifications Illustrations

3-15 3-15 3-16 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-19 3-20 3-20 3-21 3-22 3-22 3-24 3-30

PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11

Personal Protective Equipment Head Protection Fall Protection Eye and Face Protection Safety Shoes/Boots Hearing Protection Respiratory Protection Proper Clothing Electrical Protective Equipment Hand Protection Permissible Noise Exposures

4-1 4-1 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-3 4-3 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-5

FIRE PREVENTION, FIRE FIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8

Fire Prevention Fire Protection Emergency Fire Fighting Teams Fire Control Classes (and Combinations) of Fires Portable Fire Extinguishers Fixed Extinguishing Systems Illustrations

5-1 5-2 5-3 5-3 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6

WELDING AND CUTTING/COMPRESSED GAS & OXYGEN CYLINDERS 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 6.11

General Precautions – Welding Cutting, Cutting, and Other Spark/Flame Producing Operations Protective Equipment Hot Work Permit Preparatory – Precautions Maintenance of Tools and Equipment Specific Precautions – Arc Welding Specific Precautions – Gas Welding and Burning Compressed Gas and Oxygen Cylinders – Storage Cylinder Handling Cylinder Usage Safety Precautions for Engine Powered Welders

6-1 6-1 6-2 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-4 6-5 6-5 6-6 6-6

6.12

Hot Work Permit Example

6-8

FLEET SAFETY 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5

General Rules Inspection, Servicing, and Mechanical Repair Trucks Safe Driving Concepts for Accident Prevention Hand Signals for Directing Vehicles

7-1 7-3 7-4 7-7 7-7

CRANE OPERATIONS 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5

Crane Operator Training (Qualifications) Inspection Requirements General Operation Requirements Slings and Shackles Standard Hand Signals for Crane Operations

8-1 8-1 8-2 8-4 8-7

FORKLIFT OPERATIONS 9.1 9.2

General Operation Requirements General Training Requirements

9-1 9-2

CONFINED SPACE ENTRY GUIDELINES 10.0 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8 10.9 10.10 10.11 10.12

General Scope and Application Definitions General Requirements Posting Danger Signs Procedures Permit Preparation Entry Exit Rescue Team Training Contractor Requirements Attachments

10-1 10-3 10-4 10-6 10-6 10-7 10-7 10-8 10-10 10-10 10-11 10-11 10-12

COLD WEATHER SAFETY 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 11.6 11.7

General Effects of Cold Weather on Personnel Cold Water Survival Immersion Suit Cold Weather Travel Safe Use of Steam General Cold Weather Safety

11-1 11-1 11-5 11-6 11-6 11-7 11-8

OFFSHORE SAFETY 12.1 12.2 12.3 12.4

Rough Weather Procedures Offshore Communications Life Saving Equipment Helicopter Safety Procedures

12-1 12-2 12-3 12-4

12.5 12.6 12.7 12.8 12.9 12.10 12.11 12.12 12.13 12.13.1 12.13.2 12.13.3 12.13.4

Crewboat Safety Procedures Personnel Transfer With Swing Rope Personnel Transfer With Personnel Carriers Medical Evacuations Working Over Water Cargo Handling Guidelines for Offshore Muster List (Station Bill) Emergency Signals Emergency Drills Man-Overboard Drills Fire Drills Lifeboat Launching Drills Abandon Rig Drill

12-5 12-6 12-6 12-9 12-10 12-11 12-15 12-16 12-16 12-18 12-19 12-20 12-21

HYDROGEN SULFIDE 13.1 13.2 13.3 13.4 13.5 13.6 13.7 13.8 13.9 13.10

General Initiation of (H2S) Procedure Applicability Training Rescue/First Aid Procedures – Hydrogen Sulfide Detection Properties of H2S H2S Exposure Limits Toxicity of H2S Breathing Equipment (SCBA)

13-1 13-1 13-2 13-2 13-3 13-3 13-4 13-4 13-5 13-5

PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT 14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 14.6 14.7 14.8 14.9 14.10 14.11 14.12 14.13

General Spill Prevention and Control Drilling Site Environmental Considerations Material Storage Waste Management Air Emissions Camp Expectations Noise Sumps Recommended Maintenance Practices Groundwater Protection Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material (NORM) Storage Tanks

14-1 14-1 14-1 14-1 14-2 14-7 14-7 14-8 14-8 14-8 14-9 14-9 14-9

EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN (S) 15.1 15.2 15.3 15.4 15.5 15.6 15.7 15.8

General Minimum Elements of Emergency Action Plan(s) Medical Emergency Action Plan Media Crisis Communication First Aid and CPR Training and Supplies Emergency First Aid Fire Emergency Plan Hydrogen Sulfide / Gas Alert Procedures

15-1 15-1 15-2 15-2 15-2 15-3 15-4 15-7

DROPPED OBJECT PREVENTION 16.1 16.2 16.3 16.4 16.5 16.6

General Equipment Inventory Fastening Requirements for Equipment in Derrick/Mast Derrick/Mast Equipment Guidelines Temporary Equipment In Derrick/Mast Sample Derrick/Mast Permanent Equipment Inventory

16-1 16-1 16-2 16-2 16-5 16-7

WELL SERVICING 17.1 17.2 17.3 17.4 17.5 17.6 17.7 17.8 17.9 17.10

Well Servicing Units General Swabbing Well Testing Wireline Operations Acidizing Formation Fracturing and High Pressure Pumping Gun Perforating and Percussive Sampling Guy Lines and Anchoring Systems Pumping Units

17-1 17-3 17-4 17-5 17-5 17-6 17-6 17-8 17-9 17-11

AIR AND GAS DRILLING 18.0

General

18-1

PERSONNEL HOISTING OPERATIONS 19.1 19.2 19.3 19.4 19.5 19.6 19.7 19.8 19.9 19.10 19.11 19.12

General Alternative Methods Job Safety Analysis / Pre-Job Checklist Pre-Job Safety Meeting Harnesses and Associated Equipment Connecting Devices Winches and Lifting System Secondary Independent - Connection Fall Protection Personnel Lifting Operations Winch Operators Additional Information Man-Riding Winch Signals

19-1 19-1 19-1 19-1 19-1 19-2 19-2 19-3 19-3 19-4 19-5 19-6

FALL PROTECTION 20.1 20.2 20.3 20.4 20.5 20.6 20.7

General General Fall Prevention Fall Arrest System vs. Fall Restraint System Key Requirements for Fall Arrest Systems Work at a Height Fall Restraint System and Equipment Illustrations

20-1 20-2 20-2 20-3 20-3 20-3 20-6


SECTION ONE – HEALTH SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROGRAMS 1.1

Safety Policy Statement The objective of a Health, Safety and Environment Program is to prevent injuries, protect employee health, protect the environment, educate employees, and increase work productivity. Every HSE program should be based on a sound foundation. This foundation should be a clear and concise objective of the company’s HSE policies. The basic objectives should be: A. The safety of employees and the public environment are of the utmost importance in all drilling/well-servicing operations. B. Safety takes precedence over expediency or shortcuts. C. Every attempt should be made to prevent the possibility of incident occurrence. D. Safety authority and accountability should be well defined. Once a policy is set and has been publicized so every employee is familiar with it, top management should delegate the authority through management levels down to each supervisor. The supervisor is responsible and accountable to see that each crewmember understands each procedure. Employees should follow all procedures and programs established by the employer. Safety is also the responsibility of all employees.

1.2

HSE Meetings One of the most important parts of any company’s Health Safety and Environment Program should be regular HSE meetings. Each of these meetings should be well planned and organized with each crew in advance. The format should include a presentation of past, present, and future rig operations. Pre-job meetings should be held for routine and non-routine operations. The meeting should provide suggestions, solutions and conclusions. There should be time allocated for participation from each member. Meetings should be documented, and all employees present should note their attendance. To assist in planning and documenting HSE meetings, IADC suggests: A. Five Minute Rig Safety Meeting Topics (available from IADC Publications) B. 52 Safety Topics for Weekly Safety Meetings (available from IADC Publications) C. Weekly Safety Meeting Report (available from IADC Publications) D. Other IADC Publications and Videos (consult the latest IADC Publications catalog) E. Information from equipment manufacturers F.

Information from the well operator

G. Recent company communications H. Recent incident investigations, their causes, and corrections I.

Safety equipment operating procedures

J.

Employee suggestions

© Copyright 2004 IADC All rights reserved

Section 1 – Page 1 of 13

K. Job Safety Analysis (JSA) Program (see section 1.4) L.

IADC HSE Committee Safety Alerts (see http://www.iadc.org/alerts.htm )

M. IADC Training Committee statement on Knowledge, Skills, and Abilities N. Handover and Management of Change

1.3

Safety Inspections and Logbooks Regular inspections should be made to determine if the equipment is safe to operate. Although a supervisor or other designated company representative should perform inspections, all employees are responsible to report any unsafe conditions they observe. The rig should be inspected from every viewpoint. Unsafe conditions and acts should be reported to the supervisor. The IADC HSE Committee has developed a general rotary rig inspection form that is available from IADC Publications.

1.4

Health Safety and Environment Committee Companies should consider establishing Health, Safety and Environment committees. The purpose of a HSE committee should be to meet and discuss safe working conditions and procedures. Committee members should consist of key operating personnel and crewmembers. Topics covered should include: A. Injury incidents B. Equipment failures C. Near misses D. Damages E. Rig inspections F.

Rig repairs and modifications

G. Procedural Changes H. Environmental Incidents I.

Management of Change

Minutes of the meeting and attendees should be recorded and made available to all personnel.

1.5

Job Safety Analysis A. Training The Rig Manager (Toolpusher/OIM) will have the primary responsibility for training and/or retraining rig crews in the following processes: 1.

Job selection

2.

Hazard identification

3.

Safe job procedures

4.

Documentation on the JSA form (sample form in Section 1.10)

The rig crews will become owners of the JSA process and incorporate it into all appropriate activities. The critical phase is education of employees in the purpose and importance of the JSA process. B. Job Selection The long-range objective of the JSA program should be to have a JSA for all jobs. However, it is important to set priorities for developing JSA’s. In deciding which job to start with, here are some factors to consider: 1.

Job incident frequency

2.

Potential incident severity

3.

Potential Hazard (injury to personnel, damage to equipment or environment)

4.

Routine and non-routine jobs and new tasks

C. Hazard Identification A hazard is a potential danger. The purpose of the JSA is to identify ALL hazards, both those produced by the environment or conditions, and those connected with job procedure. To identify hazards, these questions should be asked about each step: 1.

Is there a danger of the employee being struck by, or making injurious contact with an object?

2.

Can an employee(s) be caught in, by, or between objects?

3.

Is there a potential for slip, trip or fall?

4.

Could employees suffer strains from pushing, pulling, lifting, bending or twisting? 5.

Is the environment hazardous to safety (gas, dust, fumes, chemicals, noise, heat, or cold)?

6.

Is there a potential for unexpected pressure release or well control incident?

7.

Is there a potential to contact electric current?

8.

Is there an environmental risk?

9.

Are hazards present from simultaneous operations?

D. Safe Job Procedure From the listed job steps and hazard identification, employees should be able to decide what actions and/or procedures are necessary to eliminate or minimize the hazards that could lead to an accident or injury. Following are recommended actions or procedures to eliminate or control each identified hazard: 1.

Engineer the hazard out

2.

Provide guards or safety devices

3.

Provide personal protective equipment

4.

Provide job instruction, training, and signage

E. Documentation Completed JSA’s must be retained on the rig or job site to facilitate easy reference, review and revision. F.

Key Points and Considerations of the Job Safety Analysis 1.

A Job Safety Analysis (JSA) is a method of studying jobs in order to make them safer.

2.

The person or persons who have primary responsibility for conducting or implementing the job or task should complete the JSA. This can be anyone: Roustabout, Floorhand, Crane Operator, Driller, Toolpusher, etc. JSA’s should be developed as a group (input from entire group).

3.

All personnel involved in implementing the specific job or task should be present when a JSA is filled out. The best people to help make a JSA are the people that are experienced, capable and willing to share ideas.

4.

JSA’s should be kept in a binder to facilitate easy reference and review. JSA’s must be available to all crewmembers.

5.

JSA’s are excellent team building and training tools. Therefore, ALL personnel including service personnel should participate.

6.

All supervisors (Toolpusher, Driller, Crane Operator, etc.) should take the lead in JSA development, training and implementation.

G. Instructions for Completing the Job Safety Analysis Form (sample form in Section 1.10) 1.

Job Safety Analysis (JSA) is an important incident prevention tool that works by identifying hazards and eliminating or minimizing them before the job is performed and before they have a chance to become incidents. Use JSA: a.

For Job clarification

b.

For Hazard awareness

c.

As a tool to determine and remove hazards

d.

As a guide for all employees

e.

As a refresher on non-routine jobs

f.

As an incident investigation tool

g.

For informing employees of specific job hazards and protective measures

2.

3.

Set priorities for doing JSA’s: a.

Jobs that have a history of frequent incidents

b.

Jobs that have produced disabling injuries

c.

Jobs with high potential for disabling injury or death

d.

New jobs with no accident history

Select a job to be analyzed. Before filling out the form, consider the following: a.

The purpose of the job – What has to be done? Who has to do it?

b.

The activities involved – How is it done? When is it done? Where is it done? c.

4.

If employees are not familiar with a particular job or operation interview an employee who is. In addition, observing an employee performing the job or “walking through” the operation step by step may give additional insight into potential hazards. One means to analyze a job is to make a videotape for review.

Instructions for completing each of the three parts of a Job Safety Analysis include: a.

Sequence of Basic Job Steps

b.

1)

Examining a specific job by breaking it down into a series of steps or tasks will enable you to discover potential hazards that employees may encounter.

2)

Each job or operation will consist of a set of steps or tasks. For example, the job might be: Using the Wire Line Cutter. To determine where a step will begin or end, look for a change of activity, change in direction, or change in movement.

3)

Gathering the tools necessary for the job is one step. The next step might be to tape or seize the line. Another step may be to place the line cutter on the line. The next step may be to cut the line. The final step might be return the tools to their proper storage.

4)

Be sure to list ALL the steps needed to perform the job. Some steps may not be performed each time; an example could be checking the fluid level in the line cutter. However, if that step is generally part of the job, it should be listed. Potential Hazards A hazard is a potential danger. The purpose of the Job Safety Analysis is to identify ALL hazards – both those produced by the environment or conditions, and those connected with job procedure. Close observation and knowledge of the job is important. Examine each step carefully to find and identify hazards (the actions, conditions, and possibilities that could lead to an incident). Compiling an accurate and complete list of potential hazards will allow you to develop the recommended safe job procedures needed to prevent incidents. To identify hazards, ask yourself these questions about each step: 1)

Is there a danger of the employee being struck by, or making injurious contact with an object?

Can an employee(s) be caught in, by, or between objects?

3)

Is there a potential for slip, trip or fall?

4)

Could employees suffer strains from pushing, pulling, lifting, bending or twisting?

5)

Is the environment hazardous to safety (gas, dust, fumes, chemicals, noise, heat, or cold)?

c. 1)

2)

6)

Is there a potential for unexpected pressure release, or well control incident?

7)

Is there a potential to contact electric current?

8)

Is there an environmental risk?

9)

Are hazards present from simultaneous operations?

Recommended Action or Procedure Using the first two columns as a guide, decide what actions, safety equipment, or procedures necessary to eliminate or minimize the hazards that could lead to an incident, injury, occupational illness or environmental event. 2)

Begin by trying to: i.

Engineer the hazard out

ii.

Provide guards, safety devices, etc.

iii. Provide personal protective equipment iv. Provide job training v.

Maintain good housekeeping

vi. Ensure good ergonomics (positioning the person in relation to the machine or other elements in such a way as to improve safety). 3)

List the recommended safe operating procedures. Begin with an action word. Say exactly what needs to be done to correct the hazard, such as “lift using your leg muscles”. Avoid general statements such as “be careful”.

4)

List the required or recommended personal protective equipment and safety systems necessary to perform each step of the job. 5)

6)

Give a recommended action or procedure to address each hazard.

Serious hazards should be corrected immediately. The JSA should then be changed to reflect the new conditions. 7)

Finally, review your input on all three columns for accuracy and completeness.

8)

Determine if the recommended actions or procedures have been put in place.

9)

Upon job completion review JSA for revisions as necessary.

1.6

Incident Reporting Procedures A. All injuries, no matter how minor, should be reported immediately to the supervisor and treated. B. All injuries, which occur during the course of employment, must be reported on the appropriate Incident/Injury form. All sections of the form must be completed with correct and concise information. C. The employer should contact the appropriate agencies to ensure that all regulatory reports are completed and submitted.

1.7

Incident Investigation Incident investigations should be conducted as soon as possible after the incident occurs. Facts are clearer, more details remembered, and the conditions are nearest those at the time of the incident. The incident investigation may be conducted in the following manner: A. Interview the worker(s) who had the incident, medical considerations permitting. B. Interview all the witnesses and other personnel who may have been involved in the incident. C. Interview other personnel at the rig site who did not witness the incident (i.e. Mechanic who may have worked on equipment involved in the incident.) to determine if they have information that may contribute to the investigation or establish documentation that they did not see the incident nor do they have information regarding the incident. D. Interview other personnel on location who did not witness the incident to document that they were not involved, did not witness the incident, have no knowledge of the incident, or have knowledge that may be pertinent regarding the incident. E. Review the JSA for the task involved in the incident (if applicable). F.

Review maintenance or manufacturers records for the equipment involved (if applicable).

G. Determine the facts, based on all information gathered. H. Document names and addresses of all witnesses, personnel who did not witness the incident, but may have knowledge that is pertinent to the investigation, and other personnel on location who did not witness the incident. I.

Determine how the incident happened.

J.

Document the facts of the investigation.

K. Develop an action plan to prevent the incident from occurring again, such as: 1.

Revise JSA if necessary

2.

Revise Operations Policies / Procedures if necessary

3.

Make modifications to equipment if necessary

4.

Conduct training (re-training) if deemed necessary

5. L.

1.8

Other changes as deemed necessary

Share the results of the investigation and action plan with other personnel in the company so that they are aware of what happened and can take efforts to avoid a similar situation on their rig.

Personnel Selection Rig personnel should be selected based on their past work experience on a drilling rig. They should be selected in the area where they can offer the most benefit to the crew as well as the overall safety of the rig. New employees should be trained and supervised as to the correct procedure or methods to be carried out. It is recommended that each company have a sound drug testing policy covering new hires, and post-offer essential job function testing. In addition to a drug-testing policy, and essential job function testing, a thorough background check is recommended.

1.7.1

New employee induction and orientation New Hire Training should be given when applicants have satisfied all pre-employment requirements. This training may include the following: A. New employee orientation package B. Mandatory work apparel required 1.

Items furnished by the company

2.

Items furnished by individuals

C. Personal/hygiene items to bring D. Other suggested items to bring E. Items provided by the rig F.

New Employee Assignment and Rig Tour Check List 1.

Purpose

2.

New employee guidelines for completing the checklist

3.

Supervisor guidelines for assisting the new employee with the checklist

4.

5.

6.

Areas covered by the checklist to include hazards and locations or equipment, emergency situations, and related items. Acknowledgment of Rig Tour a.

New Employee signature, date

b.

Supervisor’s signature, date

c.

Rig Manger’s signature, date

Company Incident Reporting Policy

7.

Company Statement of Policy of Equal Employment Opportunity

8.

Training programs to be completed

9.

10.

Discuss the Company Handbook, to include drug and alcohol programs and additional Company policies New Employee Acknowledgment and Statement of Understanding a.

11.

New-employee signature, date

A company or industry safety and orientation video may be utilized

G. Companies that offer orientation programs based on the above framework may wish to consider obtaining IADC recognition through the RIG PASS® accreditation program. The RIG PASS® application packet includes complete information about the benefits of this program, as well as sample tests and checklists. Contact IADC for details.

1.8

Visitor / Service Personnel Orientation Visitors and service personnel who are new to the location should be met upon arrival, given an orientation immediately and be assigned muster stations and lifeboats (offshore) including the locations of these stations. A sample “New Arrival Reception Outline” can be found in Section 1.10.

1.9

Health, Safety and Environment Management Plan The following is an example of a Health Safety and Environment Plan that may be used as a basis for a company HSE Plan. A. The framework - almost every health safety and environment program can be written with the same outline. For example an HSE Plan may include the following elements: Statement of Purpose HSE Policy Statement Responsibilities Training Recordkeeping Audits & Inspections Hazards & Hazard Controls Policies & Procedures Emergency Response and Security B. Program Purpose - a short statement that answers the question "Why do we have this program?" Be clear and concise, and use plain language that everyone will understand. C. Policy - short statement of company policy that conveys managements support and intentions of the specific program that is signed by a member of senior management. D. Responsibilities - this section designates who is responsible for what parts of the program. Everyone has a part to play: management, supervisors and employees. Some programs will have specific responsibilities for specific management positions, such as the Respiratory Protection or Confined Space Program administrators.

Example:

• •

Management • Ensure all policies and procedures are established and enforced • Ensure systems and equipment are periodically inspected and maintained to a high degree of working order • Train supervisors • Train employees Supervisors • Closely monitors tasks and procedures • Train assigned employees • Ensure materials and equipment are maintained • Ensure that personnel assigned to the task are qualified Employees • Adhere to company policies • Follow work procedures and use of materials in accordance with training Be observant of potential hazards and corrective actions Immediately report incidents or potential hazards E. Training - In this section, present the training required for managers, supervisors, and employees. List the topics that must be covered for each group. Ask yourself "what do I want them to be able to do, and what do I want them to know to meet the specific program goals?" Also include the type of training such as classroom, field or on-the job or a combination of training session types. Detail the specifics of how often the training is to be conducted and for whom. If special qualifications are required for the person conducting the training, list the requirements. If there are specific source materials, such as a governmental regulation, IADC, API, IMO, ISO or other industry standard, include this in the training section. F. Recordkeeping - List what records your programs require. Identify the specific forms and documents to be used. This includes items such as audits, inspections and training. Forms & Documents - Any recordkeeping or management activity required by the program will need some type of document that either records the accomplishment of a program task or provides guidance for a task. Keep forms and documents as simple as possible. Don't require information that is not essential to the purpose of the form. Make sure the required information flows a logical progression and is easy to understand. G. Audits & Inspections - Detail the specific program monitoring procedures. Include the procedure for non-compliance correction and program improvement. All programs should require at least an annual review of effectiveness and hazard coverage. H. Hazards – List and define the specific hazards that are covered by the HSE-T program. Include the physical areas of your facility in which the hazards exist. I.

Hazard Controls – This section covers the engineering, administrative and work practice controls used to eliminate or control the specific program hazards.

J.

Engineering Controls – These are engineered safeguards used to protect employees by preventing exposure to hazards. Examples of engineering controls are machine guards, safety controls, isolation of hazardous areas, monitoring devices, etc.

K. Emergency Response and Security – The program should address any anticipated emergency, which includes emergency personnel, emergency contacts and responsibilities.



L.

Administrative Controls– These controls involve the use of procedures, assessments, inspection and records to monitor and ensure safe practices and environments are maintained. Other administrative controls are used to identify new hazards and implement corrective action. Examples of administrative controls are periodic inspections, equipment operating and maintenance procedures, hazard analysis, selection and assignment of personal protective equipment, etc.

M. Training Controls– This aspect of hazard control is used to ensure employees are fully and adequately trained to safely perform all tasks to which they are assigned. No employee should attempt any task without proper training in the equipment used, required personal protective equipment, specific hazards and their control and emergency procedures. Examples of training controls are new hire safety orientation, job-specific safety training and periodic refresher training. N. Policies & Procedures– This is the nuts & bolts section of a safety program. Programs such as Electrical Safety, Lockout - Tagout and Confined Space Entry require these detailed procedures to eliminate any doubt as to the steps required for safe performance. Some programs lend themselves to Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs), while some need only general guidelines.


1.10

Job Safety Analysis Form JOB SAFETY ANALYSIS

RIG:

TOOLPUSHER:

DATE:

WORK ACTIVITY (JOB) WORK TEAM (CREW MEMBERS) SEQUENCE OF BASIC JOB STEPS

POTENTIAL ACCIDENTS OR HAZARDS ASSOCIATED WITH EACH STEP

RECOMMENDATIONS TO ELIMINATE OR REDUCE POTENTIAL HAZARDS ASSOCIATED WITH EACH STEP

SAFETY EQUIPMENT REQUIRED TO DO THIS JOB STANDARD PPE

ADDITIONAL PPE

HARD HATS

FACE SHIELD

FALL PROTECTION BARRIER

SAFTEY BOOTS/SHOES

CHEMICAL RESISTANT APRON

WARNING BARRIER

COVERALLS

CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES

WARNING SIGNS

STANDARD WORK GLOVES

CHEMICAL RESISTANT BOOTS

LOCKOUT/TAGOUT

SAFETY GLASSES

CHEMICAL RESIETANT PANTS

WORK PERMIT REQUIRED

GOGGLES

RESPIRATORY PROTECTION

HOT WORK PERMIT

HEARING PROTECTION

DIELECTRIC GLOVES

CONFINED SPACE PERMIT

EAR PLUGS

OTHER PPE AS NEEDED

EAR MUFFS

FULL BODY HARNESS/FALL PROTECTION

BOTH PLUGS AND MUFFS

FIRE EXTINGUISHER

1.10 Job Safety Analysis Form © Copyright 2004 IADC All rights reserved


SYSTEMS


1.11

New Arrival Reception Outline

Direct arriving personnel to a specific location to sign-in. 1.

Hello, my name is

, and I would like to welcome you to

rig

. 2.

Please fill out the “Reception Questionnaire” that I am handing out. Complete all items on this questionnaire.

3.

Item #27 on the questionnaire will be Station #

for your abandon-rig and fire station location.

NOTE: Allow time to complete the questionnaire. 4.

Are there any questions regarding your questionnaire or any of the items covered so far?

5.

If not, please turn in your questionnaires at this time.

6.

The following Safety Policies and Procedures will be followed at all times during your stay aboard the rig. a)

Smoking will be permitted only in designated smoking areas.

b)

Hard hats, steel-toed boots, safety glasses with proper side shields and proper work clothes are to be worn outside the living quarters.

c)

Full body harness with lanyard and/or anti-fall safety devices are to be used at all times when working 6 feet above any surface.

7.

If you see anyone performing an unsafe act or see any equipment in an unsafe condition, please report it immediately.

8.

If you have an incident, whether it involves an actual injury – no matter how minor – or personal illness, report it immediately.

9.

Your personal safety, the safe operation of our rig and protection of the environment are our priorities. Remember safety is everyone’s responsibility.

10. Housekeeping is another priority. If you make a mess clean it up. 11. Please follow me so I can take you on a brief tour to help familiarize you with some of the items we just discussed. Included in the tour will be some of the other safety, survival, and fire-fighting equipment, and their location aboard our rig. NOTE: The following items/areas are to be covered during this brief tour for rig visitors. 1.

Main routes of egress and escape

2.

Fire-Fighting equipment

3.

Their bunkroom and the location of their lifejacket (offshore)

4.

The Muster List and their designated responsibility, if any (offshore)

5.

Location of designated briefing area/muster point (onshore)

6.

Location of the restrooms, showers, galley, water fountains, TV room and emergency contact phone numbers

7.

Location of other safety and first aid equipment, and the location of their fire and abandon-rig stations (offshore)

8.

Location of the other fire-fighting, safety, and survival equipment in the immediate area of the living quarters and the heliport.



SECTION TWO – GENERAL GUIDELINES AND HEALTH CONTROL 2.1

General Housekeeping A. Good housekeeping, cleanliness and order are first steps in safety. All work areas should be kept clean and orderly. (See 2.14.1 in the illustrations at the end of this section). B. All walkways and steps, etc., should be kept clear of tools, trash, boards, barrels, hoses and slipping hazards such as oil or grease. C. To the maximum extent possible, rig floors and decks, etc., should be kept clear of tools, trash, boards, equipment and slipping hazards such as oil, grease, drilling fluids or other liquids. D. Each work area should have a storage space or locker for tools and equipment used in that area. Rig floors should have a tool board or locker for hand tools and good storage racks for subs and other rig floor equipment. (See 2.14.1 at the end of this section.) E. To protect slings, shackles, pipe hooks, etc., each rig should have a storage locker. Boards used on pipe or casing racks should be neatly stored. F. Workshops should have proper storage areas for tools and equipment. All tools and equipment should be cleaned, inspected for damage, repaired if necessary and stored in the proper place after use. G. Trash and disposal containers should be placed in different areas around the rig. These containers should be emptied often enough to prevent overflowing. H. Combustible materials such as oil, oil filters or oily rags should be kept in cans designed specifically for such materials. I.

Flammable materials should be stored in paint lockers or an approved area.

J.

Equipment or other items should not block access to safety equipment such as BOP controls, fire extinguishers or hoses.

K. Guardrails or other suitable means should properly guard all temporary or permanent openings in the floor or deck. L. Drilling fluid should be cleaned off of the rig floor after making a connection and regularly during trips, or as quickly as the operation allows. M. Masts/derricks should be kept free of loose items such as tools, shackles, etc. Any item used above a work area should be secured to prevent it from falling. (Refer to Section 16) N. Spills from sack or bulk chemicals should be cleaned up as soon as possible. O. All rig waste should be disposed of in a proper manner. Non-deteriorating waste such as plastic bags, wrappers, wood, etc., may require special disposal procedures. (Refer to Section 14 Environment) P. Mix only enough paint to accomplish the task at hand. Q. Open containers of paint or thinner should not be in the paint locker.


R. Dispose of paint and thinner properly. Do not mix with other waste. S. Scrap metal should be kept separate from all other waste (hot metal could cause a fire if mixed with other waste).

2.2

Sanitation A. Galley personnel (personnel preparing food) should wear clean clothes and other proper attire, including shoes. A hat or hair net should be worn at all times by galley personnel while preparing meals. B. Galley personnel (personnel preparing food) should keep all abrasions or cuts covered with a clean dressing. C. Hand cleanliness is essential for galley personnel (personnel preparing food). Keep fingernails trimmed and hands clean. Hands should be washed with soap and water frequently and upon entering food preparation area and after utilizing toilet facilities.

D. Galley personnel (personnel preparing food) should be in good health. E. Smoking and use of tobacco should be allowed only in designated areas. F. Leftover food should be covered, dated and properly stored at the appropriate temperature. G. Careful attention should be made to the expiration date. H. Shelves and racks should be used to store food with stored items rotated so that the oldest is used first. I.

Insects and vermin should be controlled and kept out of food area.

J.

The dining area should be cleaned after each meal.

K. The galley should be cleaned on a continual basis. Floors should be disinfected frequently. L. Dishes should be sanitized before re-use. M. Toilet facilities should be kept clean and sanitized. N. Water coolers or cans should be cleaned before use. They should be covered, equipped with a spigot and used for this purpose only. Common drinking cups should not be used. O. All potable and non-potable water should be labeled. P. Dirty towels and clothes should be laundered after each use. Q. Garbage and waste should be segregated for proper disposal of after each meal. R. Living quarters should be kept clean. S. Changing rooms should be kept clean and orderly. Work clothes should be properly stored. T. Beds should be made daily. U. Personnel should not lie on beds in dirty work clothes and boots. © Copyright 2004 IADC All rights reserved


2.3

Personal Hygiene A. Personnel should bathe daily and start each day with a clean change of clothes. A worker wearing oily, greasy clothing, or clothes that have toxic chemicals spilled on them, is likely to experience irritating rashes, boils or other skin problems. B. Personnel should have an extra set of clean clothing at the rig to change into should their work clothes get contaminated with oil, diesel or other material that could cause skin irritation. Special clean and protective clothing consideration is necessary when working with oil or synthetic oil based drilling fluids. C. Consideration should be given to the prevention and spread of colds, influenza and/or other infectious diseases. D. When air breathing apparatus, dust or organic vapor respirators are required, facial hair should be removed to facilitate a proper face seal. E. Hair should be maintained in a manner that does not create a safety hazard. F. Rig personnel should wash hands and face before eating. Any toxic substance on a worker’s hands can be ingested while eating, drinking or smoking. G. Using solvents to clean the skin is never a good practice. Workers who use a solvent to clean their hands may develop dermatitis or possibly becoming sensitized to the chemical or solvent..

2.4

Alcohol, Drugs and Firearms A. Each company should develop its own policy that is issued to each employee. A signed acknowledgement page should be maintained in the employees personnel file. B. Illegal drugs, intoxicating beverages, firearms, weapons or other contraband should not be allowed on the rig or location. C. Reporting for duty under the influence of alcohol, narcotics or other drugs should not be allowed. D. Prescription drugs should be taken in strict accordance with the drug’s label and doctor’s guidance. Personnel who are taking prescription drugs should inform their supervisor. This is for two reasons, one to ensure the drugs will not interfere with the person’s alertness and ability to work safely and second, should the individual be injured, this information should be available to the medical provider. E. Any medications brought to the rig should be in the original container in which they were dispensed or purchased.

F. The booklet How to Keep Drugs Off Your Rig can be obtained from IADC Publications. G. Do not take another person’s prescription medication. In some regions there are federal laws against this action and doing so could result in a positive test and may include disciplinary action up to and including termination of employment.

2.5

Fitness for Duty The physical fitness of employees can affect their job performance and safety at the rig. In addition to being physically fit to carry out the physical requirements of the job, fitness includes being rested, and free of chemicals that could affect the employee’s performance. A. Employees should arrive at the work site fit for duty. This includes: 1. Rested – employees should get good rest prior to showing up at the rig for work on the first day of their shift and should get the proper rest after each tour thereafter. 2. Free from drugs or alcohol – employees should understand the affects that drug use might have on safe work performance. Also, employees should understand that heavy use of alcohol the day (night) before work can have carryover affects on the workday following heavy use of alcohol. 3. Illness – employees should notify their supervisor of any illness they may have contracted on their days off and any medication they may be taking. 4. Injury – employees should notify their supervisor of any injuries that they may have received on their days off. If the injury required a visit to a doctor, the employee should provide the supervisor a return-to-work release from their doctor.

2.6

Smoking

A. Smoking areas should be designated and identified on the rig site. B. Smoking is permitted only in designated areas. If you are unsure about the smoking areas on the rig, ask your supervisor. C. Smoking should not be allowed in food preparation areas.

2.7

Horseplay

A. Horseplay should not be allowed at any time. B. Wrestling, mock fights, practical jokes, etc., are examples of horseplay.

2.8

Proper Lifting Techniques A. Avoid manual lifting of heavy or awkward objects. Mechanical advantage or lifting devices should be used or assistance should be requested. B. When lifting an object with another person, coordinate the lift by using good communication. (For example: “One, Two, Three, Lift”) C. Check for proper footing before lifting or carrying an object. Make sure the area is clear of slip or trip hazards.

D. Proper lifting techniques should be followed when lifting any object. 1. Size up the load. Test to see if you can lift it safely. 2. Are there good handholds, cut outs or handles?

3. Get as close to the load as possible before lifting it. 4. Make sure your footing is secure. 5. Do not twist while lifting, move your feet so that they point in the direction of the lift as you turn. 6. Do not jerk the load; lift smoothly. 7. Use the same principles when lowering the load. E. Over-reaching, lifting over shoulder height, or body twisting should be avoided while lifting or moving an object. F. Carrying objects up or down stairs or steps with two hands should be avoided.

2.9

Chemical Hazard Communication Each company should establish a chemical hazard communication (HAZCOM) program. The company should obtain the appropriate current regulations which cover its operations. The Chemical Hazard Communication program should include at least the following: A. Employers should develop and maintain a written chemical hazard communication program for the workplace. B. Employers should ensure that labels on incoming containers of hazardous chemicals are not removed or defaced. C. Employers should maintain copies of any Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) that are received with incoming shipments of hazardous chemicals. A Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) should be obtained for any hazardous chemicals received without one. The Material Safety Data Sheets should be readily accessible to employees when they are in their work areas during each work shift.

D. Employers should ensure that employees are provided with information and training. E. Training of employees should be documented. F. Chemical inventory information including MSDSs should be shared between all parties on the rig or location.

2.10

Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material (NORM) Radiation is a natural component in our environment. There are two natural radiation sources: Cosmic rays external to the earth, and radiation from naturally occurring radioactive materials (NORM) found in the earth’s crust. Low-level radioactive scale can be produced in the course of some oil and gas operations. This occurs when NORM dissolves into the reservoir water. The production of oil and gas moves NORM to the surface, where it accumulates at low levels in processing and transport equipment. Some of the locations where it accumulates are piping, tubing, sludge pits, brine and sand filters, salt-water disposal injection wells and equipment, soils at the well site, as well as pipe cleaning and storage yards. NORM deposits may be found in equipment and piping that handles

produced liquids and gases. Any time you are advised by the well operator, or any customer representative, that NORM readings exceed 50 µR/hr above background, or are suspicious about

NORM contamination, notify the local management prior to the commencement or continuation of work. When the presence of NORM scale is suspected in piping, used tubing, or during vessel entry, the supervisor, manager, or safety representative should conduct, or cause to be conducted, measurement checks. The customer representative and local management should be notified of the results. Work should not continue if NORM readings exceed 50 µR/hr above background without prior authorization from the company. The following are precautions all company employees, contractors, and visitors should take: A. Wear proper protective equipment, including respiratory or breathing air apparatus, when entering contaminated vessels and when handling equipment or materials with exposed NORM. B. Avoid direct skin contact with radioactive scale and solids to the extent reasonably possible. C. Thoroughly wash hands and face immediately following any skin contact with contaminated materials, especially before eating, drinking, smoking or otherwise using tobacco. D. Keep the number of personnel in the work area to a minimum. E. Handle surface contamination in the wet state, to avoid inhaling NORM-contaminated scale. F. Any contaminated equipment or vessels that are to be worked on should be isolated, ventilated and left standing idle for 4 hours, before work commences. G. Wash contaminated protective equipment, clothing and tools in accordance with approved decontamination and waste disposal procedures. H. Handle contaminated equipment and pipe in accordance with approved waste and surplus equipment disposal, and/or storage procedures. I.

Confined Space procedures should also be followed.

2.11

Heat Stress and Heat Related Conditions Heat stress is a serious issue in industrial work environments. When poorly ventilated clothing is worn in high heat and humidity, heat stress can become a danger. The keys to preventing heat stress are understanding why it occurs, altering the work environment, providing fluids, and providing appropriate protective clothing. If someone shows symptoms of heat stress, it is important to take the individual to a cool, shaded area and provide plenty of drinking water. Seek medical attention immediately.

A. The Basics of Heat Stress 1. Heat stress occurs when the body is unable to release heat and cool itself. Even though the body is constantly exposed to varying temperatures, it is designed to maintain an internal temperature of 98.6 degrees. By circulating blood to the capillaries in the upper layers of the skin, the body releases heat, increasing perspiration and skin temperature. 2. When air temperature is equal to or warmer than the skin, blood brought to the skin's surface can't efficiently release heat. When this occurs, the body's main cooling

mechanism becomes the evaporation of perspiration. If evaporation can't occur, the body can't rid itself of excess heat, and the cooling process is impaired.

3. When workers labor in high-heat environments, the body's ability to cool itself is impeded by the muscles' need for extra blood. This decreases the amount of blood available to circulate to the skin, muscles, brain and internal organs, and leads to decreased alertness, stamina and physical performance. If the body can't release excess heat, it must store it. This increases the body's core temperature and heart rate. Aside from symptoms such as dizziness and hallucinations, prolonged heat stress can lead to death. B. Avoiding Heat Stress The following tips can help workers stay safe in hot conditions: 1. Drink plenty of fluids each day. Be sure to drink water even if you are not thirsty; thirst can be a sign of mild dehydration. As little as 2 percent dehydration can impair response times and motor skills. 2. Stay physically fit. A higher degree of physical fitness can increase heat tolerance. 3. Take frequent breaks to a cooler location. 4. Acclimatize yourself to the work environment. 5. When performing strenuous work on hot days, the buddy system should be used. 6. Watch your health. Some medications and medical conditions such as hypertension can worsen the effects of heat stress. 7. Avoid use of alcohol or drugs. 8. Wear clothing that offers appropriate protection from the environment. 9. Learn to recognize the signs of heat stress. 10. Provide air movers. C. Mechanics of Heat Related Conditions 1. Under normal conditions the body’s ability to dissipate heat through the evaporation of sweat and convection of cooler air over the skin is sufficient to prevent heat-related conditions from developing. 2. As the temperature and humidity rises, the effectiveness of the primary method of cooling by evaporation is reduced. 3. Another important factor for heat-related health problems is insufficient intake of fluids (water and electrolyte solutions) during these conditions. D. Signs, Symptoms and Treatment 1. Heat Stroke – Heat stroke occurs when the body can no longer regulate its temperature. With heat stroke the body’s temperature is very high (as high as 105 to 107 degrees). The skin will feel hot to the touch and is likely to be dry with a flushed to red color. The person will be disoriented, confused and possibly have a lowered level of responsiveness. If this condition exists, activate your emergency response plan immediately. Heat stroke must be treated immediately. Do the following while waiting for medical assistance:

a. Remove the patient from the hot environment and begin cooling them immediately by applying cool water directly to the skin (especially on the head, neck, underarm, groin and wrist area). Caution: If medical assistance is delayed, prolonged extreme cooling may cause the person to develop hypothermia (low body temperature). DO NOT OVER COOL THE PATIENT. b. Maintain an open airway and ensure they continue to breathe (apply oxygen if available and personnel are present who are qualified to administer). c.

Attempt to maintain responsiveness and be alert for possible seizure activity. The best treatment is prevention. When working in hot and humid conditions, drink plenty of fluids (water and sports drinks). Don’t wait until you are thirsty to drink. Wear natural fiber (cotton) clothing with long sleeves and long pants. Avoid tight fitting clothes and clothes made of synthetic fibers. Limit intake drinks that contain caffeine (coffee, iced tea, coke, root beer, etc.), also avoid heavy, high fat meals while on tour.

2. Heat Fatigue – The signs and symptoms of heat fatigue include impaired performance of skilled sensory-motor, mental, or vigilance jobs. There is no treatment for heat fatigue except to remove the heat stress before a more serious heat-related condition develops. 3. Heat Collapse ("Fainting"). – In heat collapse, the brain does not receive enough oxygen because blood pools in the extremities. As a result, the exposed individual may lose consciousness. This reaction is similar to that of heat exhaustion and does not affect the body's heat balance. However, the onset of heat collapse is rapid and unpredictable. 4. Heat Rashes – are the most common problem in hot work environments. Prickly heat is manifested as red papules and usually appears in areas where the clothing is restrictive. As sweating increases, these papules give rise to a prickling sensation. Prickly heat occurs in skin that is persistently wetted by un-evaporated sweat, and heat rash papules may become infected if they are not treated. In most cases, heat rashes will disappear when the affected individual returns to a cool environment. 5. Heat Cramps – Heat cramps usually develop during strenuous activity in a hot environment. Excessive sweating causes a loss of electrolytes, which causes cramping and pain in the legs, arms and abdomen. This condition is usually not an emergency and can be treated by: a. Removing the person to a cool environment b. Apply direct pressure on the cramping muscle c.

Gentle steady stretching

d. Rest e. Fluid replacement with water and/or half strength electrolyte solutions. Note: If the person does not show signs of improvement after being treated as listed above or develops other more serious signs and symptoms, immediate medical attention may be required. 6. Heat Exhaustion – Heat exhaustion occurs when excessive sweating and inadequate fluid intake causes a loss of the body’s fluid volume. This low fluid volume results in

inadequate blood circulation in the body. Early signs and symptoms may include fatigue, light-headedness, nausea, vomiting, headache and their skin is usually cool and pale. If left untreated they may develop classic signs of shock - increased heart rate, increased breathing rate and eventually low blood pressure. Heat exhaustion can be treated by: a. Removing the person to a cool location b. Have the person lay down with feet elevated 8 to 12 inches (20.3 to 30.5 centimeters) c.

If the person is alert and able to do so, administer a diluted electrolyte solution.

Note: If the person does not show signs of improvement or develops other more serious signs and symptoms, immediate medical attention may be required. E. Heat Index Chart: Heat Index (HI) is the temperature the body feels when heat and humidity are combined. The chart below shows the Heat Index that corresponds to the actual air temperature and relative humidity. This chart is based upon shady, light wind conditions. (Exposure to direct sunlight can increase the HI by up to 15°F [7.8°C.) Our bodies dissipate heat by varying the rate and depth of blood circulation, by losing water through the skin and sweat glands, and as a last resort, by panting, when blood is heated above 98.6°F (37°C). Sweating cools the body through evaporation. However, high relative humidity retards evaporation, robbing the body of its ability to cool itself. When heat gain exceeds the level the body can remove, body temperature begins to rise, and heat related illnesses and disorders may develop.

Temperature (F) versus Relative Humidity (%)

1

°F

90%

80%

70%

60%

50%

40%

30%

20%

10%

65

65.6

64.7

63.8

62.8

61.9

60.9

60.

59.1

58.1

70

71.6

70.7

69.8

68.8

67.9

66.9

66.

65.1

64.1

75

79.7

76.7

75.8

74.8

73.9

72.9

72.

71.1

70.1

80

88.2

85.9

84.2

82.8

81.6

80.4

79.

77.4

76.1

85

101.4

97.

93.3

90.3

87.7

85.5

83.5

81.6

79.6

90

119.3

112

105.8

100.5

96.1

92.3

89.2

86.5

84.2

95

141.8

131.1

121.7

113.6

106.7

100.9

96.1

92.2

89.2

100

168.7

154.

140.9

129.5

119.6

111.2

104.2

98.7

94.4

105

200

180.7

163.4

148.1

134.7

123.2

113.6

105.8

100.

110

235.

211.2

189.1

169.4

151.9

136.8

124.1

113.7

105.8

HI 80°F - 90°F 90°F - 105°F 05°F - 130°F 130°F or greater

Possible Heat Disorder: Fatigue possible with prolonged exposure and physical activity. Sunstroke, heat cramps and heat exhaustion possible. Sunstroke, heat cramps, and heat exhaustion likely, and heat stroke possible. Heat stroke highly likely with continued exposure.

*Source: U.S. National Weather Service

Temperature (C) versus Relative Humidity (%) C

90%

80%

70%

60%

50%

40%

30%

20%

10%

18

18.7

18.2

17.6

17.1

16.6

16.1

15.6

15.1

14.5

21

22.0

21.5

21.0

20.4

19.9

19.4

18.9

18.4

17.8

24

26.5

24.8

24.33

23.8

23.3

22.7

22.2

21.7

21.2

27

31.2

29.9

29.0

28.2

27.6

26.9

26.1

25.2

24.5

29

38.6

36.1

34.1

32.4

30.9

29.7

28.6

27.6

26.4

32

48.5

44.4

41.0

38.1

35.6

33.5

31.8

30.3

29.0

35

61.0

55.1

49.8

45.3

41.5

38.3

35.6

33.4

31.8

38

75.4

67.8

60.5

54.2

48.7

44.0

40.1

37.1

34.7

41

93.3

82.6

73.0

64.5

57.1

50.7

45.3

41.0

37.8

43

112.8

99.6

87.3

76.3

66.6

58.2

51.2

45.4

41.0

HI 27°C – 32°C 32°C - 41°C 41°C – 54°F 54°C or greater

Possible Heat Disorder: Fatigue possible with prolonged exposure and physical activity. Sunstroke, heat cramps and heat exhaustion possible. Sunstroke, heat cramps, and heat exhaustion likely, and heat stroke possible. Heat stroke highly likely with continued exposure.

*Source: U.S. National Weather Service

2.12

Cold Weather Considerations Working in cold weather can be dangerous. To cope with cold weather, stay active, dress warmly, stay dry, and observe best practices for cold weather. Cold weather takes away body heat. Too much heat loss can cause the inner body (core) temperature to fall to dangerously low levels causing hypothermia and even death. Exposed body parts may freeze in extreme cold weather. This is called frostbite. Cold weather can aggravate existing medical conditions like rheumatism and arthritis. Cold weather affects dexterity, mental skills, and coordination. Prolonged exposure to even moderate cold weather can cause injuries. Working in cold weather increases the risk of musculoskeletal injuries such as back strain. Do warm up exercises and stretching before handling heavy equipment and material. See Section 11 – Cold Weather Safety.

2.13

Blood-borne Pathogens BBP

A. General Information In the drilling industry, as in other non-healthcare fields, employees who are designated as responsible for rendering first aid or medical assistance as part of their job duties are to be covered by this section. Employers should develop an “Exposure Control Plan” for these employees. These guidelines discuss basic compliance considerations for land and offshore drilling contractors. A model exposure control plan is included which may be adapted for use by an individual contractor. B. Definitions 1. PATHOGEN: A microorganism that may be present in human blood and can cause disease in humans. These pathogens include, but are not limited to, such pathogenic

diseases as AIDS-HIV, Malaria, Syphilis and Hepatitis B (HBV). These diseases may be transmitted through the absorption of foreign body fluids.

2. HUMAN IMMUNODEFICIENCY VIRUS (HIV): The Human Immunodeficiency Virus (HIV) causes death and disease by attacking the body’s immune system. In the early stages, the individual experiences acute symptoms similar to mononucleosis. As the disease progresses, the patient suffers from fever, diarrhea and fatigue. HIV-infected individuals may also develop neurological problems, cancer and other opportunistic infections in the esophagus, trachea, bronchi and lungs. Current epidemiological information indicates that most people who are infected with HIV will eventually develop AIDS, and while the disease can be managed by treating the clinical symptoms, the immunodeficiency is irreversible. THERE IS PRESENTLY NO VACCINE AVAILABLE TO PREVENT INFECTION. 3. HEPATITIS B (HBV): The symptoms of Hepatitis B are well known, and in the early stages, the disease resembles the flu. More severe clinical illness is characterized by lack of appetite, dark urine, jaundice, nausea, vomiting, abdominal pain and diarrhea. Hepatitis B infection may also place other family members at risk, and there is a 30 percent chance that the sexual partner of acutely infected individuals will also become infected. If the person is a carrier, the partner’s risk of infection is even higher. THERE IS A VACCINE AVAILABLE TO PREVENT INFECTION. C. Pathogen Contamination Infection is possible from such body secretions as: blood, saliva, urine, vomitus, semen or vaginal fluids. D. Workplace Transmission While intact skin offers some protection against foreign body fluids and bloodborne pathogens, they may be transmitted through the skin via accidental injection with needles, scalpels, shards of glass, and other sharp objects. They may also enter the body through open cuts, nicks and skin abrasions. There is evidence also that they may be transmitted by splashes to the eyes and mucous membranes. E. Exposure Determination Contractors should determine those positions on drilling installations where a potential exists for occupational exposure to pathogens. Personnel whose job duties include, but are not limited to, providing medical assistance, by definition, are determined to have occupational exposure. As a result of providing medical assistance and/or immediate aid to injured coworkers, these employees may be come exposed to blood or other body fluids. F. Universal Precautions The term “universal precautions” refers to a system of infection control that assumes that every direct contact with body fluids is potentially infectious. The risks of injury to workers offshore require that the principles of universal precautions be provided to personnel whose job duties include providing medical assistance. Any persons who may incur direct contact with body fluids should be protected as though such body fluids were HBV – or HIV – infected. G. Training

Training in the universal precautions of bloodborne pathogens should contain at a minimum the following elements:

1. A general explanation of the signs and symptoms of bloodborne pathogens as well as methods of disease control; 2. An explanation of the modes of transmission of bloodborne pathogens; 3. An explanation of the appropriate methods for recognizing tasks and other activities that may involve exposure to blood and other potentially infectious materials; 4. An explanation of the use and limitations of methods that will prevent or reduce exposure, including appropriate engineering controls, work practices and personal protective equipment; 5. Information on the types, proper use, locations, removal, handling, decontamination and disposal of personal protective equipment; 6. An explanation of the basis for selection of personal protective equipment; 7. Information on the Hepatitis B vaccine, including information on its efficiency, safety, method of administration, the benefits of being vaccinated and that the vaccine and vaccination will be offered free of charge; 8. Information on the appropriate actions to take and persons to contact in an emergency involving blood or other potentially infectious materials; 9. An explanation of the procedure to follow if an exposure incident occurs, including the method of reporting the incident and the medical follow-up that will be made available; 10. Information on the post-exposure evaluation and follow-ups that the employer may provide for the employee following an exposure incident. H. Personal Protective Equipment Personal protective clothing and equipment must be suitable. This means the level of protection must fit the expected exposure. PPE may include gloves, laboratory coats, face shields or masks, eye protection, pocket masks and other protective items. The appropriate PPE should be readily available to employees determined to have occupational exposure. On installations where medical facilities exist, the appropriate PPE provided should be commensurate with facility capabilities and the abilities of personnel whose duties include rendering medical assistance. Drilling installations having no hospital treatment room or emergency response station should equip any first aid kits with a minimum of personal protective equipment. This may include: 1. Disposable rubber gloves, 2. Disposable face cover, 3. Goggles, and 4. Disposable one way breathing tube for administering CPR. I.

Housekeeping/Laundry

In the event that equipment or working surfaces on drilling installations should become contaminated with blood and body fluids, the entire area should be considered a hazardous condition until the potentially hazardous contamination has been removed.

1. Any areas where blood and body fluids exist should be cleaned immediately. 2. Any equipment used for cleaning should be disinfected or safely disposed of. 3. Wear gloves and any additional personal protective equipment to prevent skin exposure. 4. Restrict access to the area. 5. Clean with an appropriate disinfecting solution, or if not available, with a bleach/water solution (10 parts water to 1 part bleach). Both are effective in killing the HIV/HBV viruses. 6. If soiled or contaminated laundry/clothing is encountered it should be laundered by means of an autoclave sterilization process, washed separately with a 10% chlorine solution or properly disposed of via burning or chemical destruction. Linens soiled with blood or other body fluids may also be gathered for cleaning, providing they are placed in a double-layered plastic bag and labeled accordingly. 7. Care should be taken when cleaning living quarters. Personnel should wear appropriate protective gear when cleaning and ensure high levels of sanitation and hygiene are maintained. Frequent hand washing is one of the best defenses against spreading infection. J.

Hazardous Waste/Communication 1. All reusable medical supplies are to be sterilized before and after use. Contaminated sharp tools (i.e., disposable needles, scalpel blades, etc.) should never be sterilized for reuse. 2. Contaminated items that cannot be disinfected or disposed of safely on site should be placed in a leak-proof and puncture-resistant container. The contents must be clearly marked and the container disposed of in accordance with local law. 3. Dependent on the area of the world, contaminated waste sent to shore from an offshore installation is classified as bio-hazardous waste. An orange or orange-red biohazard label should be used to identify biohazards if leaving the facility for disposal, decontamination, or storage off-site.

K. Immunization & Post-exposure Evaluation & Follow Up Drilling contractors should make available the Hepatitis B vaccine and vaccination to all persons determined to have potential occupational exposure due to job responsibilities. These vaccinations should be made available at no cost to the employee. Additionally, any employee who has had a documented exposure incident should be entitled to a confidential test medical evaluation and follow up. L. Record Keeping 1. Accurate records should be maintained on employees who elect and receive, or decline the offer of a vaccination against Hepatitis B. 2. Records are to be kept on employees with a reported occupational exposure incident including results of examinations, medical testing and follow up procedures.

3. Medical records should be confidential and not discussed or reported without the employee’s express written consent to any person within or outside the workplace except as may be required by law. 4. All personnel records relative to pathogen training, exposure, vaccinations, etc., should be maintained for the employee’s duration of employment. M. Exposure Control Plan The exposure control plan shown in Section 2.13 may be used as a model for individual contractors to develop their own plans to comply with the Blood-borne Pathogens standard.

2.14

Model Exposure Control Plan This program was developed to eliminate or minimize employee exposure to bloodborne pathogens. 1. EXPOSURE DETERMINATION a.

CATEGORY I 1) Full time medical support personnel (medic, EMT) who may be assigned to drilling installations. 2) Employees who may receive occupational exposure to bloodborne pathogens as part of their primary duties.

b. CATEGORY II 1) Employees trained by the employer in first aid/CPR to meet the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.151 (first aid responders in remote operating areas). 2) Employees trained by the employer in first aid/CPR who may be exposed to bloodborne pathogens while responding to a medical emergency at the job site as a collateral duty. NOTE: Employers should identify which employees fit into the above categories and list by position in Category I or II. c.

TASKS AND PROCEDURES The following is a list of tasks and/or procedures in which employee(s) may experience occupational exposure:

1) Providing emergency first aid i.

Controlling bleeding ii.

Dressing wounds

iii. Maintaining an airway iv. CPR – artificial respiration 2) Post emergency housekeeping

i.

Cleaning up blood

ii.

Handling blood-contaminated materials 3) Post emergency disposal Handling containers or bags of regulated medical waste (materials contaminated with blood) d. REVIEW, UPDATE AND AVAILABILITY 1) Employer will review and update this plan at least annually and whenever necessary to reflect new or modified tasks and procedures that affect occupational exposure and reflect new or revised employee positions with occupational exposure. 2) Employer will make a copy of the plan accessible to all employees. 2. PRECAUTIONS AND CONTROLS a. All employees assigned to a position listed in Category I or Category II under the Exposure Control Plan will observe Universal Precautions. b. All human blood and certain body fluids are to be treated as if known to be infectious for HIV, HBV, and other bloodborne pathogens. 3. ENGINEERING AND WORK PRACTICE CONTROLS b. Engineering and work practice controls will be used to eliminate or minimize employee exposure. Where occupational exposure remains after institution of these controls, personal protective equipment will also be used.

c.

The following engineering and work practice controls have been implemented:

1) Hand washing facilities are readily accessible. 2) If hand-washing facilities are not accessible, employees will utilize either (1) alcohol towelettes, or (2) antiseptic hand cleanser with a clean cloth. 3) Employees should wash their hands immediately or as soon as feasible, after removal of gloves or other personal protective equipment. 4) Employees should wash their hands or other skin with soap and water and flush mucous membranes with water immediately, or as soon as feasible, following an exposure incident. Eyewash should be available for employee use. 5) Employees should be prohibited from eating, drinking, or handling contact lenses in areas where occupational exposure is likely. 6) All first aid, clean up, and disposal procedures involving blood or other potentially infectious materials should be performed so as to minimize splashing, spraying, spattering, and generation of droplets. 7) Potentially infectious materials should be placed in a labeled or color-coded container, which prevents leakage during collection, handling, processing, storage, transport, or shipping.

8) Equipment, which becomes contaminated with blood or other potentially infectious material, should be decontaminated prior to resuming normal operations. 9) The employer should examine, maintain, or replace engineering controls on a regular basis to ensure their effectiveness. 4. PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT a. First responders should put on PPE prior to rendering first aid/CPR, which may involve exposure to bloodborne pathogens. b. Types of personal protective equipment to be made available by employer: 1) Latex gloves 2) CPR “pocket mask” resuscitation devices equipped with one way valves 3) Eye protection and masks or face shields which combine eye, nose, and mouth protection c.

PPE should be worn: 1) Anytime the first responder could reasonably be exposed to bloodborne pathogens while rendering first aid 2) Anytime someone is handling or touching contaminated materials, equipment, or work surfaces during disposal

5. HOUSEKEEPING a. Contaminated equipment and work surfaces should be cleaned and disinfected with chlorine bleach solution, alcohol solution, or alcohol towelettes after each occupational exposure. b. All contaminated waste should be placed in appropriate containers immediately or as soon as feasible. Contaminated waste may include: 1) Latex gloves 2) Disposable face shields 3) Disposable one-way valves 4) Contaminated clothing 5) Absorbents 6) Clean up materials c.

Appropriate containers should be:

1) Closeable

2) Constructed to contain all contents and prevent leakage during handling, storage, transport, or shipping 3) Labeled or color-coded 4) Examples of appropriate containers include: i.

Red plastic bag with biohazard label

ii.

Plastic trash can with sealed lid and red biohazard tag

5) Disposal of regulated or contaminated waste should be in accordance with applicable regulations. 6. VACCINAT ION Who and When a. The employer should make the HBV vaccination available to all employees assigned to Category I – personnel whose primary duties may result in occupational exposure. The vaccination should be made available with ten (10) days of initial assignment. b. The employer should make the HBV vaccination available to all employees assigned to Category II – personnel whose collateral duties may result in potential occupational exposure. The vaccination should be made available within 24 hours after exposure. c.

The HBV vaccination should be made available at no cost to the employee. The employee may decline to receive the vaccination, but it will be offered again at a later time if the employee elects to receive it and is still covered under the exposure control plan.

7. POST EXPOSURE EVALUATION AND FOLLOW-UP a. Medical Evaluation and FollowUp Following a report of an exposure incident, the exposed employee (after consent) should receive a confidential medical evaluation and follow-up at no cost, including the following: 1) Documentation of the route(s) of exposure, and the circumstances under which the exposure occurred. 2) Identification and documentation of the source individual, unless the employer can establish that identification is unfeasible or prohibited by local law. 3) Collection and testing of blood for HBV and HIV with the exposed and source individuals’ consent. 4) Post-exposure prophylaxis, when medically indicated, as recommended by the U.S. Public Health Service or other similar governmental public health service.

5) Counseling 6) Evaluation of reported illnesses b. INFORMATION PROVIDED TO THE HEALTHCARE PROFESSIONAL

The healthcare professional evaluating an employee should be provided with the following information: 1) Copy of applicable regulations. 2) Description of the exposed employee’s duties as they relate to the exposure incident. 3) Documentation of the route(s) of exposure and circumstances under which exposure occurred. 4) Results of the source individual’s blood testing, if available. 5) All medical records relevant to the appropriate treatment of the employee, including vaccination status, which are the employer’s responsibility to maintain. c.

HEALTHCARE PROFESSIONAL’S WRITTEN OPINION 1) The employee should receive a copy of the doctor’s written opinion with fifteen (15) days upon completion of the evaluation. The doctor’s written opinion for HBV vaccination should be limited to whether HBV vaccination is indicated for an employee and if the employee has received such vaccination. 2) The doctor’s written opinion for post-exposure evaluation and follow-up should be limited to the following information: i.

That the employee has been informed of the results of the evaluation

ii.

That the employee has been told about any medical conditions resulting from exposure to blood or other potentially infectious materials which require further evaluation or treatment

3) All other findings or diagnosis should remain confidential and not be included in a written report. 4) All medical evaluations and procedures including HBV vaccine and vaccination series and post-exposure evaluation and follow-up, including prophylaxis, should be made available at no cost to the employee at a reasonable time and place. They should be performed by or under the supervision of a licensed physician, or by or under the supervision of another healthcare professional. An accredited laboratory at no cost to the employee should conduct all laboratory tests. All medical records should be kept in accordance with local laws and regulations. 5. COMMUNICATIONS OF HAZARDS a.

LABELS AND SIGNS 1) All containers used for storing, transporting, or shipping regulated waste containing blood or other potentially infectious materials should be labeled with the following legend: BIOHAZARD 2) The labels should be fluorescent orange or orange-red, or predominantly so, with lettering or symbols in contrasting color. Labels should be affixed as close as

feasible to the container by string, wire, adhesive or other material that prevents their loss or unintentional removal. 3) RED BAGS OR RED CONTAINERS MAY BE SUBSTITUTED FOR LABELS. b.

INFORMATION AND TRAINING

1) All employees in Category I and Category II should participate in a training program at the initial assignment to a task where occupational exposure may take place and at least annually thereafter. Additional training should be provided when changes, such as modification of tasks or procedures, affect the employee’s occupational exposure. 2) The training program should contain, at a minimum, the following elements: i.

Applicable regulations

ii.

A general explanation of the incidence, distribution, control and symptoms of bloodborne diseases

iii. An explanation of the modes of transmission of bloodborne pathogens iv. An explanation of the employer’s Exposure Control Plan and the means by which the employee can obtain a copy of the written plan v.

An explanation of the appropriate methods for recognizing tasks and other activities that may involve exposure to blood and other potentially infectious materials

vi. An explanation of the use and limitations of methods that should prevent or reduce exposure including appropriate engineering controls, work practices, and personal protective equipment vii. Information on the types of personal protective equipment, how to select, proper use, location, removal, handling, decontamination or disposal thereof viii. Information on the Hepatitis B vaccine, including information on effectiveness, safety, method of administration, the benefits of being vaccinated, and that the vaccine should be offered free of charge ix. Information on the appropriate actions to take and persons to contact in an emergency involving blood or other potentially infectious materials x.

An explanation of the procedure to follow if an exposure incident occurs, including the method of reporting the incident and the medical follow-up that should be made available.

xi. Information on the post-exposure evaluation and follow-up that the employer is required to provide the employee following an exposure incident xii. An explanation of the signs and labels and/or color-coding xiii. An opportunity for interactive questions and answers with the person conducting the training

3) The instructor should be knowledgeable in the subject matter covered in the training program as it relates to the employers’ workplace. 6. RECORD-KEEPING a. MEDICAL RECORDS 1) The employer should establish and maintain accurate medical records for each employee with occupational exposure in accordance with applicable regulations. See Attachment A for a sample Employee Health Record. 2) Employee medical records should be kept confidential and not disclosed or reported without the employee’s express written consent to anyone within or outside the Company. 3) The employer should maintain the employee medical records according to local or federal regulations. b. TRAINING RECORDS 1) The employer should establish and maintain training records in accordance with applicable regulations. 2) Training records should be maintained for three (3) years from the date of training.

2.15

Illustrations

2.14.1

Good housekeeping is a must. Work areas should be clean and orderly, and tools should be properly stored when not in use. Refer to Section 2.0.A.

2.14.2

Arrows indicate eye wash station and box for storage of personal protective equipment.


SECTION THREE – EQUIPMENT SAFETY 3.1

F.

Electrical Equipment A.

Rig supervisors should ensure that personnel are instructed in the proper use and maintenance of electrical equipment around the rig.

B.

The breaker switch for any electric equipment should be locked and/or tagged out and tested to ensure no current is present at the equipment to be worked on before conducting any repairs (see section 3.1).

C.

Splicing or cutting of electrical wire by unauthorized personnel should not be permitted.

D.

Never ignore electrical problems. If any electrical equipment fails to operate, do not experiment. Contact authorized personnel.

E.

A fuse puller should be used to remove and replace defective fuses.

Plugs and cords should be protected from being damaged. G.

All electrical wall outlets, hand tools, extension cords, etc. should be provided with proper grounds or removed from operation.

H.

Power hand tool safety devices should not be modified. (For example: Applying tape to keep the power switch on a hand grinder engaged.)

I.

Electrical power tools should not be used in gaseous or explosive atmospheres, unless approved for such use (see Section 3.0.JJ).

J.

When using tools, do not exceed company policies and procedures developed in consideration of the manufacturer’s recommendations.

K.

All electrical tools should be turned off before connecting to or disconnecting from the power supply.

L.

Electrical devices should not be operated when water hazards are present.

M.

Water or any substance containing water should not be used to extinguish an electrical fire.

N.

Water or other cleaning agents should be used carefully near electric devices.

O.

All extension cords should be checked regularly and kept in good condition. P.

Electrical cords should be protected from vehicular or human traffic.

Q.

Cords should be disconnected from the power source before coiling for storage.

R.

All guards on electrical equipment should be kept in place and in good repair. S.

T.

Water, dirt, oil or excessive dust should not be allowed to accumulate around electrical equipment.

All overhead lights should be equipped with safety fasteners.



U.

Explosion-proof lighting fixtures should be used where required by the classification of the area.

V.

SCR units, rig and auxiliary generator plants should be grounded.

W.

Before main breaker switches are thrown “in” or “out”, the equipment controlled by these breakers should be turned off or on by the equipment control switch. (Do not use breakers for equipment on / off switches.)

X.

Should a circuit breaker kick out (disengage), the reason the breaker kicked out should be determined before the circuit breaker is re-engaged.

Y.

When re-engaging a circuit breaker that has kicked out, always stand to the side and look away from the breaker as it is re-engaged.

Z.

All lighting fixtures should be kept clean and in good repair. Broken or burned out bulbs should be replaced as soon as possible. Vapor-proof globes and guards should be kept in place over lights.

AA. Explosion-proof equipment should be returned to its explosion-proof condition repaired.

when

BB. Non-conductive mats should be placed in front of the switchboards and maintained in a clean condition. CC. All high voltage panels should be clearly marked “DANGER – HIGH VOLTAGE.” (See 3.28.1 in the illustrations at the back of this section) DD. Any defective or unsafe electrical equipment should be reported to a supervisor and its use discontinued. EE. Never assume electrical wiring is harmless. Check the source to ensure it has been disconnected, even if only changing a light bulb. FF. Never assume low voltage cannot be dangerous. GG. Personnel rescuing a victim of electrical shock should first switch off the power causing the shock. If this is not possible, attempt to pull the victim away from the live conductor by using a dry stick, a dry rope, or other nonconductive material. First Aid for electrical shock victims should be given according to procedures as outlined in a First Aid book. HH. A work permit may be necessary when using electrical power tools in some areas. II.

All explosion-proof junction boxes and breaker boxes should be properly sealed with all bolts in place if applicable.

JJ. All wires must meet approved codes and specifications. KK. All wires should be properly secured in wire trays. LL. Class I locations are those in which flammable gases or vapors are, or may be, present in the air in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures. On a drilling rig, Class I can exist in or around rig floor, cellars, substructures, mud tanks, shale shakers,

desanders and desilters. Class I locations are further identified as either Class I, Division 1 or Class I, Division 2 locations. ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OR WIRING USED OR

INSTALLED IN A CLASS I, DIVISION 1 LOCATION MUST MANUFACTURED, AND APPROVED FOR THAT TYPE OF LOCATION.

BE

DESIGNED,

MM. Classification is based on API RP 500. Refer to the "Electrical Classifications" diagrams in Section 3.27 for examples of Class I, Division 1 and Class I, Division 2 locations. (For further information on electrical classifications, refer to API RP 500). 1. A Class I, Division 1 Location is a location: a. In which hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors may exist under normal operating condition; or b. In which hazardous concentrations of such gases or vapors may exist frequently because of repair or maintenance operations or because of leakage; or c.

In which breakdown or faulty operations of equipment or processes might release hazardous concentrations of flammable gases or vapors and might also cause simultaneous failure of electrical equipment that could become a source of ignition.

2. A Class I, Division 2 Location is a location: a. In which volatile flammable liquids or flammable gases are handled, processed, or used, but in which they will normally be confined within closed containers or systems from which they can escape only through accidental rupture or breakdown of the containers or systems, or by abnormal operation of equipment; or b. In which hazardous concentrations of gases or vapors are normally prevented by positive mechanical ventilation and which might become hazardous through failure or abnormal operations of the ventilating equipment; or c.

That is adjacent to a Class I Division 1 location, and to which hazardous concentrations or gases or vapor might occasionally be communicated unless prevented by adequate positive-pressure ventilation from a source of clean air. Effective safeguards against ventilation failure must be provided.

NN. Classification based on API RP 505. 1. A Class I, Zone 0 Location is a location: a. In which ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors are present continuously; or b. In which ignitable concentrations of such gases or vapors are present for long periods of time. 2. A Class I, Zone 1 Location is a location: a. In which ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors are likely to exist under normal operating conditions; or b. In which ignitable concentrations of gases or vapors may exist frequently because of repair or maintenance operations or because of leakage; or c.

In which equipment is operated or processes are carried on, of such a nature that equipment breakdown or faulty operations could result in the release of ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors and also cause simultaneous failure of © Copyright 2004 IADC All rights reserved


electrical equipment in a mode to cause the electrical equipment to become a source of ignition; or d. That is adjacent to a Class I Zone 0 Location from which ignitable concentrations of vapors could be communicated, unless communication is prevented by adequate positive pressure ventilation from a source of clean air and effective safeguards against ventilation failure are provided. 3. A Class I, Zone 2 Location is a location: a. In which ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors are not likely to occur in normal operation and if they do occur will exist only for a short period; or b. In which volatile flammable liquids, flammable gases, or flammable vapors are handled, processed, or used, but in which the liquids, gases, or vapors normally are confined within closed containers or closed systems from which they can escape, only as a result of accidental rupture or breakdown of the containers or system, or as a result of the abnormal operation of the equipment with which the liquids or gases are handled, processed, or used; or c.

In which ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors normally are prevented by positive mechanical ventilation, but which may become hazardous as a result of failure or abnormal operation of the ventilation equipment; or

d. That is adjacent to a Class I Zone 1 Locations, from which ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors could be communicated, unless such communication is prevented by adequate positive pressure ventilation from a source of clean air, and effective safeguards against ventilation failure are provided.

3.2

Control of Hazardous Energy – Lockout/Tagout A. The employer should establish a program consisting of energy control procedures, employee training, and periodic inspections. All employees should understand that before any employee performs servicing or maintenance on a machine or equipment where the unexpected energizing, start up, or release of stored energy could occur and cause injury, the machine or equipment shall be isolated from the energy source, rendered inoperative and energy source tested to ensure that energy has been released or not present. B. If an energy-isolating device is not capable of being locked out, the employer’s energy control program should use a tagout system. C. Whenever replacement or major repair, renovation, or modification of a machine or equipment is performed, and whenever new machines or equipment are installed, energyisolating devices for such machines or equipment should be designed to accept a lockout device. D. Through employer provided training, employees should understand the purpose and function of the energy control program and that the knowledge and skills required for the safe application, usage and removal of the energy controls are acquired by the employees. E.

Lockout/Tagout Plans may include the following elements. 1. All machinery or equipment that is capable of movement should be de-energized or disengaged and locked out during cleaning, servicing, adjusting or setting up operations, whenever required.

2. Where the power disconnecting means for equipment does not also disconnect the electrical control circuit: a. The appropriate electrical enclosures are identified. b. Means is provided to assure the control circuit can also be disconnected and locked out. 3. Locking out main power disconnects for equipment may be required as opposed to only the locking out of specific control circuits. 4. All equipment control valve handles should be provided with a means for locking out. 5. Stored energy (mechanical, hydraulic, air, etc.) is required to be released or blocked before equipment is locked out for repairs. 6. Employees required to work on equipment should be provided with individually keyed personal safety locks. 7. Employees who work on equipment should keep personal control of their key(s) while they have safety locks in use. 8. Only the employee exposed to the hazard is to place or remove the safety lock. 9. Employees should check the safety of the lockout by attempting a startup after making sure no one is exposed. 10. Employees should be instructed to always push the control circuit stop button immediately after checking the safety of the lockout. 11. There should be a means provided to identify any or all employees who are working on locked-out equipment by their locks or accompanying tags. 12. There should be a sufficient number of accident prevention signs or tags and safety padlocks provided for any reasonably foreseeable repair emergency. 13. In the event that equipment or lines cannot be shut down, locked out and tagged, there should be a safe job procedure established and rigidly followed. 14. A log should be kept for equipment that is locked out over a crew change or extended period of time.

3.3

Hand Tools Hand tools such as hammers, wrenches, chisels, pliers, screwdrivers, and other hand tools are often underrated as sources of potential danger. They may look harmless, but they are the causes of many injuries. These injuries can be serious, including loss of fingers or eyesight. Workers should be taught the proper use of hand tools as well as the use of PPE such as gloves, goggles that may be required when using various types of hand tools. A. Rig supervisors should ensure that personnel are instructed in the proper use and maintenance of hand tools. B. Frequent inspection of all hand tools should be made to ensure that they are in safe operating condition. Hand tools should not be altered or welded on.

C. Driving faces of hammers, chisels, drift pins, bars and similar tools should be inspected to eliminate mushroomed heads, broken faces and other defects. Driving faces that are mushroomed should be ground smooth. Driving faces that exhibit cracking should be removed from service. D. Use the right tool for the job. Hammer handles should not be used as prybars, nor should a wrench be used as a hammer. E.

Tools should be returned to their proper storage place after use.

F.

Sharp tools, such as screwdrivers, should not be carried in pockets.

G. When tightening pipe, swab nuts, swab rods, etc., you should not stand or jump on the wrench for additional force. H. Cheaters should be used only if absolutely necessary. Do not use cheaters on chain binders at any time. Secure chain binders with rope or chain once fastened. I. J.

Wood handles should be sound and securely wedged or fastened to the tool. Tape should not be used to cover defects such as cracks in wooden handles. Tools carried into the derrick should be secured to prevent being dropped.

K. When hand tools are being used overhead, those working or standing below should be notified and the area restricted. In addition, secure the tools with a safety lanyard to prevent them from falling in case the grip is lost. L. Pipe wrenches should be inspected regularly. Replace the heel and jaw sections if found to be defective or worn out. M.

Pipe wrenches should not be used to bend, raise or lift pipe.

N. When using a hammer wrench, attach a piece of rope, or rubber “O” ring to the handle to apply tension on the wrench to hold it in place. A worker should never hold a hammer wrench in hand while the wrench is being struck with a hammer. O. When using clamps to hold equipment or parts, ensure that the proper type is being used. Cclamps should not be used for hoisting. P. When using hand tools around the rotary table or the well bore, be sure to cover the well bore hole.

3.4

Q.

Insulated hand tools should be used when working on or around electrical equipment.

R.

Brass hammers may be necessary in gas-sensitive areas.

S.

Electric hand tools should be grounded or double insulated.

Drill Pipe / Collar Slips and Elevators A. Rig supervisors should instruct personnel in the proper use and maintenance of slips and elevators on the rig. B.

Slips and elevators should not be modified or welded on.

C. Keys, pins, dies, handles and bodies on all pipe and collar slips should be checked frequently for wear or damage. D. Rig personnel should keep their hands and feet, as well as chains, ropes, etc., away from slip handles when rotary or top drive is in motion. E.

Slips should be properly positioned out of the way when not in use.

F. Slip handles should be used to raise and lower slips. Handles should be grasped with palm up. Slips should NOT be kicked into the rotary bushing. G.

Using proper lifting techniques, at least two employees should pull slips.

H. Latches, latch springs, hinge pins and elevator shoulders should be inspected periodically and maintained as necessary. These areas should be checked for cracks and deformities. I. J. K.

Riding the elevators as a means of personnel transport should be prohibited. The elevator ear locks should be fitted with proper size steel bolts as recommended by the manufacturer. Bolts should be checked often to ensure tightness. The elevators or bales should not be grasped in the area of the link eyes.

L. Only the elevator horns or rear handle or the elevator links (bails) at approximately 18” up on the elevator links (bails), should be used to control the elevator. M. The load bearing areas of elevators and links (bails) should be inspected for wear as per company policies and procedures developed in consideration of the manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.5

Spinning / Cathead Chains, Breakout Tong Cable (line) A. Rig supervisors should instruct personnel in the proper use and maintenance of the spinning chain. B. The spinning chain should be connected to the cathead chain by a connecting link of equal strength of the lighter chain. Soft malleable connectors should not be used. C. When not in use, spinning chains should be safely stored away from the rotary. The spinning chain should not be wrapped around the drill pipe in the mousehole while the rotary is turning. D.

To control the end of the spinning chain, an 8” to 12” tail rope should be attached.

E. Guideposts and chain trough should be checked prior to each trip to ensure that they are secure. F.

Chain and cable roller guides should be smooth and move easily.

G. The spinning chain and cathead chain should be inspected regularly and prior to each trip. A chain that has a bent or distorted link or is worn to less than 90% of its original cross section should be removed from service and discarded in such a way that it cannot be used for other purposes. H. The breakout cable should be inspected regularly and prior to each trip. Follow the cable manufacturer’s recommendation for rejecting a breakout cable.

3.6

Lifting Slings The following are lifting sling requirements: A. Inspect sling (chain, cable and attachments) before use, as indicated by the manufacturer. In addition, look for evidence of link stretching and the appearance of cracks on lifting chain. Chain and cable slings including hardware must be tagged by the manufacturer with the proof-tested maximum weight capacity. B. Thorough inspections of alloy steel chain slings should be done at least once a year. Check for wear, defective welds, deformation and increase in length. Items to check the chain and attachments for are:

1. Hook throat opening greater than 15%. 2. Hook tip bent or twisted greater than 10%. 3. Hook eye bent or twisted. 4. Cracked hook body. 5. Shackles with chemical, corrosion, or heat (welding on or in a fire) damage. 6. Shackles deformed or incorrect pin. 7. Cracked or deformed master link. 8. Chain link wear, bent, gouged or stretching exceeding the manufacturers specifications. 9. Chain (links) that may have been heated to 1000 degrees F should be immediately removed from service. C. Cable slings should be thoroughly inspected on a regular basis, at a minimum of every six months. A record of inspection should be maintained. Items that should be checked for: 1. Two or more broken wires at the socket end of the cable. 2. Ten or more broken wires in one length of lay or five or more broken wires in one strand in one length of lay. 3. Cable found with kinking, crushing, un-stranding, birdcaging, main strand displacement, core protrusion or any other distortion of wire rope structure should be removed from service immediately. 4. Cable with evidence of heat damage as indicated by blue or brown in an area, weld slag on five or more clustered wires should be removed from service. 5. Cable with abrasive reduction of one-third of the original diameter of outside individual wires should be removed from service. 6. Hook throat opening greater than 15%. 7. Hook tip bent or twisted greater than 10%. 8. Hook eye bent or twisted.

9. Cracked hook body. 10. Cracked or deformed master link. 11. Shackles with chemical, corrosion, or heat(welding on or in a fire) damage. 12. Shackles deformed or incorrect pin. D.

Maintain a record of the most recent month in which each sling was thoroughly inspected.

E. Alloy chain or cable slings should be used when making overhead lifts. One exception may be for attaching to catlines. The manufacturer should tag such chain, cable, and hardware with permanently affixed durable identification tag with applicable. F.

Use only alloy chain and attachments for making repairs to alloy chain slings.

G. Ensure that hooks, rings, oblong links, pear shaped links, welded or mechanical coupling links or other attachments have a rated capacity at least equal to that of the alloy chain with which they are used. H. Chain sling capacity must be reduced to that of the weakest component(s) in the chain system. I.

Never exceed the safe working limit of lifting chain, cable or attachments.

J.

Lift and lower loads slowly and smoothly. Avoid shock loading.

K.

Know the center of gravity and angle of the lift.

L. Twisting, knotting and kinking decreases the safe working load limits. Free all twists, knots and kinks before using.

3.7

M.

Do not point-load hooks. The load should rest on the bowl of the hook.

N.

Protect chain with padding when lifting sharp edged loads.

O.

Use transport chains as safety chains on vehicles being towed and as tie-down chains.

Catheads A. Rig supervisors should instruct personnel in the proper use and maintenance of catheads. Only a qualified person should operate the cathead. B. When in operation, a qualified person should be at the driller’s console to disengage the cathead if necessary. C.

Repair or replace worn, damaged or grooved catheads and worn dividers.

D. Catheads should have anti-fouling devices in use at all times. The manufacturer’s recommended tolerance should be maintained between the rope divider guard and the surface of the cathead spool. E.

Cathead operator should have the cathead in view at all times while lifting or holding a load.

F. A swivel and safety hook attached to a lifting cap should be used when catlines are used to pull pipe through the V-door. G.

Only hemp or manila rope should be used as a catline.

H.

Use only the amount of wraps necessary to raise the load, but never more than four wraps.

I.

Objects should be raised and lowered at a safe pace and the wraps removed after the load is landed. The locking device should not be used to suspend a load.

J.

The rope or line should not be left wrapped on or in contact with the cathead while it is not in use. The rope should be safely stored when not in use.

K.

Rig personnel should not be hoisted by use of the catline.

L. The rope should not be wrapped around the operator’s hand when in use. The operator must not stand inside the rope coiled on the floor when in use. M.

A splice that will feed onto the cathead spool should not be used.

N. Use a flagman or two-way communication device when the cathead operator cannot see the object being raised or lowered.

3.8

Hoists (Winches / Tuggers) A. Rig supervisors should ensure that personnel are trained in the proper use and maintenance of hoisting devices. B. Only those personnel, who through experience and training, are determined by the rig supervisor to be competent should be allowed to operate the rig floor hoist(s). C.

All hoists should be equipped with a drum guard and line guide.

D. The hoist operator should check the hoist mechanism, brake, drum guard, and line guard to ensure proper working order prior to each lift. E.

All hoisting lines should be inspected periodically. (See 3.5 C for inspection of lines.)

F.

The hoisting line should not be in contact with any derrick member.

G. Loads lifted by the hoist and wire rope should not exceed the manufacturer’s recommendation. The rated load capacity of the hoist should be posted on or near the hoist. H.

Rig personnel should stand clear of suspended loads.

I.

The hoist operator should set the drum brake anytime a load is in suspension. The operator should not leave the hoist unattended.

J.

The hoist-operating lever should return to the neutral locked position when the operator releases it.

K. The hoist should not be used to lift personnel until the procedures laid out in Section 19 are carried out. L. The hoist should be equipped with an emergency shut-off valve within easy reach of the operator.

M. The hoist operator should raise the load at a slow, steady rate and stay alert to the situation and flagman at all times. N. Continuous communications should be maintained either through direct sight, through a flagman or via two-way radio. Should communications fail, the operation should be stopped immediately and not resumed until communications has been re-established.

3.9

Pipe Tongs and Lines A. Rig supervisors should ensure that personnel are trained in the proper use and maintenance of pipe tongs and lines around the rig. B. Snub lines should be installed on makeup and breakout tongs and secured to a structural part of the rig floor or derrick. The snub lines should be of sufficient size and length as based on the rig floor design and anticipated pull on the line. Identification tags should be in place on the snub lines. C. Tong counterbalance and components should be restrained, guarded or located so as to prevent them from falling on or striking crewmembers. Refer to 3.5 C for inspection of support cable. Sheaves in the derrick should be secured and a safety line should be attached. D. Makeshift weights such as tools, pipe protectors, bits, etc. should not be added to the counterbalance weights or tongs. E.

Tong die slots should be properly maintained.

F. Tongs should be provided with sharp dies at all times and properly pinned in die slots. Die drives should be used to remove tong dies. Proper personal protective equipment should be worn when changing tong dies. G.

Tongs should be properly secured when not in use.

H. The rotary table should not be used for final making up or initial breaking out of a pipe connection. Two tongs should be used during makeup and breakout. I.

When greater-than-normal pull is needed to break a tight joint, all floor crewmen should move away from the rotary, and out of the path of the tongs before torque is applied. (Maximum rating of tongs or lines should not be exceeded.)

J.

Employees should not stand between the two pipe tongs while the driller is making up or breaking out pipe or collars. (Note the ring and the triangle zone marked on the rig floor.)

K. All bolts/pins used to secure tong jaws should be kept in place, with nuts and secured with cotter pins or safety pins. L. Designated personnel should operate power tongs. The lockout/tagout procedure should be used when working on power tongs. M. Tongs should be inspected for stress cracks as per manufacturer’s recommended inspection and maintenance programs. Qualified inspectors should carry out tong inspections. N. Drawworks Line Pull Level – Line pull should be level with tong to reduce stress on the tong from this operation. In order to apply level pull to tong(s) the makeup/breakout line angle to tongs should be as level as possible. O. Breakout/makeup tong arm should be as close as possible to a 90-degree angle to the line of pull.

3.10

Rotary Table Area A. Rig supervisors should ensure that personnel are instructed in the proper use and maintenance of equipment around the rotary table area. B.

Personnel should not step on the rotary table while it is rotating.

C.

The rotary table area should be constructed or covered with a non-skid material.

D. Hoses, ropes and lines should be clear of the rotary table and adjoining rotating equipment while it is in motion. E.

When not in use, the pipe tongs should be secured away from the rotary table.

F. If the rotary table is removed, the pick-up lines should be of sufficient strength and condition, and placed evenly around the block hook to ensure a level lift. G. Rotary and motion compensator hoses should be equipped with safety lines at both ends. The safety lines should be attached to structural objects such as the swivel and derrick, not to part of the high-pressure line. H. Safety lines should be used to secure cementing or fracturing bumper hoses to an immovable object such as pump base or sub base.

3.11

I.

Hoses should be inspected periodically and maintained to manufacturer’s specifications.

J.

Rotary slip bushings should be locked in the rotary at all times.

Portable Ladders A. Rig supervisors should ensure that personnel are instructed in the proper use and maintenance of ladders, ramps, stairs and handrails around the rig. B. Portable ladders should be inspected before each use for cracks, splits, loose rungs, etc. All ladders should be kept in a structurally sound condition. There should be no loose or bent rungs, and the ladder shall be fastened securely to the support structure.

C. All ladders should be used and kept in accordance with the manufacturer’s original specifications. D.

Portable metal or aluminum ladders should be equipped with non-skid feet.

E.

Wooden portable ladders should not be painted.

F.

Ladders should not be used in a horizontal position as a scaffold.

G. Personnel should not climb higher that the third rung from the top on extension ladders or the second rung on stepladders. H. Aluminum ladders should not be used when working on electrical equipment or working around electricity. Wood or fiberglass should be used. I.

The side rails should be held when climbing a ladder.

J.

Personnel should face a ladder when climbing up or down.

K.

Portable ladders should be secured at the top. If not, another person should hold them.

L.

Personnel should not use boxes, chairs, sawhorses, tables, etc. to improvise a ladder.

M. Heavy, bulky tools and material should be hoisted when used on a ladder. Light tools, equipment, etc., should be attached to one’s person. N. Personnel should not reach beyond arm’s length of the side rails of a ladder to gain better access. The ladder should be moved. O.

Only one person should be on a portable ladder at a time.

P. Dimensions of ladders, stairs and handrails should follow local regulations, good engineering design practices or the guidelines set out in Section 20. They shall have a uniform riser height and tread width. Ramps shall have a consistent gradual incline.

3.12

Decks, Floors and Walkways A. Rig supervisors should ensure that personnel are instructed in the proper use and maintenance of decks, floors and walkways around the rig. All walkways should be kept free of spilled materials, loose objects, and other tripping hazards. B. Hatches and other openings in decks and floors should be protected or provided with covers and closed when not in use. C. Guardrails should be provided on all decks, raised floors and walkways over four feet in height and adjacent to tanks and other hazardous equipment. The height of the guardrail should be 42” with a mid-rail and a toe-board. D. Detachable guardrails should be positioned around the moon pool, drilling slot and other similar areas. E.

Non-skid material should be positioned around the rotary table.

F.

Rig personnel should not run on decks, stairs, floors and walkways.

G.

Any walkway overlooking lower decks should have toe-boards.

H. Walkways should remain open at all times and should not be used as storage areas at any time. I.

3.13

Refer to Section 20 for additional information.

Equipment Guarding A. Rig supervisors should ensure that personnel are instructed in the proper use and maintenance of equipment guarding around the rig. B. All moving machinery that presents a hazard to employees working in its proximity should be adequately guarded. C.

Any removed guard should be replaced before the machinery is returned to operation.

D.

Lockout and or tagout procedures should be used before removing guards.

E.

All piping that could cause burns should be insulated or guarded.

F.

All portable tools with exposed moving parts should be equipped with proper guards.

G. If expanded metal is used to fabricate equipment guards, the openings should be of a size (1/2 inch) that will prevent a person’s fingers from going through it.

3.14

Derricks and Masts A. Rig supervisors should ensure that personnel are instructed in the proper use and maintenance of derricks and masts. B. Inspections of the derrick or masts should be performed periodically. (Refer to Section 16, IADC Rotary Rig Check Sheet, or API RP 4 G.) C. The pipe racking fingers should be kept straight and properly secured. A safety cable or chain should be attached to each finger. D.

Drill collar tieback ropes should be secured to a derrick or mast member.

E.

As each stand of drill pipe is set in the fingers it should be tied back or secured in the finger.

F.

Personnel should not be in the mast or derrick when pulling or jarring on stuck pipe.

G. The derrick or mast escape device should be visually checked by the derrickman before each trip. It should be installed during rig up. The device should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. H. Safety lines should be attached to all sheaves hanging in the derrick (i.e. tong, hoist, catline, etc.) These lines should be inspected frequently. I.

A full body safety harness and lifeline should be provided and used by each employee who works more than six feet above the drill floor. Refer to Section 20 Fall Protection.

J.

The derrickman should wear a full body harness that is attached to a fall arrest device as well as positioning rope. All derrick safety harnesses should be the full-body type and inspected frequently. A backup should be provided if the one in use becomes defective.

K.

Safety pins should be checked regularly to make sure they are properly secured.

L.

The derrickman should inspect the monkeyboard before its use.

M. The monkey board should have a safety chain or cable attached. In addition, the hinged fold back section of monkey board should have a safety chain or cable attached. This safety chain or cable should be attached from the monkey board to the fold back section. N. The casing/tubing stabbing board should be properly attached to the derrick structure. Safety chain/cable should be attached to the stabbing board. The stabber should use a full body harness and fall arrest device. O. Employees should not ride the mast as it is being raised or lowered. All other personnel should stand clear of the A-frame until the mast radius is in position. P. While the derrickman is accessing the monkey or stabbing board and there is a potential for the climb assist/anti-fall device to become entangled in the blocks, the blocks should not be moved. Once on the board the derrickman should use another anti-fall device attached to the derrick above his head. The location of the anchor point should be such that it does not get into the path of blocks. Q. Any time the derrickman plans to connect to the ladder-climber assist/anti-fall device, or do anything other than routine operations, the drilling operator should be notified.

3.15

Pipe Racks and Bins A. Rig supervisors should ensure that personnel are instructed in the proper use and maintenance of pipe racks and bins. B. When pipe, casing or any other piece of equipment is being moved on pipe racks and in bins, personnel should not be allowed under, inside, or on top of pipe racks and bins. C. Each layer of tubulars should be secured to avoid movement. (Examples of pipe stops are shown in 3.28.2 at the end of this section.) D.

Pipe racks should be inspected periodically.

E.

Pipe racks and bins should be level.

F. Personnel should not be on the catwalk when tubulars or other equipment is being hoisted to the rig floor.

3.16

Derrickman’s Escape Device A. Rig supervisors should ensure that personnel are instructed in the proper use and maintenance of the derrickman’s escape device. B. Derrickman’s escape device should be installed during rig up and should be operable when the mast is raised.

C. The derrickman should perform a visual inspection of the escape device and escape line before each trip in or out of the hole. D.

The device should be installed according to manufacturer’s specifications.

E.

The device should be used only in the event of an emergency.

F. The safety device should be inspected prior to rigging up and periodically as per company procedures/policies developed in consideration of the manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.17

Drilling Line, Crown Block and Traveling Block A. Rig supervisors should ensure that personnel are instructed in the proper use and maintenance of drilling line crown block and traveling block. Derrickmen should never touch the active line while traveling blocks are moving. B.

Drilling lines should be visually inspected daily for wear and breaks.

C.

The drilling line should not be allowed to rub against other objects that may cause damage.

D. Drilling line is stiff and can flip when being cut. Employees should use caution when handling the drill line. E. The deadline anchor bolts should be checked periodically to ensure that they are properly torqued. In addition, all the drilling line retainer bolts should be in good condition and in place through the anchor drum. F.

All excess drilling line should be spooled up off the ground or deck.

G.

Crown sheaves and traveling block should be inspected and lubricated each day.

H. The crown block and traveling block sheave grooves should be checked periodically for proper gauge.

3.18

I.

A slip-and cut-program should be followed. Calculate the ton-miles and follow the slip-andcut program as recommended by the drilling line manufacturer.

J.

The line guide cable and rollers should be inspected each tour to determine their condition.

Drawworks, Brakes, Clutches and Sand Reel A. Rig supervisors should ensure that personnel are instructed in the proper use and maintenance of drawworks, brakes, clutches and sand reel. B. All rig personnel should be instructed in how to shut down the drawworks and rotary table in the event of an emergency. C. All guards should remain in place at all times and be kept in good condition. Guards should only be removed for maintenance or repair (follow lockout/tagout procedures) and replaced prior to putting back in operation. D.

Only designated personnel should operate the drawworks.

E.

While operating the drawworks, the operator should not be distracted.

F. The driller should chain the brake down anytime he leaves the driller’s console. If an automatic driller device is in use, the brake handle should be secured as per the automatic driller device operating procedures. G. The driller should supervise all drawwork repairs. Do not start up other operations until repairs are completed and guards are in place. H. Employees should not stand on top of the drawworks or inside the sand line or main drum guard when the drums are moving. I.

The sand reel should be equipped with a proper line-spooling device.

J.

Defective zerk and alemite fittings should be replaced.

K.

The brake blocks, linkage, pins, cotter keys, etc. should be checked periodically.

L.

Water should not be directed at the brake band when washing the drawworks.

M.

Clutches should be kept in good repair and properly adjusted.

N. The crown-o-matic should be visually checked at tour change and function tested at first opportunity. It should be reset and checked after drill line is cut and slipped. This information should be included in the IADC report. It should be checked anytime it is moved or adjusted.

3.19

Mud Pumps and Equipment A. Rig supervisors should ensure that personnel are instructed in the proper use and maintenance of mud pumps and equipment. B.

Caution should be used when working around high-pressure components.

C.

Lockout/tagout procedures should be used when repairing or maintaining equipment.

D. Mud pumps should have pressure relieving safety (pop off valve) devices. These devices should be installed to manufacturer’s recommendations. Inspection and maintenance of these devices should be done based on company procedures and policies developed in considerations of manufacturer’s recommendations. There should not be any valves or other restrictions placed in the pressure release (pop off valve) relief line. Shear pins recommended by the manufacturer are the only pins that are to be used in shear pin type pop off valves. Pressure relief device (Pop off valve) cover should be in place. E. Measures to eliminate the use or restrict the operation of the pressure relief safety device should not be taken. F. Liners should not be removed from or seated in a pump by running the pump or by applying hydraulic, pneumatic or gas pressure. G. Guards should be in place and secured while a pump is in operation. (Examples of good guarding are shown in 3.28.3 at the end of this section.) H.

Studs and nuts on the fluid end should be maintained in good condition and kept tight.

I.

Good housekeeping and lighting should be maintained around the mud pumps.

J.

Discharge lines coming from the pump should be snubbed off.

3.20

Mud Pits and Equipment A. Rig supervisors should ensure that personnel are instructed in the proper use and maintenance of mud pits and equipment. B. Mud pits may be considered confined spaces so proper precautions should be taken. (Refer to Section 10). C.

High-pressure fittings and lines should be properly rated for the expected working pressures.

D.

Mud gun unions and connections should be kept tight.

E.

Only designated employees should be allowed to operate mud guns.

F. Walkways should be kept clear of tripping hazards. Flow lines should be placed so that they do not create tripping hazards. G.

Electrical equipment should be located to prevent contact with fluids.

H. Caustic soda should be added to water slowly to avoid splashing and should be mixed using a mixture tank or barrel. Chemical barrel should be designed to prevent splash back to employees. I.

When mixing chemicals employees should follow precautions as stated on the manufacturer’s MSDS and warning labels. Refer to Section 2.7 Chemical Hazard Communication.

J.

Chemicals that are not compatible such as paraformaldehyde and caustic soda should not be mixed together.

K.

Approved explosion-proof lighting fixtures should be installed on mud pits.

L.

The agitator’s power source should be isolated and locked out before entering the mud pits.

M. At the mud mixing hopper or mixing location, the following items should be available for the employee’s use: 1. Eye protection. 2. Face protection. 3. Proper respiratory protection. 4. Rubber gloves and apron. 5. Eyewash station / shower, and 6. Appropriate caution and/or danger signs. 7. MSDS for chemicals. N. Mud samples should not be caught by using a cup with a rope attached, due to the possibility of the rope getting caught by the agitator.

3.21

High-Pressure Lines and Fittings A. Rig supervisors should ensure that personnel are instructed in the proper use and maintenance of high-pressure lines and fittings around the rig. B.

Employees should familiarize themselves with the location of high-pressure lines and fittings.

C. Employees should not attempt to tighten or loosen unions or other connections under pressure. Never hammer on a pipe or connection that is under pressure. D. Pressure relief valves should be checked periodically according to manufacturer’s recommendation. E.

Lines or piping systems that may kick under pressure should be secured.

F. Care must be taken to ensure proper halves of hammer type unions are mated together. “1502" threads in a two inch wing nut will appear to be completely made up to the "602" threads on the female half but will come apart when the line is pressured up. If in doubt, a go-no-go gauge should be used. G. High-pressure lines should be fitted with high-pressure fittings. Caution should be exercised during repair to insure only high-pressure fittings are being installed. H. All personnel should stand clear of high-pressure lines being used during cementing, acidizing, well testing procedures, etc. I.

Chicsan sections in high-pressure lines should be watched for leaks. Chicsan connections should be secured with a safety line. When required to reciprocate pipe with chicsans attached, caution should be used during movement.

J.

A JSA should be developed and discussed in pre-planning safety meeting and unusual or temporary jobs begin.

K.

before

Do not stand in front of valves or bull-plugs when they are under pressure.

L. Snub each end of high-pressure lines. Where possible, high-pressure lines should be snubbed to a structural part and not back to other parts of the high-pressure line.

3.22

Engines A. Rig supervisors should ensure that personnel are instructed on the proper use and maintenance of engines. B. Positive lockout measures should be provided to ensure that the source of power is not activated during the engine repair, inspection or adjustments. C. All exposed revolving parts such as radiator or cooling fans, belts, flexible drives, generators, water pump pulley, shafts, couplings and other moving parts should be provided with adequate guarding to prevent contact or items being caught in moving parts. (See examples of good guarding in 3.28.4 at the end of this section.) D. Guarding removed for maintenance purposes should be replaced as soon as possible and before operation of the equipment. E.

Spark arresting devices should be installed in engine exhaust systems where required.

F. Engines should be equipped with safety alarms and/or automatic shutdown controls to be activated during emergencies or operational difficulties such as overheating, low oil pressure and over speeding. G. Exhaust manifolds and piping should be constructed, installed and maintained to prevent exhaust gases from leaking between the engine and the discharge line. The discharge should be directed away from the engine and the work area. H. Areas below engine skids and beneath the sub base should be kept clear of drained motor oil and debris.

3.23

I.

The air box drains, on engines so equipped, should be drained according to company policies or procedures developed in consideration of the manufacturer’s recommendations.

J.

“Caution High Noise Area” signs should be posted and hearing protection available in the engine area. Personnel working in high noise areas should wear adequate hearing protection.

Air-Operated Equipment A. Rig supervisors should ensure that personnel are instructed in the proper use and maintenance of air-operated equipment around the rig.

3.24

B.

Air tanks should be drained frequently to prevent accumulation of moisture.

C.

A valve should not be installed between the tank/compressor and the pressure relief valve.

D.

Compressed air used for cleaning purposes should be regulated to limit pressure.

E.

Each air line should be secured to prevent it from coming loose at the connections.

Blowout Prevention Equipment A. Rig supervisors should ensure that personnel are instructed in the proper use and maintenance of blowout prevention equipment. B. Pick-up lines, eyes and shackles should be inspected for strength and condition before lifting a blowout preventer or the entire stack. Refer to Section 3.5. C. Check with the manufacturer before using any padeyes on the annular for picking up the annular and other BOP units. Most annular padeyes are designed only for picking up the weight of the annular itself. Follow manufacturer’s recommended procedure for picking up BOP stacks. D. Blowout preventers and components should not be climbed on until they are set on the wellhead flange, the test stump, flange of another blowout preventer unit or in the stowed position. When climbing on BOP stacks, fall protection described in Section 19 should be utilized, but not attached to the BOP. E. Personnel should stay clear of any possible path of the hoisted BOP stack until the BOP stack is nearly in position. Once in position employees can assist in guiding or aligning the blowout preventer into place.

F. Hands and feet should be kept from between the flanges. Hands and feet should not be placed on top of the bolts that have already passed through the holes of an upper flange while the unit is being lowered. G. While hammering up the blowout preventer, bolts and nuts, closed socket hammer wrenches of correct size, as well as sledgehammers of suitable weight and size should be used for agility and accuracy. Hydraulic torque equipment should be used according with company policies and procedures developed in consideration of the manufacturer’s recommendations. H. A rope or rubber “O” ring should be used on the hammer wrench to hold it in place when hammering. I.

Employees should not be permitted on the blowout preventer when the stack is being pressure-tested. If during pressure testing the BOP stack, it is discovered that repairs are required, all pressure to the stack should be released before repair work is begun.

J.

When nippling down the blowout preventer, all hydraulic lines should be bled to zero pressure before hammering is permitted on the hydraulic unions.

K. Scaffolding and work platforms should be inspected before being utilized for access to the BOP stack. L. Choke and Kill lines should be snubbed off at each end and at each connection on long vertical installations. M. BOP bolts should be long enough to allow for a full nut when fully tightened. ( See 3.28.5 at the end of this section.)

3.25

N.

Be sure that the proper ring gasket is used. Ring gaskets should not be reused.

O.

The rotary should be stopped when personnel are working on the BOP or Rotating Head.

BOP Accumulators, Pulsation and Suction Dampeners A. Rig supervisors should ensure that personnel are instructed in the proper use and maintenance of accumulators, pulsation and suction dampeners. B. A qualified person should charge accumulators and high-pressure pulsation dampeners as per company policies and procedures as developed in consideration of the manufacturer’s recommendations. The pre-charge should be checked as per company policies and procedures developed in consideration of manufacturer’s specifications. C. Each control on the BOP accumulator and each BOP remote unit should be clearly marked as to its exact function. D. After a ram is placed in open or closed position, flag the controls; do not leave controls in neutral position. E. The blind / shear ram control handles should be protected in a way to prevent against accidental closure. (Accumulator and Drill Floor Remote Control Units) F. Suction and mud pump pulsation dampeners should be charged by qualified personnel as per company policies and procedures developed in consideration of manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.26

Stabbing Board A. Rig supervisors should instruct personnel in the proper use and maintenance of the stabbing boards. B.

Stabbing board and components should be inspected periodically and prior to use.

C.

Fall protection system should be installed as per Section 20.

D.

The stabbing board is to be properly installed and safety lines attached as required.

E.

Stabbing board locking devices should be provided such that:

1. One locking device operates when the lifting handle is in neutral. 2. One locking device operates if the hoisting mechanism fails. 3. Both devices are independent of each other.

3.27

Handling Tubulars A. Rig supervisors should ensure that personnel are instructed in the proper use and maintenance of tubulars and tubular handling tools. B. When stabbing tubulars, personnel are to keep their hands and fingers from between the pin and box of the two joints of tubulars. C. Joints of drill pipe that are to be added to or removed from the drill string should not be allowed to remain in the mousehole while hoisting or lowering pipe during a trip. D. Each stand of drill pipe being hoisted from the rig floor should be held back as the pipe is lifted so it will not swing freely across the rig floor. E. As a stand of drill pipe is led across the rig floor for stabbing by the person tailing the pipe, the derrickman should break the swing in the pipe from aloft. F. As the person tailing the pipe gives the stand to the stabber, each should keep their hands from between the tongs and pipe. G.

The driller’s view of the drill pipe in the rotary table should not be obstructed at any time.

H. When setting pipe back, it should be racked by pushing against the outer face of the pipe. Do not get fingers caught in between pipes (collars). Feet should be kept away from beneath the pipe as it is set down. I.

Feet should not be placed beneath the pipe when rabbiting drill pipe or tubing. Never put feet directly under pipe, especially when using YT type elevators.

J.

When rabbiting tubulars, crewmen should face away from the pipe rack to avoid possible eye injury, even though eye protection is being worn during this operation.

K. To prevent lift subs from backing out while working with the drill collar, each drill collar lift sub should be tightened into the collar before the collar is hoisted into the derrick.

L.

Feet, knees and hands should not be placed on the underside of a drill collar clamp while the clamp is being tightened onto a drill collar in the rotary table.

M.

A drill collar clamp secured to a drill collar should be removed prior to hoisting the collar so as not be hoisted overhead height into the derrick.

N.

When setting the drill bit into a bit breaker, hands and feet should not be placed on the bit breaker while the bit and collar are guided into the bit breaker opening. Feet should not be used to adjust the lock on the bit breaker.

O.

Stabilizers, wall scrapers or pup joints being added into the drill string should be set on the rotary table unsupported by a hoist line.

P.

Tools added or removed from the drill string should be handled with a hoist line. Tools should not be thrown or allowed to fall onto the rig floor, but laid down with a hoist line.

Q.

Formation mud should be scraped off the drill collars and/or stabilizer before it is hoisted into the derrick.

R.

Employees should not peer into the bell nipple or through the rotary table when the BOP is operated. In addition, the supervisor should make sure that everyone is well away from the rotary table when the blind rams are operated.

S.

Casing equipment should not be rigged up until the drill pipe has been completely hoisted out of the wellbore.

T.

The casing-tong safety door should not be removed so that hands and limbs will be protected from the tong’s drive works.

U.

A work scaffolding or platform should be constructed around the casing spider to prevent overstretching or becoming off balance in order to reach the equipment.

V. Hands should not be placed on top of the casing collar joint protruding from the casing slips when another joint of casing is being stabbed. Hands should be kept on the outside of the casing at all times. W. When lowering the casing elevators over a joint of casing in the derrick, the driller should be aware of the derrick stabber’s hands to prevent catching them between the elevators and the joint of casing. X. Single joint casing pick-up elevators of the correct size should be used and should have a safety pin attached by chain. Y. When removing cores from a core barrel on the drill floor, employees should not place their hands or feet under the core barrel opening.

3.28

Electrical Area Classifications

OPEN TOP 5ft R (1.5 m)

ROTARY 5ft R (1.5 m)

ENCLOSED SUBSTRUCTURE

DERRICK FLOOR

DERRICK ENCLOSED

CENTER OF BELL NIPPLE BOP

GROUND LEVEL

INADEQUATELY VENTILATED CELLAR (SUMP)

BELOW GRADE LOCATION SUMP OR TRENCH

NOT TO SCALE CLASS 1 DIVISION 1 3.27.1

CLASS 1 DIVISION 2

Adequate Ventilation in Enclosed Derrick (Open Top) and Inadequately Ventilated Substructure

OPEN TOP

DERRICK WINDBREAK ENCLOSED WITH OPEN V-DOOR

5ft R (1.5 m)

ROTARY 10ft R

DERRICK FLOOR

(3 m)

OPEN SUBSTRUCTURE

CENTER OF BELL NIPPLE

BOP

GROUND LEVEL

5ft R (1.5 m)

5ft R (1.5 m)

BELOW GRADE LOCATION SUMP OR TRENCH

NOT TO SCALE

CLASS 1 DIVISION 1

INADEQUATELY VENTILATED CELLAR (SUMP)

CLASS 1 DIVISION 2

3.27.2 Adequate Ventilation in Substructure. Derrick is not enclosed, but in equipped with a windbreak, open top, and open V-Door.

H e al th S af et y a n d E n vi ro n m e nt al

10ft R (3 m)

© Copyr ight 2004 IADC All rights reser ved

Sect ion 3– Pag e 26 of 31

MUD LEVEL

GROUND LEVEL OR DECK LEVEL OF PLATFORM NOT TO SCALE CLASS 1

CLASS 1

DIVISION 1

DIVISION 2

3.27.3 Drilling Fluid Tank in a Non-Enclosed Adequately Ventilated Area

ENCLOSURE

10ft R (3 m)

© Copyr ight 2004 IADC All rights reser ved


HEIGHT OF POROUS OR PIERCED SECTION OF WALL

NON-PIERCED VAPOR TIGHT WALL MUD LEVEL

CLASS 1 DIVISION 1 NOT TO SCALE 3.27.4 Drilling Fluid Tank in an Inadequately Ventilated Area

CLASS 1 DIVISION 2


NOT TO SCALE

10ft R (3 m)

5ft R © Copyr ight 2004 IADC All rights reser ved

(1.5 m)

NON-VAPOR TIGHT BARRIER (GRATING)

SHALE SHAKER


3.27.5

CLASS 1

CLASS 1

DIVISION 1

DIVISION 2

Shale Shaker in a Non-Enclosed Adequately Ventilated Area


5ft R

5ft R

5ft R

(1.5 m)

(1.5 m)

(1.5 m)

5ft R (1.5 m)

CLASS 1 DIVISION 2 3.26.6 Desander or Desliter in a Non© Copyr ight 2004 IADC All rights reser ved

Enclosed Adequately Ventilated Area.

VENT LINE GRADE

ENCLOSURE


CLASS 1 DIVISION 1

CLASS 1 DIVISION 2 3.26.7 Desander or Desilter in an Adequately Ventilated Enclosure.

CLASS 1 DIVISION 2

3.26.8 Desander Vent in a Non-Enclosed Adequately Ventilated Area.



3.28 Illustrations 3.28.1

Arrow points to panel label indicating high voltage.

3.28.2

Examples of Pipe Stops. Refer to Section 3.14.C for explanation. 3.28.3

Arrows point to adequately guarded areas, as referred to in Section 3.18.G. © Copyright 2004 IADC All rights reserved



3.28.4

All exposed moving engine parts should be properly guarded. Refer to Section 3.21.C. 3.28.5

BOP bolts should be long enough to allow for a full nut when tightened. Refer to Section 3.23.M.




SECTION FOUR – PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT 4.1

Personal Protective Equipment A. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) should be provided, used and maintained in a sanitary and reliable condition whenever necessary, based upon a hazard assessment of the workplace. When the employee furnishes his or her own equipment, the employer should be responsible to assure it is suitable for its intended use. B. The employer should perform a hazard assessment of the workplace and verify it has been performed through a written certification that identifies the workplace evaluated. C. The employer should provide and document training for each employee who is required to wear PPE. D. Many companies have personal protective equipment policies that meet or exceed these recommendations and require compliance.

4.2

Head Protection

A. Safety hard hats should meet ANSI Z89.1 – current edition or equivalent standards. B. Safety hard hats should be worn by all personnel, including operator representatives, third party personnel, and visitors at all times in working areas and when outside the accommodation area, except when in an office or riding in a vehicle. C. Hard hats should be worn as recommended by the manufacturer. D. Do not alter hard hats such as: by boring holes through the shell, carving designs, etc., as this could weaken the hat and reduce the protection it provides. E. Plastic Safety hard hats should be maintained as per company policies and procedures developed in consideration of the manufacturer’s recommendations. They should not be painted and should be stored out of the sunrays when not in use. F. Safety hard hats and suspension should be inspected daily and replaced as necessary as per company policies and procedures developed in consideration of manufacturer’s recommendations.

4.3

Fall Protection

A. Refer to Section 20 Fall Protection for additional information. B. Persons working aloft should wear an approved full-body harness with appropriate fall protection any time they are over six feet above the ground or other working surface. C. Derrick workers should be secured at all times (100% tie off) when either climbing or working in the derrick. It may be necessary to utilize a dual lanyard system so that the worker can connect one lanyard before disconnecting the first. A separate safety lanyard or fall arrest device should secure workers before they disconnect from the derrick climbing anti-fall device.



D. A full body harness specially designed for working derricks should be utilized when working on the derrick board. All fall protection should be kept in its originally designed configuration. E. The user should inspect full-body harnesses and other fall protection devices before each use. A qualified person should also inspect the equipment monthly. Safety harnesses and lanyards should be cleaned as per manufacturer recommendations. Any worn or defective harness and other fall protection devices should be reported to the supervisor and permanently removed from use. Manufacturers instructions for inspection and replacement should be followed. F. When safety harnesses and lanyards are used, the following safety rules should be adhered to: 1. Avoid dragging the lanyard, especially over sharp or coarse objects. 2. Minimize exposure of nylon or other synthetic fall protection equipment to excessive heat or UV (ultraviolet) rays. 3. Do not tie knots in a lanyard to make it shorter. 4. Never hook two or more lanyards together to increase the length. 5. Inspect harness and lanyard before each use for wear and/or deterioration, and at intervals of not more than monthly. 6. Always destroy any harness or lanyard that was subjected to a shock load imposed by a fall. 7. All fall protection equipment should meet the current ANSI standard or other equivalent standard for work belts/harnesses. 8. Nylon or synthetic lanyards should not be used around welding operations; steel lanyards with shock absorbers should be used. 9. Refer to Federal, local, and state guidelines for further information.

4.4

Eye and Face Protection A. Personnel, including observers and helpers, should wear approved safety glasses/goggles while working on rigs, in shops and yards. Eyewear should conform to ANSI Z87.1-current edition or other equivalent standards. When face shields are required, goggles should be worn. B. Goggles and face shields, along with rubber gloves and aprons, should be worn when handling caustic or other corrosive material. The manufacturer’s safety recommendations and MSDS sheets should be readily available for each product. C. Various types of anti-fogging products are available for application to the lenses to limit the fogging conditions. D. Persons whose vision requires the use of corrective lenses should wear either safety glasses or goggles that can be worn over the corrective lenses without disturbing the adjustment.

4.5

Safety Shoes/Boots A. Safety shoes/boots should be worn by all personnel, including visitors whenever they are outside the accommodation (living quarters and offices) areas. B. Steel-toed safety shoes/boots should comply with ANSI Z41 current edition or equivalent standard.

4.6

Hearing Protection A. Employees should be instructed in the hazards of working in high noise areas and proper use of hearing protection devices. B. Areas should be evaluated for noise levels and those areas where noise exceeds 85 dba should be marked with “Caution Hearing Protection Required” signs. (Refer to the chart in 4.10.)

C. Hearing protection should be provided at the entrance to all high noise areas. D. Some situations may require the use of ear plugs as well as ear muffs. E. Refer to ANSI S12.19 or other equivalent standards for additional information.

4.7

Respiratory Protection A. A written respiratory protection plan governing the selection and use of respirators should be established. B. Proper respiratory protection should be provided and used when such equipment is necessary to protect the health of the employees. C. Proper selection of respirators should be made according to ANSI Z88.2-most current version or equivalent standards.

D. Respiratory hazards that may be present and respiratory protection that may be used are: 1. Toxic Gas such as Hydrogen Sulfide released from drilling mud, cleaning tank bottoms, spud cans or during a gas kick. 2. Chemical Dust from mixing chemicals to the mud system. 3. Organic Vapors from painting, vapors off of oil or synthetic fluid based mud. 4. Oxygen deficient atmosphere found in confined spaces such as tanks.

Supplied Air Breathing Equipment Air Purifying Respirators Vapor or Gas Removing Respirators Supplied Air Breathing Equipment

E. Each worker should: 1. Check the respirator fit after each donning as instructed. 2. Use the respirator as instructed. 3. Guard against damaging the respirator. 4. In the event the respirator shows signs of failure, the worker should immediately go to an area having respirable air.

5. Report any respirator malfunction to a person responsible for the respirator program. F. Refer to the IADC Respiratory Protection Guidance Document.

4.8

Proper Clothing

A. Loose or poorly fitted clothing should not be worn. B. Rig personnel should start each tour with clean clothing and should have an extra change of clothing, should work clothes become oily and chemically saturated. C. Keep shirts tucked in trousers at all times. D. It is recommended that shirts with sleeves be worn. The minimum length should be the standard half-sleeve. E. Pant cuffs should be worn outside the boot tops and not tucked inside the boots.

4.9

Electrical Protective Equipment Employees who work directly with electricity should use the personal protective equipment required for the jobs they perform. This equipment may include: A. Rubber insulating gloves, B. Insulating hoods, C. Insulating sleeves, D. Dielectric matting or blankets, E. Industrial protective helmets designed to reduce electric shock hazard. F. Refer to local or federal regulations for additional information.

4.10

Hand Protection A. Employees should use appropriate hand protection when their hands are exposed to hazards. B. Selection should be based on the evaluation of tasks to be performed.

C. Gloves that are worn or damaged should be replaced. D. When handling chemicals, refer to the MSDS for proper hand protection.


4.11

Permissible Noise Exposures This chart is a general rule of thumb that is taken from the NIOSH Health and Safety Guide for Oil and Gas Well Drilling.

Average Noise Levels (dBA) Found At different Operations on a drilling rig

dBA

8 hrs.

SOUND LEVEL (Decibels) Maximum Exposure Per Day 6 4 3 2 hrs. hrs. hrs. hrs.

Speaking Effort Required

1 30 15 hr. min. min. dBA

Constant level found near the compound and near rig engines when engines are running at high rpm

115

115

Nearly impossible to communicate by voice.

Chain saw Mud pump

110

110

Very difficult to communicate by voice.

105

105

102 100

100

97 95

95

92 90

90

85

85

Normal voice at 1 ft., shout at 4 ft.

80

80

Normal voice at 1-1/2 ft., shout at 6 ft.

75

Normal voice at 2 ft., shout at 8 ft.

Rig floor when making a connection Skill Saw Driller’s station when coming out of the hole Front end loader In the doghouse when coming out of the hole Inside the doghouse while drilling

75

PERMSISSIBLE NOISE EXPOSURES

Shout with hands cupped between mouth and others person’s ear. Shout at 1/2 ft. Shout at 1 ft. Normal voice at 1/2 ft., shout at 2 ft.




SECTION FIVE – FIRE PREVENTION, FIRE FIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL 5.1

Fire Prevention A. Smoking should only be allowed in the designated areas. These areas should be established after a review of the rig or location (100 feet from well bore when possible.) Signs printed in English and the predominant local language should be present in these areas. (See 5.7.1 in the Illustrations at the end of this section.) All employees and visitors should observe “NoSmoking” rules. B. Welding or burning should not be done outside the designed welding area without a hot work permit. All hot work, including welding, should cease in the event that hazardous conditions develop. C. A fire watch with a fire extinguisher should be present during welding and cutting operations that are done outside the designated welding area. When welding on a bulkhead (wall), particular attention should be paid to the opposite side of the bulkhead (wall). D. Oil, diesel or petrochemicals that can ignite should be prevented from collecting beneath engine skids, on decks, in cellars or in other areas. E. All engines should be equipped with spark arrestors. When appropriate, water sprays should be opened on all engine exhausts that do not contain spark arrestors. F. Explosion-proof covers on fixtures should be maintained in proper working order. G. Refueling operations should include a bonding and grounding system. All piping and connections should be checked to ensure against leakage. H. Care should be taken not to overfill tanks during refueling, as fuel can overflow through the vent lines, discharging out on the decks and ground. I.

Electrical circuits should not be overloaded. Vapor-proof lighting with clean gasketted coverglobes and safety lines should be used.

J.

Only approved rig heaters or fans that are appropriate for the hazard classification of the area should be used. No direct or open flame heating devices should be used on or near the rig floor.

K. Keep supply, storage, and changing rooms clean and in order. Greasy clothing, rags, paper, or any other combustible material should be removed from these areas and cleaned or properly disposed of. Good housekeeping should be enforced. L. Investigate any unusual odor, especially smoke or gas. M. Flammable and combustible liquids should be stored in approved UL or Factory Mutual (FM) (or equivalent standard) metal or other conductive material containers and kept in their proper storage area, not stored on the rig floor. N. All storage tanks that contain combustible or flammable liquids or gasses should be located so they will not add to a fire on the rig. All tanks should be labeled as to contents and properly grounded. (See 5.7.2 at the end of this section.) o

o

O. Material used for cleaning should have a flash point of not less than 100 F (38 C) © Copyright 2004 IADC All rights reserved


P. Burning of trash should not be allowed on the rig or location. Where permitted, approved incinerators should be used. Q. Areas affected by the flare should be free of combustibles. Where possible a minimum 100ft safety zone should be established. R. Boiler safety valves and low-water cutoffs should be provided and tested daily. S. All fires, regardless of size, should be investigated.

5.2

Fire Protection A. All rig crewmembers, fire team members and leaders should be trained in their assigned fire duties.

B. Fire protection equipment should be kept in good condition and should not be tampered with. C. The following recommendations are aimed at maintaining the highest possible level of fire emergency preparedness. 1. Training in the use and care of available fire fighting equipment should be conducted at initial employment and annually thereafter. As a minimum, one different item of fire fighting equipment should be reviewed during each fire drill that is conducted on a periodic basis. 2. The supervisor should ensure that the rig has emergency procedures and employees are familiar with their duties. 3. Fire drills should be conducted in accordance with the stated procedures and should be held periodically with a record of the activity maintained. 4. All personnel on the drilling unit not actively involved in the drill exercise should respond to a fire alarm. Offshore personnel should wear life jackets, not work vests, and report to their assigned station. 5. Depending on the size of rig, land rigs should have a minimum of four 40 pound or five 20 pound BC type fire extinguishers should be provided and located in key areas. Offshore rigs should have an adequate number of fire extinguishers distributed about the unit as per the fire protection plan. 6. All fire fighting equipment should be inspected periodically, tagged, and the conditions of the equipment recorded. Portable fire extinguishers and extinguishing systems should be serviced according to the manufacturer’s recommendation. Once an extinguisher is discharged, it should be replaced and taken out of service immediately until it is reserviced. 7. Fire fighting equipment should not be tampered with or activated unless immediate use of the equipment is necessary. 8. Quick access to fire fighting equipment should be available at all times and materials should not be placed on or in front of the hose stations, water monitors or extinguishers. 9. Fire blankets should be located in the galley, welding shop and/or other designed areas. 10. Fire extinguishers should be identified in accordance with regulations as appropriate.

11. During inspections, close attention should be paid to the underside of fire extinguishers. Moisture can cause this area to rust and, if left unchecked, the bottom can blow out, causing serious injury. 12. Fire extinguishers should be hung up or placed in brackets designed for the extinguisher. Do not allow fire extinguishers to sit on deck or ground where moisture may accumulate and cause corrosion thus weakening the bottom of the extinguisher.

5.3

Emergency Fire Fighting Teams Each rig should have a fire fighting team on location. Team members should be trained in the use of all fire fighting equipment and breathing apparatus, if applicable. They should also receive training on rescuing and handling injured personnel, using stretchers and other available apparatus. Training should be conducted periodically and documented.

5.4

Fire Control For fire to exist there must be a combustible mixture of three elements: heat, fuel (combustible or flammable material), and oxygen. Once a fire has started, fire control consists of eliminating one or more of these elements. If possible, cut off the fuel from the fire. If this is not possible, the air should be smothered by use of a cover, fire blanket or lid, or with a chemical agent, which separates air from the fuel. A. Using a portable fire extinguisher use the P A S S system – it can be a helpful reminder of the correct steps to follow when attempting to extinguish a fire:

1. Pull the pin 2. Aim low; point at the base of the fire 3. Squeeze the handle 4. Sweep from side to side keeping the extinguisher aimed at the base of the fire.

5.5

Classes (and Combinations) of Fires Fires are grouped into four classes labeled A through D, according to their fuels. However, some fuels are found in combinations, and electrical fires always involve some solid fuel. Thus, for fire fighting purposes, there are actually six possible combinations of fire classes:

A. Class A Fires Fires involving common combustible solids such as wood, paper, cloth and plastics are most effectively extinguished by water, a cooling agent. Foam and dry chemicals may also be used. They act mainly as smothering agents. B. Class B Fires For fires involving oils, greases, gases, and other substances that give off large amounts of flammable vapors, a smothering agent is most effective. Dry chemical, foam and carbon dioxide (CO2) should be used. When using water, the straight stream will gouge the fire if sprayed directly into it, thereby spreading it and making a worse situation. The straight © Copyright 2004 IADC All rights reserved


stream can be used to spray hot surfaces such as walls and equipment to produce steam. The steam will then smother the fire. If the fire is being supplied with fuel by an open valve or



a broken pipe, a valve on the supply side should be shut down. This may extinguish the fire, or at least make extinguishing it less difficult, and allow the use of much less extinguishing agent. In a gas fire, it is imperative to shut down the control valve before you extinguish the fire. If the fire were extinguished without shutting down the valve, flammable gas would continue to escape. The potential for an explosion, more dangerous than the fire, would then exist. However, it might be necessary to extinguish a gas fire before shutting down the fuel supply in order to save a life or to reach a control valve. C. Combined Class A and B Fires Water spray and foam may be used to smother fires involving both solid fuels and flammable liquids or gases. These agents also have some cooling effect on the fire. Carbon dioxide has also been used to extinguish such fires in closed spaces.

D. Combined Class A and C Fires Because energized electrical equipment is involved in these fires, a non-conducting extinguishing agent should be used. Carbon Dioxide, Halon and dry chemicals are the most efficient agents. Carbon dioxide dilutes the oxygen supply, while the others are chainbreaking agents. Never use water on an electrical fire, and use dry chemicals as a last resort, especially when SCR equipment is involved. Dry chemicals may cause excessive damage to equipment of this type. E. Combined Class B and C Fires Here again, a non-conducting agent is required. Fires involving flammable liquids or gases and electrical equipment may be extinguished with Halon or dry chemical acting as a chainbreaker. They may also, in closed spaces, be extinguished with CO2. F. Class D Fires These fires involve combustible metals such as potassium, sodium and its alloys, magnesium, zinc, zirconium, titanium, and powdered aluminum. The fire will burn on the metals’ surface at a very high temperature and often with a brilliant flame. Water should not be used on Class D fires, as it may add to the intensity or cause the molten metal to spatter. This, in turn, can extend the fire and inflict painful and serious burns on those in the vicinity. Fires in combustible metals are generally smothered and controlled with specialized agents known as dry powders (typically sodium chloride, potassium chloride, etc.) Dry powders are not the same as dry chemicals, although many people use the terms interchangeably. The agents are used on entirely different types of fires. Dry powders are used only to extinguish combustible metal fires. Dry chemicals may be used on other fires, but not on Class D fires. Class D fires, in addition to being extremely hot, produce oxygen as the metal burns. Foam is the best agent for smothering this type of fire. The cooling property of this agent is limited; therefore, the material should remain covered and undisturbed for some time so that the chance of reignition is eliminated.

5.6

Portable Fire Extinguishers There are two types of hand-held fire extinguishers in general use. The vapor/liquid pressurized extinguisher, which eliminates oxygen from fire, is used on Class B and C fires. The dry-chemical

type, which eliminates oxygen from fire, is especially useful for Class B and C fires. The ABC drychemical type extinguishers are good on all types of fires. These fire extinguishers, along with available water, are the principal means of fighting rig fires. However, water and water-type extinguishing agents should not be used on Class C (electrical) fires, as water conducts electricity, and its use can cause death or injury by electrocution to the fire fighter, plus severe damage to electrical equipment. In addition to periodic visual inspection of all fire fighting equipment during fire drills, thorough inspection and maintenance procedures should be performed on all fire fighting equipment at the prescribed intervals.

5.7

Fixed Extinguishing Systems Some rigs may have fixed fire suppression systems for protection of the paint locker, SCR room, and engine room. Personnel who may need to operate these systems should be thoroughly familiar with their operation and operator-level maintenance. Any room or compartment equipped with these systems should have alarm systems consisting of bells or horns and flashing lights to let personnel know that the fire suppression system is about to be activated. These systems are either CO 2 or Halon. The following information refers to characteristics of each type:

A. Halon Although Halon is a very effective and clean fire-extinguishing agent, environmental concerns have limited the supply of Halon. Halon does not conduct electricity. In total flooding Halon systems, all personnel should be evacuated before the system is discharged. Diesel engines should be shut down before Halon is discharged, as the engines will suck the Halon out of the air and continue to run. Signs with this warning should be posted in engine rooms and at Halon activation switches. All doors and openings should be shut as tight as possible or the Halon will disperse. Halon does not effectively cool a smoldering fire, a liquid, or a substance that has been heated beyond its ignition temperature. Therefore, once the flames have been knocked down, the Halon concentration should be maintained until the area has cooled down. The quicker the Halon is used, the better it will work. If a small fire can be put out by a portable fire extinguisher, it should be used. However, do not wait too long before using the Halon system, or it may not be fully effective due to the heat build-up caused by the fire. B.

CO2 The basic principle of operation is the same for both Halon and CO 2 systems. However, the agents work differently. CO2 puts out a fire by displacing the oxygen, and it has some cooling effect. All of the comments above on shutting down engines, closing all doors, shutting ventilators, etc. apply. CO2 will shut the engines down by starving them of oxygen, but it is better if they are shut down before discharging the CO2.

Since CO2 displaces the oxygen in the air, you should assure that there is no one in the room when it is activated. Anyone entering the area should wear a Self Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA).

Ensure that the area is closed off long enough for the CO 2 to extinguish the fire and for the temperature to go down.

5.8

ILLUSTRATIONS 5.7.1

Smoking, when allowed, should be restricted to clearly marked designated areas. Refer to Section 5.0.A.

5.7.2 All storage tanks should be clearly labeled to identify contents and potential fire/explosion hazards. Refer to Section 5.0.N.

SECTION SIX – WELDING, CUTTING AND COMPRESSED GAS & OXYGEN CYLINDERS 6.1

General Precautions – Welding, Cutting and Other Spark/Flame Producing Operations A. All welding, grinding and cutting operations should be prohibited during certain operations, such as when encountering well control problems or testing, unless it can be determined by the operator’s representative or contractor’s representative that such an operation could be carried out safely. Hot Work Program should be followed. B. To control or eliminate fire hazards, good housekeeping should be maintained in and around areas of welding, cutting or grinding. C. In the event that the work area is located in a confined space, ventilation and other safety systems should be provided to ensure the area is safe. A Confined Space Entry Permit should be issued and include initial and on going atmospheric testing. (See Section 10.) D. Welding or burning should not be allowed on any structural member of a rig, mast, well control equipment, tubulars, high-pressure systems or lifting apparatus without management approval. A hot work permit should be prepared for the project. See 6.2. and 6.11 E. Fire prevention equipment should be located in the proximity of the welding and cutting operating area. An employee trained as a Fire Watch should be present and be ready to use the extinguisher if needed. F. Pressurized gas cigarette lighters should not be carried by anyone welding or cutting. G. Welding machinery and equipment should be maintained in accordance with manufacturer's specifications, and be inspected on a regular basis. Check the cables, ground clamp, electrode holder, gauges and switches to make sure that all are working properly before proceeding to weld. H. Fumes, gases and dust fumes produced by the electric welding process can be toxic and may require local source extraction. An assessment of the work to be performed should be done before each job is undertaken. Fumes generally contain particles from the electrode, the material being welded, other finishes or protective coatings that have been applied to the metal and gases used in the process. Welding fumes can have acute effects on the respiratory system. For example, welding on galvanized steel can cause a condition known as 'Fume Fever', which is caused by the inhalation of cadmium and zinc particles.

6.2

I.

A welding process generates a tremendous amount of heat. A welder may be exposed to a heat stress situation as a result of the process and it is essential that a protocol be developed to address the potential for worker distress.

J.

The welding area should always be equipped with a fire blanket and a well-stocked first aid kit.

Protective Equipment A. When arc welding, the welder should use a shield or helmet that will protect both the eyes and the skin. The proper shade shield should be used based on the particular operation being performed. Reference current issue of ANSI Z87.1 or equivalent standard. © Copyright 2004 IADC All rights reserved


B. Proper welding gloves, arm coverings, and aprons should be used at all times. Safety footwear should also be worn to protect the feet from contact with heat and sparks. A JSA or hazard assessment should be done prior to the beginning of a task to determine the risks associated with the task. C. Ears should be protected from sparks or slag entering the ear to the degree possible. D. Persons assisting welders should wear proper personal protective equipment. E. Ventilation or proper respiratory protection should be utilized when cutting or welding on metals that might produce harmful fumes. F. When required to work over water, appropriate fall protection and a floatation device should be used. When working at heights (6ft [1.8M] or above) appropriate fall protection should be utilized. G. When working in a confined space, a full body harness with an attached lifeline should be utilized. (See Section 10 for more on confined spaces.) H. Proper confined space operating procedures should be followed when welding or cutting in enclosed spaces. (See Section 10 for more on confined spaces.)

6.3

Hot Work Permit A. A Hot Work Permit program should be used to ensure that gas or electric welding or cutting is done in a safe and efficient manner. A Hot Work Permit should be prepared for working outside the welding shop (designated safe welding area). The work permit generally consists of:

1. Location of work to be done. 2. The date. 3. Names of persons performing the work. 4. Time of issue and expiration. 5. Brief description of work. 6. Special instructions for doing the job safely. B. The appropriate persons should sign permits before and after completion of work. Each company should determine who the appropriate person(s) is. C. A change of personnel involved in the task will require a new permit.

6.4

Preparatory – Precautions A. The welder should do his best to prevent sparks, flames or hot slag from being blown into or falling upon any combustible material or equipment likely to be ignited or damaged. B. Areas saturated with oil should be washed down and cleaned thoroughly to remove any ignitable substances. A gas test should be made to determine that no combustible vapors are present.

C. When cutting or welding is done around wooded decks, the wood should be saturated with water to prevent ignition and have appropriate fire protection ready for immediate use. D. Cutting or welding should not be conducted on pipelines, containers, tanks, or other vessels which may have contained flammable substances until they have been thoroughly cleaned, made vapor free and tested for the presence of flammable vapors. E. In confined areas where there is a possibility of combustible vapors being present, gas tests should be made before approval is given to begin work. Periodic gas tests should be made during the time the work is in progress. F. When cutting or welding, a fire watch should be assigned. The employee(s) assigned should have no other duties while actual cutting or welding is in progress. The fire watch should have the proper fire-fighting equipment available. G. When cutting or welding has to be done on bulkheads, decks, or overhead structures, the adjacent spaces should be cleared of combustibles and/or flammables before allowing the work to begin. H. Whenever Perforating Guns, Jet Cutters, Chemical Cutters, etc., are being armed, welding operations should be suspended and machines turned off until these pieces of equipment are well below the mud line. The wireline operator in charge should notify everyone when it is safe to continue work. The same procedure should be followed when the equipment is pulled out of the hole.

6.5

Maintenance of Tools and Equipment A. Welding leads should be completely insulated. If found to be worn or damaged, they should not be used until they are properly repaired or replaced. Welding leads with splices within 10 feet (3 m) of the holder should not be used. The welder should not coil or loop welding electrode cable around parts of his body. B. All ground connections should be in good condition.

C. Cutting torches should be equipped with an anti-reverse flow-check valve (flame arrester). D. Hoses should be inspected for leaks, proper fittings, burns and worn places. E. The welder, and whoever is assisting him, should keep welding leads and hoses routed through areas where they will be most protected from damage. F. Regulator gauges with cracked or broken glass covers should not be used. G. Union nuts and connections on regulator and hoses should be checked for faulty seats prior to being connected. H. Soapy water should be used to detect leaks in cutting equipment. I.

The welder should use a tip cleaner to clear foreign particles from inside the cutting tip. The cutting tip should not be rubbed flat on the surface while the gas or the oxygen is on.

J.

Oil, soap or grease should not be used to lubricate any connection on regulator or cylinders.

K. Torches should only be lit using a proper, approved ignition device. Cigarette lighters, matches, and other unapproved devices are not to be used for this purpose.



6.6

Specific Precautions – Arc Welding A. All rig personnel should be advised not to watch the arc, or the reflections off the wall as this can also cause eye burns. In order to prevent eye injuries, the welder should give the workers nearby a warning and time to protect their eyes before striking an arc. B. All work to be arc welded should be adequately grounded. The earth return lead should be hooked up between the electric welding plant and the point of welding. It should not be permitted to use any part of the rig structure as a return lead. C. The rod should not be left in the electrode holder when laid down. The stub ends should be placed in a suitable container and not on the floor. D. If an electrode holder becomes too hot to be used, an extra holder should be provided so that one can cool while the other is in use. Dipping hot electrode holders in water should be prohibited. E. The welder should keep welding cables dry and free of grease and oil to prevent premature breakdown of the insulation. F. Cables that must be laid on the deck should be protected so that they will not interfere with safe passage or become damaged or entangled. Welding leads should not be run unprotected through doorways. Leads should not be placed on stairs or steps. Special precautions should be taken to keep welding cables away from power supply cables. G. The welding machine should be turned off or leads disconnected from the welding machine when the equipment is not in use.

6.7

Specific Precautions – Gas Welding and Burning A. When opening valves on fuel gas cylinders, the fuel gas cylinders should be opened onequarter turn only. The oxygen cylinder valve should be fully open. A valve wrench should be kept in close proximity while using these cylinders. B. Hoses should not be run unprotected through doorways. If necessary, the door should be braced open, and hoses protected from being damaged. To prevent damage to hoses, they should not be placed on expanded metal grating. Hoses should not be placed on stairs or steps where they could create a tripping hazard. C. In order to prevent eye injuries, welders should give workers nearby a warning and time to protect their eyes. D. When discontinuing gas welding or cutting for a short time, close the oxygen and acetylene cylinder valves, bleed the line and close the torch valve. When welding or cutting is to be stopped for a longer period, you should proceed as follows: 1. Close oxygen and acetylene cylinder valves. 2. Open torch valves to release all gas pressure from hoses and regulators. 3. Close torch valves and release regulator pressure adjusting screws.

E. If welding over a drip pan, the drain line to the sump should be plugged.

F. Oxygen and acetylene valve connections should be kept clean. Do not use oil on oxygen valves or hose connections. G. To prevent flash backs, cylinders should have an anti-reverse flow-check valve (flame arrester) located between the regulator and hose.

6.8

Compressed Gas and Oxygen Cylinders - Storage When accidents involving compressed gas cylinders occur, they can cause serious injury or even death. The main hazards are:

    

Impact from the blast of a gas cylinder explosion or rapid release of compressed gas; Impact from parts of gas cylinders that fail or any flying debris; Contact with released gas or fluid; Fire resulting from the escape of flammable gasses or fluids; Impact from falling cylinders. Preventative measures are:

      

Proper installation; Proper maintenance; Proper equipment and/or design (e.g. properly fitted valves and regulators); Proper handling practices; Proper storage; Adequately ventilated working conditions; Adequate training and supervision. A. Cylinders should be properly secured in an upright position with protective caps in place at all times, except when the cylinder is in use. B. Stored Oxygen cylinders should be separated from fuel gas cylinders or combustible materials a minimum distance of 20 feet (6 m) or by a non-combustible barrier at least five feet high. C. Oxygen and fuel gas cylinders should be protected from direct sunlight and other excessive heat. D. Defective or damaged cylinders should be labeled and sent back on the next available transportation. E. Cylinders should be stored so they do not stand or lie in water.

F. Cylinders in storage should have the protective caps placed over the valves, if so equipped.

6.9

Cylinder Handling

A. Cylinders should be labeled as to their contents. If in doubt as to the contents, test the gas. B. Cylinders should be handled with care. Do not roll cylinders on their side. They should not be handled roughly, dropped, knocked around or used as rollers or supports.

C. Protective caps should always be in place on both full and empty cylinders while they are being moved, transported or stored.

D. A special rack should be built for the purpose of transporting and storing oxygen and acetylene cylinders. The rack should be constructed so as to properly secure individual oxygen and gas cylinders. E. Empty cylinders should have the valve closed, valve protection cap replaced, marked empty and returned to the vendor. F. Oil and grease should never be used to lubricate the threads on the cylinders or caps. G. When handling individual gas cylinders, use suitable cradles, single bottle racks, slings, clamps or other effective means to lift cylinders with a hoist or a crane. H. Gas cylinders should not be raised or lowered on the forks of lift trucks unless adequate precautions are taken to prevent them from falling. I.

6.10

Cylinders received at the work site should have a written certificate of inspection, or the stamp or mark of the inspection body on the gas cylinder itself.

Cylinder Usage A. Connections for cylinders that do not fit should not be forced. An acetylene pressurereducing regulator should always be attached when using acetylene from a cylinder. This pressure should not be more than 15 psi. B. An oxygen pressure-reducing regulator should not be attached to a cylinder containing combustible gas.

C. Oxygen should not be used for compressed air cleaning purposes. D. Oxygen and gas cylinders should be checked for hydrostatic date tests and content identification. Such markings are usually found on the shoulder of the cylinder. E. Oxygen should not be used in pneumatic tools to pressurize a container, to blow out lines or as a substitute for compressed air or other gases. F. The transfer of any gas from one cylinder to another should not be attempted. G. Compressed gas cylinders should be marked with the proper identification along with health and hazard warning labels. H. Always double check that the cylinder/gas is the right one for the intended use. I.

6.11

Before connecting a gas cylinder to equipment, make sure that the regulator and piping are suitable for the type of gas and pressure being used.

Safety Precautions For Engine Powered Welders

A. Always operate in an open well-ventilated area or vent the engine exhaust directly outdoors. B. Never fuel the engine while running or in the presence of an open flame. C. Wipe up spilled fuel immediately and wait for fumes to disperse before starting the engine. D. Never remove the radiator pressure cap from liquid cooled engines while they are hot to prevent scalding yourself.

E. Stop the engine before performing any maintenance or troubleshooting. The ignition system should be disabled to prevent accidental start of the engine. F. Keep all guards and shields in place. G. Keep hands, hair, and clothing away from moving parts.

6.12

Hot Work Permit Example HOT WORK PERMIT

PERMIT NO.

Rig Name/Number: 1. REQUEST Location of Work: Required Certificates

Nature of Work:

Check box if required and enter number

Requested by:

(Person performing the Work)

Raised by:

(Work Site Supervisor)

Mechanical Isolation Electrical Isolation Gas Test Confined Space

#    #

Work Over The Side Date:

From:

Date:

To:

2. PRECAUTIONS We, the above named in section 1 have discussed the work and agree to the work provided that the following precautions are taken: Isolation (Elec.) Pre-Job Meeting JSA Ref. # Isolation (Mech.) Protective Clothing Eye Protection Ear Protection Hand Protection Fire (Watch) Gas Test B.A. Set Ventilation

Pollution Prevention Standby Watch Radio Communication Standby Boat Life Vest Fall Protection Erect Barriers P.A. Announcement Radio Silence

Others/Comments:

Signature: Signature: Signature:

(Work Site Supervisor) (Person Performing Work) (Fire Watch)

3. ISOLATION I certify that the required isolation measures specified on the attached isolation certificate have been carried out. Signature: Position:

(Mech/Elec.)

Electrical Isolation Certificate Attached Mechanical Isolation Attached

Yes Yes

No No

4. GAS TEST I certify that gas tests have / will be carried out as per requirements of attached Gas Test Certificate. Signature: 5. PERMIT-TO-WORK APPROVAL Remarks:

(Authorized Gas Tester)

This permit is issued to precautions in section 2.

to carry out the stated work in section 1 and follow the

Signature:

(Rig Manager)

Time:

Date:

6. COMPLETION OF WORK I declare that the work carried out under this permit has been Completed / Suspended and that all Person / Equipment connected with the permit has been withdrawn from the worksite. Signature:

(Person Performing Work) Time:

Date:

I have checked the worksite and declare that the work carried out in connection with this permit is complete and that the Area / Equipment is safe for normal use. 7. DE-ISOLATION I hereby certify that I have carried out the necessary de-isolations, replaced all guards and safety devices and that the equipment is safe for normal use. Signature: 8. PERMIT-TO-WORK TERMINATION I declare this “Permit-to-Work” terminated.

(Mech / Elec.)

Signature:

(Rig Manager)

Time:

Time:

Date:

Date:

SECTION SEVEN – FLEET SAFETY 7.1

General Rules A. All drivers of company motor vehicles should practice defensive driving. B. All drivers of company vehicles should have appropriate drivers’ license for the type of vehicle(s) he or she drives. Only approved drivers may drive a company vehicle. Where possible, motor vehicle records or driving records should be checked on a minimum of an annual basis. C. The certificate of registration, insurance and other required documents, along with company accident forms, should be carried in all company-owned vehicles. D. All drivers of company motor vehicles should be familiar with, and abide by, state, federal, and local traffic regulations. Drivers should adhere to all applicable traffic regulations whether operating on company property or public roads. E. Seat belts should be installed in all company vehicles. All occupants of company vehicles and personal cars used on company business should use seat belts. F. Equipment on all company motor vehicles should conform to state, federal, and local regulations. G. Picking up hitchhikers should be prohibited. H. Any automotive accident involving a company owned, rented or leased vehicle, major or minor, should be reported as soon as possible to the supervisor. All required company, federal, and state accident forms should be completed. I.

Motor vehicles should not be driven within gaseous areas, around tank batteries, wells and emergency burning pits, or at low points where gas may have accumulated. Be aware that some gas is produced in all oil operations and gas vented from casing on rod-pumped wells can be ignited by an open flame or ignition spark. Vehicles should not be driven onto grassy spots or an area where gas accumulation is possible, the extremely hot exhaust system can create a fire hazard.

J.

A driver should make a “walk around” the vehicle looking for potential hazards entering it and putting it in motion.

before

K. When a vehicle is to be maneuvered in confined areas, precautions should be taken to ensure that the way is clear and that the driver can see the entire area. If the driver does not have clear visibility, help should be obtained from someone who has an unobstructed view. L. When possible, park so backing is not required. If you must back, follow these guidelines: 1. Clear the rear. 2. If an automatic back up alarm is not installed on the vehicle, sound the vehicle horn before you start to move. 3. Back immediately; never trust the scene you checked to stay the same. 4. Back slowly. © Copyright 2004 IADC All rights reserved


5. As you back, check both side mirrors. 6. Never back further than necessary. 7. Always back to the driver’s side whenever possible. 8. A signal person should be utilized who can see the area behind the truck and act as a guide. 9. When possible always park so the first move in the vehicle is forward. M. If an employee driving a vehicle should feel drowsy, another qualified employee should drive. If there is no other driver available, the employee should not operate the vehicle until capable of doing so safely. N. Never attempt to perform work or drive a vehicle when impaired by alcohol, medication, or drugs. (Note: Many over the counter allergy or sinus medication may also impair driver’s reactions.) O. At least one drive-wheel should be locked before a vehicle is raised with a jack. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions. Keep hands, feet and body in the clear as much as possible to avoid injury in case the jack fails. When it is necessary to crawl under a vehicle raised by a jack, the vehicle should be placed on jack stands or blocks. P. Before starting out in your vehicle, clear all windows of any frost, ice or dew. Cleaning only a small place on a windshield does not allow the proper visibility. Q. Driving is a full-time job. Drivers should not engage in any other activities. For example, when dialing and talking on a mobile telephone or updating records, a vehicle should be pulled off the road and stopped. R. Outside rear-view mirrors should be installed on each side of the vehicle. An addition of wide angle or convex mirrors may improve visibility in blind spots. S. Unsafe and discourteous driving practices such as road-hogging, disregarding the rights of pedestrians, violating traffic regulations and deliberate recklessness of any kind should be prohibited. T. Getting in and out of a vehicle while it is in motion or riding anywhere on the vehicle not designed for passengers should be prohibited. Do not drive a vehicle with an open door. U. The driver should use good judgment and proceed at a speed suitable to the conditions of the vehicle, the road, the traffic and the weather. V. Care should be taken when vehicles are being towed. The speed of the vehicles involved should be closely controlled at all times. W. Re-fueling should not be performed while the engine is running. If a servicing unit equipped with an engine is used to fuel the vehicles, the engine of that unit should also be shut off, unless its power is needed to deliver the fuel. While transferring fuel, the transport truck should be properly grounded. X. Smoking should be prohibited near a vehicle being refueled.

Y. Flammable liquids should not be carried in trunks or luggage compartments of vehicles. Sample containers handled by gas testers and other authorized persons may be carried in such vehicles, provided the valves are plugged to prevent leaking. Spare auto batteries should not be stored or transported in the trunk of a vehicle. Z. Precautions should be taken to ensure that aerosol containers, including engine starting fluids and de-icers, are not exposed to heat. Aerosol containers should not be carried in the same compartment as two-way radio transmitters. In addition, engine-starting fluid or other pressurized container(s) should not be carried inside the passenger compartment. AA. Except in emergencies, gasoline should not be carried inside passenger vehicles or the cabs of trucks. When an emergency requires that it be carried in these places, it should be in an approved container that is sealed tight to prevent the leakage of gasoline or gasoline vapors. BB. To make sure carbon monoxide fumes do not accumulate, garage doors should be opened for ventilation whenever a motor vehicle engine is running. These deadly fumes are odorless and invisible. CC.When the weather is extremely cold, employees sometimes seek warmth from a heater inside a parked motor vehicle that has its engine running. To avoid carbon monoxide poisoning in such instances, the employee should open a vent or window enough to ensure ample fresh air and should open a door wide enough at intervals to expel the potential carbon monoxide fumes. Installation of an approved carbon monoxide alarm should be considered for vehicles used in arctic or other extremely cold regions. Do not sleep in a vehicle with the engine running unless it is equipped with an approved carbon monoxide alarm. DD.Loose items, such as hard hats, books, etc., should not be carried on the rear window deck of a passenger car or the dash of vehicles. Loose items should be restrained when hauled in a vehicle with an internal storage area (such as a van or SUV).

7.2

Inspection, Servicing, and Mechanical Repair A. Vehicles should be kept in good mechanical condition, with particular attention being given to brakes, signals, lights, horns, windshield wipers, steering gear and tires. If a driver detects a mechanical defect or safety hazard in an assigned vehicle, that employee should arrange to have repairs made at once. If the vehicle is shared with other drivers as part of a vehicle pool, the employee should report the condition immediately to the person in charge of vehicle pool equipment. Operators of regulated vehicles should follow the required pre-trip/post-trip inspection. B. Wheel alignment, brake adjustment, brake lines and the front-end mechanical condition of vehicles should be visually inspected periodically. They should be replaced or repaired if found to be faulty. C. To prevent exhaust fumes from penetrating the passenger compartment, regularly inspect mufflers and tail pipes of vehicles. D. Lighted matches or sparks of any kind should be kept away from the top of an open battery during service or inspection. A battery gives off hydrogen, a highly explosive gas. E. The electrolyte or acid mixture from a battery may burn clothing and skin. Exposed skin should be washed thoroughly after servicing such a battery. © Copyright 2004 IADC All rights reserved


F. Caution should be used when removing the radiator cap to check the coolant when the engine has been running. Preferably, the radiator cap should be removed when the engine is cool.



G. When inspecting or performing maintenance in areas under the vehicle, the engine should be shut off and the wheels chocked. If it is necessary to check, inspect or perform maintenance with the engine running, auxiliary drive equipment should be disengaged when possible. If it is necessary to leave the equipment running, care should be taken to prevent becoming entangled in turning shafts or fans. H. When jump-starting a vehicle, refer to the vehicle operator’s manual for specific instructions.

7.3

Trucks A. Flammable liquids should only be carried in approved containers. B. The following items should be checked daily: 1. Tractor/Truck                   

     

 

Air Compressor Air Lines Battery Body Brake Accessories Brakes, Parking Brakes, Service Clutch Coupling Devices Defroster/Heater Drive Line Engine Exhaust Fifth Wheel Frame and Assembly Front Axle Fuel Tanks Horn Lights a. Head lights b. Stop lights c. Tail lights d. Turn indicators e. Dash and warning lights Mirrors Muffler Oil Pressure Radiator Rear End Safety Equipment a. Fire Extinguisher b. Reflective Triangles c. Flags – Flares – Fuses d. Spare Seal Beam e. Spare light bulbs Suspension System Starter

      

Steering Tachograph Tires Tire Chains (where applicable) Transmission  Wheels of trucks should be checked daily to see that all lug bolts and axle-flange nuts are tight. Windows Windshield Wipers 2. Trailer

            

Brake Connections Brakes Coupling Devices Coupling (King) Pin Doors (if applicable) Hitch Landing Gear Lights – All Roof (if applicable) Suspension System Tarpaulin Tires Wheels and Rims C. The passenger compartment of trucks should not be used to store tools. All tools should be carried outside the cab. D. All fittings, tools, supplies, equipment, trash and loose objects hauled on trucks should be firmly secured or restrained to prevent them from falling off the vehicle. E. When inflating truck tires, always stand in the clear to avoid the possibility of an injury if retaining rings or rims should spring out of place. Truck tires should never be inflated unless they are mounted on the truck or in an approved tire cage. Use a tire gauge to prevent over inflation. F. Trucks should be equipped with an approved headache board as a protection to the driver against flying winch lines and shifting pipe. G. Winch trucks should have a winch guard installed. H. All trucks should be equipped, per federal and local regulation, with a proper fire extinguisher, first aid kit and other appropriate emergency equipment. Fire extinguishers and other emergency equipment should be serviced or replaced immediately after use if necessary. I.

Trailers being pulled by coupling poles should have safety chains of sufficient size to hold load if the coupling pins break. These trailers should also have suitable means of preventing the coupling pin(s) from moving out of place.

J.

A load should not extend directly over the truck cab unless the truck is property equipped for such hauling.

K. When working or driving under or near high voltage lines, care should be taken to keep gin poles, mast guys or other objects at least 4’ from the lines. Where possible, deenergize

power if high loads will be within 4’ of the line. If power is not de-energized, a person should be stationed a safe distance away from the truck to guide the driver. In the event that contact is made, occupants should stay in the vehicle and if possible, move it from contact. If it is absolutely necessary to leave the vehicle while it is still in contact with the line, it should be done in such a way that no part of the body contacts the ground while another part is in contact with the vehicle. Before anyone is allowed to touch the vehicle, an electrician should clear it of any electrical charge. L. A power line pole should not be used as a snub for a winch line when material is moved or when a truck is pulled out from being struck. M. While pulling a load with a winch, workers should not stand between the end of the truck and the load. N. The tail chain on the winch line of a truck should not be pulled against the pulley on a gin pole. O. The winch line should not be used for assistance in climbing up on the truck bed. P. The hooks on the end of any winch line should be secured or controlled when they are not in use. Q. When equipment is moved with a gin truck, a tag line should be attached to the load, when it can be used safely, so that the helper can stand in the clear and still control it. R. When gin poles are handling heavy loads, both the load and the gin pole should be securely snubbed to the truck bed. S. A person should not walk or stand under a gin pole or on the gin pole truck bed when the gin pole is handling a load. T. When pipe, timber or any multiple-unit load is hauled, the load should first be boomed as tightly as possible. After a short distance is traveled, the load binders should be retightened. All pipe or timber loads settle, which cause the binders to loosen. U. Appropriate securing devices should be placed with one securing device every ten feet (3.3 meters) or as required per federal or local regulation. At a minimum: 1. Around the front and rear bolsters and the pipe. 2. Around the pipe and coupling pole near the rear bolster to support the coupling pole. 3. Around the pipe only, in the center of the load, to prevent the pipe from spreading if the front chain should fail. V. One securing device should be securely fastened on a load before anyone gets under the load to perform any other work, including the placing of additional load binders. W. Heavy-duty load binders should be used on heavy loads, as per federal or local regulations. X. Loose ends of securing chains or other binders should not be allowed to drag or hang free. Y. Workers should not stand directly over a binder handle when releasing binder chains. A trip bar should be used to release binders. The use of ratchet binders can reduce the risk from releasing binder handles.

Z. If the load on a truck starts to tumble or fall off, workers should not try to stop it. AA. Pipe (casing, drill pipe, collars, tubing) should be off loaded by the use of a forklift truck or crane. Should it be necessary to roll pipe off the truck bed, workers should not be between unloading pipe ramps. If the work necessitates that a worker be between pipe ramps, all unloading should stop immediately. Other workmen should be alerted so that they will not release the pipe. Never attempt to control rolling pipe with your feet or any other part of your body. Keep to the sides of the pipe rack, pipe ramps, and ends of the pipe. To have an even roll of pipe down the skids to the pipe rack, the truck should be parallel with the ends of the pipe rack. BB. Before the load binders are released on the truck, the stakes on both sides of the truck should be examined to see that they are securely set to prevent pipe from rolling when the binders are released. CC.Care should be taken so that equipment being hauled over railroad tracks does not foul or drag across the tracks. Adequate protection for tracks should be provided. DD.Truck and tire load capacity should not be exceeded. FF. Proper paperwork should accompany each commercial transport load. A Straight Bill of Lading should suffice. When carrying hazardous materials, a hazardous material shipping paper, in addition to the Bill of Lading, should be carried in a pouch on the driver’s door.

7.4

Safe Driving Concepts for Accident Prevention

A. The driver is responsible for the safe operation and movement of the vehicle. B. If going on a long trip, the driver should plan ahead so that he does not find himself exhausted and still far away from his destination. If tired or sleepy, you should not drive. The driver must follow local and federal rules regarding hours of service and maintain current driver logs. C. The driver should not be distracted by other activities, whether external or internal. D. The driver should use high-beam headlights whenever there is no street lighting and there is also no oncoming traffic, fog, rain or snow. E. Drive defensively by anticipating the potential errors of other motorists. Trips should be planned to avoid high-risk situations. Limited access highways should be used whenever possible. F. Driving should be adjusted to unfavorable weather conditions. G. Headlights should be on during the daylight hours. This practice has been shown to reduce certain types of accidents.

7.5

Hand Signals for Directing Vehicles A. Whenever possible, the vehicle should be positioned so as to minimize movement in reverse. Caution should be exercised when moving a vehicle on a rig site.

B. If another person is available, they should be utilized as a guide. The guide should be fully visible to the driver and if not fully visible, the driver should stop movement of the vehicle. Resume backing only after visual contact is restored with the guide.

C. When it’s necessary to move a vehicle, it is important that everyone understands exactly what’s to be done. The driver and the workers involved should understand who is directing the task and the procedures to be followed. Utilize a pre-task safety meeting to review all the hazards associated with the particular task as well as the precautions taken to minimize or eliminate them. D. Signals: 1. Proceed Slowly – Straight Forward or Backward: Both arms extended forward and slightly wider than the body, parallel to the ground. Palms facing the direction of desired travel. Together bend both arms repeatedly toward the head and chest then extend.

2. Turn: The direction arm is extended from the side of the body, parallel to the ground indicating the direction the vehicle or equipment is to travel. The motioning arm is extended in the opposite direction (palm upward) and repeatedly bent towards the head to indicate the desired direction of travel.

3. Distance to stopping point: To give the driver a visual reference for the distance to the stopping point, with both arms extended sideways with elbows bent upward at 90 degrees. Palms facing forward. Keep hands above head and bring elbows forward as the distance narrows. As elbows reach the straightforward position, continue the hands coming together above the head to indicate the stop point is being reached. Upon reaching the stopping point, give the STOP signal.

4. Stop: To stop all movement of the vehicle and await further instructions, cross arms at the wrist above the head and hold in position until the vehicle stops moving.

5. Emergency Stop: The driver must immediately stop the vehicle if anyone signals an emergency stop. To stop all movement of the vehicle immediately, extend both arms above the head with crossed arms at the wrists, then wave repeatedly down until parallel with the ground, then return to the stop position above the head. Repeat until the vehicle stops moving.

6. Vehicle is clear to leave the area: To show the driver that it is clear to leave the area, point at the driver, then extend both arms to the side of the body with the elbows bent upward at 90 degrees. Turn to face the direction of desired travel, extend arms forward until they are parallel to the ground indicating the direction to be used on leaving.

SECTION EIGHT – CRANE OPERATIONS 8.1

Crane Operator Training (Qualifications) A. Crane Operators should be trained and should meet the requirements of the approved regulatory body. B. Only designated Operators should operate Cranes. C. Operator trainees should operate the crane only under the direct supervision of a designated Operator. D. In addition to formal classroom training, Crane Operator candidates should be asked to perform required lifts before final certification is granted. A list should be kept of the required lifts in the form of a checklist, and should require the signatures of the candidate, the Crane Operator, and the supervisor. E. Crane Operators should be recertified every four - (4) years. F. Crane Operators should have physical examinations every four - (4) years or as required by federal or local regulations. G. Rigger Training: The following elements should be included in this program:        

Safe loading, and unloading procedures. Crane actions, movements, and signals. Responsibilities and authorities of personnel involved in typical cargo handling operations at the site. Procedures for responding to injuries to personnel, dropped or leaking cargoes and other incidents. Personnel protective equipment requirements. Responding to unusual occurrences. Visual inspection of slings and sling identification. Rigging procedures.

In addition to the above minimum training elements, a Qualified Person should ascertain whether assigned personnel are able to carry out their assigned duties.

8.2

Inspection Requirements A. Cranes should be inspected as recommended by manufacturers’ recommendation and applicable regulatory standards. B. Daily Inspection: The Crane Operator should inspect the following each time that they access the crane and prior to commencement of lifting operations.

1. The Crane Operator should check to see that: a. All access ladders, walkways, gates, and hatches are: o o

Free from obstruction Cleaned of any residual oils and greases that could cause slipping hazards



b. All deck plates are secured and access hatches closed. c.

Service hoses, e.g., diesel, air, and water are properly stowed.

d. Warning signs and barriers are posted accordingly. 1. Pre-Start Checks: a. Carry out a visual check of the crane to determine its serviceability. This should include the boom, hook blocks, sheaves, wire ropes and pendants (including spooling on drums, rope terminations and any anchorage points), cab and machinery house covers b. Complete the pre-start checklist supplied by the Manufacturer or Owner. This check should include a physical check of all oil levels, coolant level and fuel level. c.

Check that all guards over and around moving machinery are in place and secure.

d. The Operator’s cab windows should be clean and window wipers in good condition. e. All items (personal belongings, clothing, tools drink cups, etc.) in the cab should be stored in such a manner that they would not interfere with Operator controls. f.

The crane structures, walkways, etc. should be free from all loose material, tools, etc., which may have the potential to result in falling objects.

g. Limit switches and warning devices should be working properly.

8.3

General Operation Requirements A. The Crane Operator should not start machine movements until a signalman is within his range of vision or adequate communications have been established. B. The Crane Operator should only follow the signals of the designated signalman. However, if anyone should give the emergency “STOP!” signal, the Crane Operator should comply. C. When extensions are added to the boom, the crane hoisting capacity plate should be changed to clearly indicate the safe load for the boom length and radius being used.

D. There should be at least five wraps of cable on the drum at all times. E. While the crane is in operation, the Operator should not leave the controls. If the Operator must leave the cab at any time, the load should be safely landed, and the prime mover shut down. F. Tag lines for controlling loads should be used. G. A standard signal system or two-way communication devices should be used on all crane operations. When depending on radio communication, if the communication fails, the crane Operator should stop all movement of the crane and/or load until it can be determined that it is safe to proceed. Reference API RP 2D. H. Personnel should not be permitted to work or walk under suspended loads. I.

The Operator should not pass a load over personnel. A warning signal should be sounded warning personnel to stay clear of the path of a load.

J.

Personnel should not climb, ride or walk on the crane or boom other than for inspection purposes. If necessary, the boom should be lowered to permit safe inspections. When climbing on a boom, fall protection should be utilized.

K. A personnel transfer device should be used to transport personnel by crane. All personnel transfer devices should be provided with a tail or tag line that is snag resistant and should have a safety lanyard connected between the transfer device and crane hook. (See Section 12.18) L. A cargo basket should not be used to transport personnel and a personnel transfer device should not be used as a cargo basket. M. During lifts of cargo or personnel, the load should be over water until it reaches the proximity of the boat. N. When a workbasket is used, personnel should use personal protective equipment. O. All hooks used to lift personnel should be equipped with a self-closing positive locking safety latch. Hooks used to hoist materials should be equipped with a safety latch. P. A crane boom should not be moved or handle loads within a close proximity of high voltage lines. 1. In transit with no load and boom lowered, the equipment clearance should be a minimum of 4 feet for voltages less than 50 kV, and 10 feet for voltages over 50 kV, up to and including 345 kV, and 16 feet for voltages up to and including 750 kV. 2. When cranes are handling a load the minimum distance between the power lines and the crane load or any part of the crane should be 10 feet for power lines 50 kV or below. For power lines over 50 kV, the distance should be 10 feet plus 0.4 inch for each 1kV over 50 kV. Q. Personnel should not ride on suspended loads. R. Each crane should be equipped with an all-purpose ABC class rated fire extinguisher not less than 20lbs. S. The Crane Operator should advise his supervisor when unsafe conditions exist. T. A preventative maintenance program developed in consideration of the crane manufacturer’s recommendations should be established and followed. U. Each crane should be equipped with a flashing light that is activated as soon as the crane is started. This device alerts helicopter pilots that the crane is in use. V. The Crane Operator should land the load, secure the crane and exit the crane cab. He should stand in plain sight of the pilot when the helicopter approaches the rig. W. Anti-two-blocking devices and weight indicators should be in place, in good condition and functioning properly. Limit switches and devices should not be overridden. If there is an absolute need to override a limit switch, review of the process should be undertaken and all personnel involved in the operation moved to a safe area. The Crane Operator must return the override limit switch to operational status once the process is completed.



X. Crane hand signals should be posted at the crane and other areas where they can be seen by rigging personnel. Y. The boom angle indicator should be in place and functioning properly. Z. Each crane should be load-tested to manufacturers’ specifications and regulatory requirements after any major repairs, changes to boom lengths, or when initially rigged up. AA. Prior to commencing lifting operations, the Crane Operator should take into consideration the prevailing weather conditions, e.g. wind speed/direction, ambient temperature and visibility. Lifting operations should not commence if the weather or environmental conditions could jeopardize the safety of the activity. BB. The Crane Operator should determine the weight of the load prior to the lift. CC.Mobile cranes that utilize outriggers for stability should have all the outriggers extended and properly set on firm ground prior to commencing any lifts. DD.While using a mobile crane, the Operator should be sure the crane is properly stabilized and secured from inadvertent moving. Wheels should be chocked, brakes are not considered adequate.

8.4

Slings and Shackles All slings, including those used for pre-slinging, should comply with API RP 2D-current edition or regulatory requirements. The rating of the shackles utilized shall be equal to or greater than the rating of the slings. Each shackle and sling should be individually load stamped and certified. Only shackles and sling hooks that are load rated by their manufacturer, with a rating appropriate for the load, should be used. A system of periodic inspection should be established to assure that any deformation or elongation in the shackles and sling hooks does not exceed the manufacturers’ recommendations.

A. The integrity of slings may be compromised when passed around sharp edges. B. Shackles should not be side loaded. o

o

C. The following chart indicates the tonnage pull on each leg of the sling from 0 to 120 . When using single slings in pairs you must always be aware of the increased loadings in the slings when lifting at an angle. Care should be taken that the safe working load of a sling is not exceeded.

1. For the above reason, the SWL of a pair of single slings decreases as the angle between them increases. o

0 o 30 o 60 o 90 o 120

- SWL = SWL of one sling x 2 - SWL = SWL of one sling x 2 x 0.966 - SWL = SWL of one sling x 2 x 0.866 - SWL = SWL of one sling x 2 x 0.707 - SWL = SWL of one sling x 2 x 0.5

OR o

0o o 30 o 60 o 90 o 120

- SWL = SWL of one sling x 2 - SWL = SWL of one sling x 1.93 - SWL = SWL of one sling x 1.73 - SWL = SWL of one sling x 1.414 - SWL = SWL of one sling only

2. Always consider the variation in sling capacity when slinging in various configurations.

Multiply the SWL of one leg by the mode factor “M” to obtain the SWL of the configuration.

8.5

Standard Hand Signals for Crane Operations

HOIST Point up and move hand in small circles.

LOWER Point down and move hand in small circles.

MOVE SLOWLY Hold one hand still over the signaling hand and give any motion signal

RAISE BOOM Extend arm with fingers closed and point thumb upward.

LOWER BOOM Extend arm with fingers closed and point thumb downward.

SWING BOOM Extend arm and point finger in direction of swing.

EMERGENCY STOP Extend both arms with palms pointing down; move arms rapidly up and down in short motions.

DOG EVERYTHING Clasp hands in front of body.


SECTION NINE – FORKLIFT OPERATIONS 9.1

General Operation Requirements A. Only trained and authorized operators should be permitted to operate a powered industrial truck commonly referred to as forklift truck. The employer should develop a training program and document the training. Forklift operators should be trained in the type forklift they are to operate. B. Forklift operators should know the maximum lifting capacity of the unit they are operating and should not exceed its limits. Lifting capacity of the forklift truck should be marked on the vehicle. C. Forklift trucks should be equipped with appropriate safety equipment, such as lights, seat belt, back up alarm, horn, fire extinguisher, and parking brake. D. Adjustments or repairs made to forklift trucks should follow manufacturers’ recommendations. E. When the operator is leaving the forklift, the forks should be lowered flat to the ground, parking brake set, and engine turned off. F. The forklift operator should advise his supervisor when unsafe conditions exit. G. When a load is moved, it should be lowered to allow as much visibility and stability as possible. If a load blocks forward vision, drive backwards. H. The operator should not permit anyone on the forklift truck or lift forks while it is in motion. I.

Forklift forks should not be used to raise or lower personnel without an approved personnel platform.

J.

Personnel should not place hands or any other parts of their body on or around the hydraulic lift frame of the forklift when it is in operation.

K. Forklift trucks should be operated at a safe speed. L. When not being used, the forklift forks must be stowed in the lowered position. M. Each operator should conduct an inspection of the forklift truck to be used. The forklift truck should be inspected at the beginning of each tour or prior to use if not used regularly. N. Forklift operators should wear proper PPE. This may include:    

Gloves and safety boots Hardhats Eye protection Hearing protection

O. Forklift incidents can be prevented by:    

Trained maintenance personnel, inspectors and operators. Proper forklift selection for the job. Not hurrying or taking shortcuts. Paying attention. © Copyright 2004 IADC All rights reserved


  

9.2

Being well rested. Following safe policies and procedures. Check for unsafe conditions such as: o Forks or other load-handling attachments cracked or bent. o Gouges or large chunks missing from tires. o Blind corners. o Leaky connectors and hydraulic cylinders. o Too much free play in the steering. o Improper refueling or recharging practices. o Rough or uneven location.

General Training Requirements A. Forklift Operators should have the necessary training to be able to perform their jobs properly. Initial and refresher training should be documented. Training programs should include:

       

The nature of hazards in the work area. How to perform work safely. Rules of powered industrial truck operation and why these rules exist. Loading and unloading, center of gravity, stability, and mechanical limitations. Supervised practice on an operating course that simulates actual conditions. The types of trucks that the Forklift Truck Operator is expected to operate. Oral, written, and operational performance testing. Knowledge of inspection procedures.

SECTION TEN – CONFINED SPACE ENTRY GUIDELINES 10.1

General A. While the principles of confined space entry are generally universal, local regulatory requirements may impose specific additional responsibilities or may specify standards that differ from those provided here. Many incidents occur because victims do not fully understand the threat of airborne hazards that they cannot see, smell, or feel. Additional incidents occur when untrained persons enter unknown atmospheres to rescue fallen co-workers. Common causes of confined space related incidents are:

1. Unsafe Acts and Omissions a. Failure to test the atmosphere in a confined space before entry. b. Failure to continuously monitor the atmosphere in a permit-required confined space. c.

Failure to lock out hazardous fluids, mechanical equipment, and electrical power to equipment inside the confined space.

d. Failure to follow approved entry procedures. e. Failure to preplan rescue and retrieval efforts. f.

Failure to use adequate respirators.

2. Unsafe Conditions a. Lack of training. b. Fall hazards. c.

Oxygen deficient atmosphere.

d. Oxygen enriched atmosphere. e. Poor or improper lighting f.

Flammable atmosphere.

g. Lack of a communication system when entrants are out of sight. h. Toxic atmosphere. i.

Electrical shock hazards.

j.

Presence of an engulfing or drowning medium.

k.

Entrapping mechanisms.

l.

Grinding, crushing, or mixing mechanisms. © Copyright 2004 IADC All rights reserved


m. Contact with hazardous chemicals. B. Key Elements of a Confined Space Written Program may include: 1. Identification of confined spaces. All confined spaces should be identified and classified as non-permit-required confined spaces or permit-required confined spaces. The degree of hazards that confront entrants determines the classification of the confined space. A hazard assessment should be performed and documented. Permit-required confined spaces should be posted. 2. Establishment and full implementation of a written entry permit system. 3. Air monitoring. 4. Selection and training of key personnel. 5. Protective equipment. 6. Rescue procedures and provisions for attendants and emergency response. 7. Personnel selection, training, and motivation are the three most important aspects of a confined-space safe entry program. This program should be established through oversight by health and safety professionals and support by management. 8. Safe entry procedures must be developed for permit-required spaces before personnel are allowed to enter these spaces. It is important to include any emergency that could occur in the confined space in the safe entry procedure emergency response and rescue procedures. The maximum number of authorized entrants should be kept to a minimum. This number should be spelled out in the confined-space safe entry procedure required to obtain the permit. The duration of the permit should not exceed the time required to complete the assigned task or job. Confined Space Entry Permits should expire at the end of the work shift of the personnel involved in the task. When a third party is conducting the work in the confined space and the rig crew members assisting are being relieved, the confined space operation should stop and a new permit be issued. All lockout/tagout provisions, as well as preparations for entry and emergency response, need to be rechecked. All safeguards in the approved procedure should be in place before the second crew enters the confined space. 9. A lockout/tagout program is essential to safeguard personnel during confined-space entry operations. Locking devices should be secure enough so that they are not accidentally removed. Devices used to block or restrain stored mechanical energy sources must be engineered to do so safely. Lines and pipes that could carry flammable, toxic, or injurious substances into the confined space must be blocked by positive means, such as valves, so that the atmosphere in the confined space is not contaminated or rendered inert. 10. Key Personnel Roles a. Supervisor: The supervisor has overall responsibility for the safety of all persons involved with entry operations into confined spaces under his or her control. This includes authorized entrants, safety attendants, and emergency rescue personnel. The supervisor authorizes entry into a confined space, approves procedures for entry, and coordinates efforts of all other key personnel. The supervisor is responsible to see that all safety requirements identified in the permit are met, all required equipment is readily available, and all persons involved in the entry are fully

aware of their roles and responsibilities. The supervisor's responsibilities also include closing out the permit when the entry is complete and retaining the permit for one year for audit purposes. b. Designated Safety Attendant: The Safety Attendant continuously observes authorized entrants working in a confined space. The Safety Attendant should be trained to recognize early symptoms of oxygen depletion (anoxia), toxic effects, and behavioral changes. The attendant should not be exposed to the same hazard, as the entrants should be trained, equipped, and physically able to assist the Confined Space Rescue team. He or she will keep track of the number of people entering and leaving the confined space to avoid exposing rescue personnel to grave risks by searching for a person who has previously left the confined space. Where entrants are out of sight of the safety attendant, a means of communications must be provided. c. Authorized Entrant: An authorized entrant is a worker who is trained to safely enter, work in, and exit confined spaces. Training should include classroom training, on-the-job training in self-help techniques, and an examination. The Authorized Entrant should be physically fit to be able to wear a SCBA and conduct work in confined space. d. Entry Supervisor: The person responsible for determining if acceptable entry conditions are present at a permit space where entry is planned, for authorizing entry and overseeing entry operations, and for terminating entry as required by this section. An entry supervisor also may serve as an attendant or as an authorized entrant, as long as that person is trained and equipped as required by this section for each role he or she fills. Also, the duties of entry supervisor may be passed from one individual to another during the course of an entry operation. The entry supervisor reviews and approves procedures to satisfy confined-space entry permit requirements. Entry supervisor also defines the types of respiratory protection needed in the confined space and samples air to determine that oxygen content is neither deficient nor enriched and that the atmosphere is nonflammable, nonexplosive, and nontoxic. The entry supervisor or a safety engineer inspects the confined space to determine if there are physical, engulfment, electrical, fall, or fire hazards that could injure entrants. He or she takes steps to prevent movement of machinery because of gravity, springs, or trapped compressed gases and reviews and approves procedures for entry, emergency response plans, and preparations for the confined-space entry. e. Rescue Team: Rescue Team members should be trained and physically fit to be able to carry out rescue operations while wearing a SCBA. Training should include classroom training, on-the-job training in rescue techniques, and an examination. 11. Confined-space entry permit programs should be evaluated annually so that personnel, procedures, and equipment components of the program are maintained in a high state of readiness. Confined-space entry permits should be retained for one year after each job completion in a central location. A feedback system should be implemented to address problems encountered during confined-space entry.

10.2

Scope and Application This program establishes recommended procedures for classifying, preparing and entry of confined spaces. This program applies to any confined space: A. That has limited openings for entry and/or exit. © Copyright 2004 IADC All rights reserved


B. That could contain known or potential hazards. C. That is not intended for continuous occupation. D. That has insufficient natural ventilation.

10.3

Definitions

A. Confined Space means a space that: 1. Is large enough and so configured that an employee can bodily enter and perform assigned work; and 2. Has limited or restricted means for entry or exit; and 3. Is not designed for continuous employee occupancy. B. Non-Permit Confined Space means a confined space that does not contain or, with respect to atmospheric hazards, have the potential to contain any hazard capable of causing death or serious harm. C. Permit-Required Confined Space means a confined space that has one or more of the following characteristics: 1. Contains or has the potential to contain a hazardous atmosphere; or 2. Contains a material that has the potential for engulfing an entrant; or 3. Has an internal configuration such that an entrant could be trapped or asphyxiated by inwardly converging walls or by a floor which slopes downward and tapers to a smaller cross-section; or 4. Contains any recognized serious safety or health hazard. Note: A Permit-Required Confined Space may be reclassified as a non-permit confined space by removing the hazard before entry. D. Acceptable Entry Conditions means the conditions that must exist in a permit space to allow entry and to ensure that employees involved with a Permit-Required Confined Space entry can safely enter into and work within the space. E. Designated Safety Attendant means an individual stationed outside the permit space who monitors the authorized entrants and who performs all attendants’ duties assigned by the Confined Space Entry Program. F. Authorized Entrant means an employee who is authorized by the employer to enter a permit space. G. Blanking or Blinding means the absolute closure of a pipe, line, or duct by the fastening of a solid plate that completely covers the bore and is capable of withstanding the maximum pressure of the pipe, line, or duct with no leakage beyond the plate. Attempts should be made to blind at the closest point to the confined space. H. Double Block and Bleed means the closure of a line or pipe by closing and locking, or tagging, two (2) in-line valves and by opening and locking or tagging a drain or vent valve in the line between the two closed valves.

I.

Entry means the action by which a person passes through an opening into a Permit-Required Confined Space. Entry occurs as soon as any part of the entrant’s body breaks the plane of an opening into the space.

J.

Entry Permit means the written or printed document that is provided by the employer to allow and control entry into a permit space. Acceptable entry conditions are properly noted on this document.

K. Entry Supervisor means the person responsible for determining if acceptable entry conditions are present at a permit space where entry is planned, for authorizing entry and overseeing entry operations, and for terminating entry as required. L. Hazardous Atmosphere means an atmosphere that may expose employees to the risk of death, incapacitation, impairment of the ability to self-rescue, injury, or acute illness from one or more of the following causes: 1. Atmosphere oxygen concentration below 19.5 percent or above 23.5 percent. 2. Flammable gas, vapor or mist in excess of 10 percent of the lower flammable limits (LFL). 3. Airborne combustible dusts at a concentration that meets or exceeds lower explosion limits (LEL). 4. Any other atmospheric condition that is immediately dangerous to life and health (IDLH). 5. Atmospheric concentration of any substance for which exposure could result in the person exceeding the permissible exposure limit of that substance. M. Hot Work Permit means the employer’s written authorization to perform operations capable of providing a source of ignition. N. Immediately Dangerous to Life or Health (IDLH) means any condition: 1. That poses an immediate or delayed threat to life, 2. That would cause irreversible advanced health effects, or 3. That would interfere with an individual’s ability to escape unaided from the permit space. O. Inerting means the displacement of the atmosphere in a permit space by a non-combustible gas to such an extent that the resulting atmosphere is non-combustible. Note that this procedure produces an IDLH oxygen deficient atmosphere. P. Isolation means the process by which a permit space is removed from service and completely protected against the release of energy or material into the space. Q. Oxygen Deficient Atmosphere means an atmosphere containing less than 19.5 percent oxygen by volume. R. Oxygen Enriched Atmosphere means an atmosphere containing more than 23.5 percent oxygen by volume. S. Permit System means the employer’s written procedure for preparing and issuing permits for entry, and for returning the permit space to service following termination of entry.

T. Prohibited Condition means any condition in a permit space that is not allowed by the permit during the period when entry is authorized. U. Rescue Team means the persons designated to rescue employees from permit spaces. A. Retrieval System means the equipment (including a retrieval line, chest or full body harness, wristlets if appropriate, and a lifting device or anchor) used for non-entry rescue of persons from permit spaces. W. Testing means the process by which the hazards that may confront entrants of a permit space are identified and evaluated. Testing includes specifying the tests that are to be performed in the permit space.

10.4

General Requirements A survey of sites should be conducted to identify areas for classification as confined spaces. As a result of that survey, the following areas may or may not be considered Permit-Required Confined Spaces:

A. Bulk mud hopper; B. Bulk cement hopper; C. Fuel tanks; D. Mud tanks; E. Frac tanks; F. Skimming System tanks; G. Water tanks; H. Cellars; I.

Sumps or pits; or J.

10.5

Any other enclosed area a person may be required to enter.

Posting Danger Signs Confined spaces that are normally accessible shall be labeled with a sign reading “Danger – Confined Space – Do Not Enter – Permit May Be Required,” or similar verbiage.

10.6

Procedures The company should designate and train Entry Supervisors. Entry Supervisors are responsible for determining if the space is a Permit-Required Confined Space. They are also responsible for the preparation and testing of confined spaces immediately before, and during entry. A. The confined space must be properly isolated. Every line connected to the space must be blinded or disconnected as close to the confined space as possible. B. All electrical and mechanical sources of energy shall be locked out and tagged. Equipment should be tested to ensure that energy, such as pressure or mechanical, has been released and not held in pipes or equipment. Electrical connections and switches should be checked to ensure power is not present.

C. The space should be washed, steamed, purged, etc., to free the space of contaminants. D. Confined space entry may require exhaust ventilation before and during entry. It may be necessary to supply forced ventilation if natural ventilation is not adequate. If forced ventilation is used, the air mover shall not be removed. If the forced ventilation is to be removed, the entry permit should be reviewed and revised including written authorization given from the person authorizing the entry. E. The confined space should be checked in the following order for: 1. Oxygen level; 2. Flammable vapors; 3. Air borne combustible dust; and 4. Toxic gases. The instrument readings should be recorded. Acceptable non-permit atmosphere conditions are: 1. Oxygen more than 19.5 percent and less than 23.5 percent. 2. Combustible vapors less than 10 percent LFL. 3. Hydrogen Sulfide less than or equal to 10 ppm measured as an 8-hour time-weighted average.

10.7

Permit Preparation The Entry Supervisor is responsible for preparing the Permit-Required Confined Space Entry Permit before allowing any entry. A. Atmosphere Testing will be conducted before issuing the entry permit. The acceptable entry levels without respiratory protection are: 1. Oxygen more than 19.5 percent and less than 23.5 percent.

2. Flammable gas, vapor or mist is less than 10 percent of its lower flammable limit (LFL). 3. Air borne combustible dust is less than its LFL.

NOTE: This concentration may be approximated as a condition in which the dust obscures vision at a distance of 5 feet (1.52 m) or less. 4. Hydrogen sulfide less than or equal to 10 ppm measured as an 8-hour time-weighted average. Such testing must be repeated periodically during the entry operation. The results of the testing shall be recorded on the entry permit along with the time of the tests and the name of the person doing the testing. B. Permit Duration shall normally be for one (1) work shift. The time of issue will be noted on the permit. The permit shall expire at the end of the work shift or two (2) hours after issue if work is not commenced. C. Permit Posting shall be at the entrance to the confined space. D. Permit Closure. The Entry Supervisor must terminate entry and close the entry permit when: 1. The entry operations covered by the entry permit have been completed; or 2. A condition that is not allowed under the entry permit arises in or near the permit space. Permit closure shall be effective upon completion of the work. Any problems that occurred during the confined-space entry and the work assignment should be noted on the permit. E. Potential Hazards and Precautions necessary to perform the work safely will be checked on the permit. All employees, including third party, will comply with all precautions checked. F. Designated Safety Attendant must be named on the entry permit. If the original authorized and trained attendant is relieved and a new authorized and trained attendant is assigned, the new attendant’s name shall be put on the permit. G. Communication methods to be used during the entry operation should be designated by the Entry Supervisor. This will normally be voice, sound or sight between the Designated Safety Attendant and the Authorized Entrants. H. Personal Protective Equipment appropriate for the hazards will be designated by the Entry Supervisor and will be worn by all entrants. Such equipment may include, but is not limited to: hearing protection, slicker suits, gloves, goggles and/or face shields. In addition, respiratory protection may be required depending on the operation and the atmosphere within the confined space. Under no circumstances will an entry be made into an Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health (IDLH) atmosphere without an airline-supplied breathing apparatus, which incorporates a five (5) minute escape air supply. Such entry will also require a full-body harness with escape/retrieval line attached. I.

10.8

Lifelines, Body Harnesses and Other Rescue Equipment must be provided for permitrequired confined space entry.

Entry No person shall enter a Permit-Required Confined Space unless an Entry Permit has been signed and issued. All persons entering a confined space will be listed on the Entry Permit.

A. Entry Permit must be made available at the time of entry to all Authorized Entrants by posting it at the entry portal or by any other equally effective means, so that the entrants can confirm that pre-entry preparations have been completed. B. Authorized Entrants are to be named on the Entry Permit. Their duties include: 1. Understand potential hazards of the confined space and the signs, modes and consequence of exposure to the hazards. 2. Make proper use of testing and monitoring equipment, ventilation equipment, communication equipment, personal protective equipment, lighting equipment, barriers and shields, equipment needed for ingress and egress, rescue and emergency equipment, and any other equipment necessary for safe entry into, and rescue from, permit spaces. 3. Maintain communication with the Designated Safety Attendant. 4. Notify the Designated Safety Attendant when evacuation is necessary. 5. Initiate self-rescue when the Designated Safety Attendant orders an evacuation, the evacuation alarm sounds, or a prohibit condition and/or danger is perceived. 6. At the end of a confined space entry, ensure that: a. All personnel have left the space and are accounted for. b. No equipment or material has been left in the confined space. c.

Problems that arise during entries are documented on the Confined Space Entry Permit.

7. Test results are recorded on the Confined Space Entry Permit and initialed by the person performing the test. C. Designated Safety Attendant must be named on the Entry Permit. His duties include: 1. Remain outside the confined space at all times during entry operations unless relieved by another authorized and trained Attendant. 2. Continuously maintain an accurate count and identification of all individuals in the confined space. 3. Understand and recognize potential confined space hazards. 4. Monitor activities both internal and external of the confined space to determine if it is safe for entrants to remain in the space. 5. Maintain effective and continuous contact with entrants. 6. Evacuate entrants immediately when: a. A condition is observed that is not allowed in the Confined Space Entry Permit; b. Behavioral effects of hazardous exposures are detected; or

c. A hazard, either inside, or outside the confined space is detected that could endanger entrants. 7. Summon rescue and other emergency services when it is determined that those entrants may need assistance to escape from the confined space. 8. Take the following actions when unauthorized individuals approach or enter a confined space: a. Warn the individual away from the confined space. b. Request the individual to exit immediately if they have entered the confined space. c. Inform the entrants that the unauthorized individual has entered the confined space. d. Prevent unauthorized personnel from performing a rescue in the event of an emergency. 9. Perform non-entry rescue if possible. D. Entry Supervisor is responsible for the following: 1. Knows the hazards that may be faced during entry, including information on the mode, signs, symptoms and consequences of the exposure. 2. Confined Space Entry Permit form has been completed after it has been determined that all actions and conditions necessary for safe entry have been performed and the permit requirements have been communicated to all personnel involved. 3. Confined Space Entry Permit contains the required information and that the necessary procedures, practices and equipment are in effect. Additionally, the permit is either posted at the entryway to the confined space or otherwise made available so the entrants can assure themselves that pre-entry preparations have been completed. 4. All confined spaces are monitored periodically to confirm safe conditions exist and, if not, entrants are evacuated and the permit is canceled. 5. Appropriate measures are taken to prevent entry of unauthorized personnel and provide a means to remove them from all confined spaces. 6. Rescue Team is available for Permit-Required Confined Space entry and a means for summoning them is operational.

10.9

Exit The exit from Permit-Required Confined Spaces and the returning of the area back to service should follow a systematic approach. The authorized attendant ensures that all personnel have signed the Entry Permit in the “out” section.

10.10 Rescue Team A. The employer shall ensure that each member of the Rescue Team is provided with and is trained to properly use the personal protective equipment and rescue equipment necessary for making rescues from permit spaces.

B. Each member of the Rescue Team is to be trained to perform the assigned rescue duties. Each member of the Rescue Team should also receive the training required of Authorized Entrants. C. Each member of the Rescue Team should practice making permit space rescues at least once every 12 months, by means of simulated rescue operations in which they remove dummies, mannequins or actual persons from the actual permit spaces or from representative permit spaces. Representative permit spaces shall, with respect to opening size, configuration and accessibility, simulate the types of permit spaces from which rescue is to be performed. Members of the Rescue Team should be trained and certified in basic first aid and in cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR).

10.11 Training Employees whose work is regulated by this section should be trained so that they acquire the understanding, knowledge and skills necessary for the safe performance of the duties assigned under this section. A. Training should be provided to each affected employee: 1. Before the employee is first assigned a permit-required duty. 2. Before there is a change in assigned duties. 3. Whenever there is a change in permit space operations that presents a hazard in which an employee has not previously been trained; and 4. Whenever the employer has reason to believe that either there are deviations from the permit space entry procedures or there are inadequacies in the employee’s knowledge or use of these procedures. B. The training should establish employee proficiency in the duties required by this section and should introduce new or revised procedures, as necessary, for compliance with this section. C. The employer should certify that the training has been accomplished. The certification should contain each employee’s name, the signatures or initials of the trainers, and the dates of training. The certification should be available for inspection by employees and their authorized representatives.

10.12 Contractor Requirements When a contractor will be performing confined space entry, the following steps should be completed. A. Inform contractors that the work place contains confined spaces that require a permit before entry. B. Inform the contractor why the space is considered a confined space. C. For a Permit-Required Confined Space entry, the contractor must be informed of past experiences and hazards. D. Inform the contractor of any precautions and procedures that have been implemented to protect all persons in the confined space or in the area of the confined space.

E. If both employee and contractor employees will be making entries, the host employer should coordinate the entries. F. For Permit-Required Confined Spaces, confirm that confined space hazards and permit procedure training has been provided by the contract employer. This is to include safety rules and emergency procedures, which the contractor needs to be aware of to comply with regulations regarding “Permit-Required Confined Spaces.” G. At the conclusion of a Permit-Required Confined Space entry, debrief the contractor of the entry regarding any hazards or problems encountered or created during the Permit-Required Confined Space entry.

10.13 Attachments A. Permit-Required Confined Space Decision Chart B. Confined Space Entry Permit C. Entry/Exit Log for Confined Spaces

10.12.1

Permit-Required Confined Space Decision Chart Consult other applicable standards. STOP.

Are confined spaces present?

NO

YES

Are they “permit-required” spaces as defined by paragraph 10.2 C

YES

NO

Post warning signs at entrances to those spaces. Go to next step.

YES Will someone enter the confined spaces?

Keep people out of confined spaces. Do work from outside space.

NO

YES

Willemployees. your contractors enter confined spaces? that your workplace contains permit-required confined spaces and that an entry permit is requi Task will be done by contractor’s You need to the inform the contractor

YES

NO

Will your employees enter the confined spaces?

YES

NO

Prevent unauthorized entry. STOP. Will both your employees an

YES

Coordinate entry operations. There must be procedures in place when more than one employer has authorized employees working at the sam

Does the space have any known or potential hazards?

NO

YES Can the hazards be eliminated?

NO

Reclassify this space to a NON-PERMIT REQUIRED confined space. Test prior to entry to ensure no hazards exist. Monitor conditions to ensure hazards do not arise after entry. STOP. Space may have to be evacuated and re-evaluated if hazards arise during entry.

YES

Can the space be maintained in a condition safe to enter by continuous forced air ventilation only?

The area is NOT a permit-required confined space. Applicable confined space standards may not apply.

YES

NO

Space may be entered if: it is safe to remove the entrance cover; the opening is guarded to prevent accidental entry by people or objects; the atmosphere is tested and maintained free of hazard; continuous forced air ventilation from a clean, non-hazardous source is used in areas where employees work as long as they are present; periodic monitoring is done to ensure that hazards do not arise. If hazards arise, the space must be evacuated immediately and the space re-evaluated. STOP.

Prepare for entry via permit procedures. Go to next step.

Verify acceptable entry conditions. Are test results recorded, space isolated if needed, rescuers (or means to summon) available, entrants properly equipped?

NO

Permit not valid until conditions meet permit specifications.

YES Issue permit by authorizing signature. Are acceptable conditions maintained through entry?

YES Complete entry tasks. Return permit and cancel. Periodically audit and evaluate permit program.

NO

Emergency exits (prohibited condition). Evacuate entrants. Abort entry. Call rescuers if needed. Permit is void. Re-evaluate program to correct or prevent prohibited condition. Occurrence of emergency may indicate a deficient program. Do not allow re-entry until program (and permit) is amended. (May require new program.) CONTINUE.

10.12.2

Confined Space Entry Permit (Permit is valid for one shift only)

RIG NUMBER /FACILITY WORK DESCRIPTION

LOCATION

EQUIPMENT

YES

N/A

NO

All energy sources have been disconnected, blinded/locked out (electrical, hydraulic, gas, air steam, stored energy) All piping/connections have been disconnected, blinded or otherwise effectively isolated Time/date of atmospheric checks conducted: Time/date of atmospheric checks conducted after mechanical ventilation: Oxygen (<10%)

% (> 19.5% < 23.5%) Combustibles/Gas

H2S

//

% LEL

PPM equal to or more than 10 PPM measured as a time-weighted average

As a result of inspection and testing, it has been determined that this is a ( ) Non-Permit Required Confined Space or a ( ) Permit-Required Confined Space. Entry Supervisor

Print name

Date/Time

COMPLETE INFORMATION BELOW THIS LINE FOR PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE

PERMIT-REQUIRED CONFINED SPACE 1.

Is mechanical ventilation equipment needed during entry? Are entrance, attendants, and rescue personnel properly trained & currently certified? Are safety harness, lifelines, and hoisting equipment available for standby person? Is communication equipment available for use by entrants and attendant? Type:

YES ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

NO ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

N/A ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( )

Is necessary protective equipment provided for entrants?

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

Type: Is approved respiratory protective equipment provided for entrants and standby persons? Is the confined space properly identified with barriers/signs/etc.? Is all electrical equipment to be used listed Class I, Division I, Group D? Is all lighting adequate for work and evacuation? Non-sparking tools available for entrants? Are applicable MSDS sheets available for entrants? Are additional permits required (HOT WORK)? Has a pre-entry briefing been conducted on specific hazards (contractors included)?

2.

Rescue Phone Number

3.

Rescue procedure for this entry:

4.

Record of periodic atmospheric test: TIME Oxygen > 19.5 < 23.5 Combustibles/Gas < 10% LEL H2S < 10 PPM

) ( ( ( ( ( ( (

( ) ) ) ) ) ) )

) ( ( ( ( ( ( (

(

)

) ) ) ) ) ) )

( ( ( ( ( ( (

)

(

) ) ) ) ) ) )

Rescue Service Name

( (

) periodic )

(

(

) none )

(

)

(

)

Person Performing Test(s) 5.

(

COMMENTS

(

)

(

)

(

)

Instrument Name

(

)

(

)

(

Model Number and Serial Number

Special Instructions 6.

We have reviewed the work authorized by this permit and the information contained herein. Written instructions and safety procedures have been reviewed and understood. This permit is not valid unless all appropriate items are completed. Permit & Checklist Prepared by Person Responsible for Equipment Designated Safety Attendant Approval/Entry Supervisor

Permit Effective (Date/Time):

Permit Expires (Date/Time):

Permit Closure (Date/Time):

NOTE: Authorized Attendant(s) and Authorized Entrant(s), after reviewing the information on this permit, must sign their names.

)

ANY PROBLEMS ENCOUNTERED DURING THE ENTRY OPERATION SHALL BE NOTED ON THE BACK OF THIS FORM. Distribution:

Original, Post at Confined Space Entry

Copy, Entry Supervisor

File Copy

10.12.3

Entry/Exit Log For Confined Spaces

LOCATION

EQUIPMENT

DATE

(Indicate time)

Confined Space Attendant NAME

Time ON DUTY

Time OFF DUTY

Time ON DUTY

Time OFF DUTY

Time ON DUTY

Time OFF DUTY

Confined Space Entrant NAME

Time IN

Time OUT

Time IN

Time OUT

Time IN

Time OUT

1. 2. 3. 4.


SECTION ELEVEN – COLD WEATHER SAFETY 11.1

General A. With proper protective gear, a person in good physical condition can work productively in cold weather conditions. B. Cold weather conditions require greater amounts of time for the performance of jobs, and such time should be taken into consideration when planning jobs.

11.2

Effects of Cold Weather on Personnel A. Hypothermia – The principal adverse effect of cold on humans is a lowering of the body temperature below the normal temperature of 98.6 degrees F, at a rate faster than the body can recover from. This condition is called hypothermia. When body temperature falls below 94 degrees, the victim may become disoriented and lapse into a coma. Heart failure and death can result if body temperature falls below 88-90 degrees. An important point to know is that hypothermia can develop in some people, under certain conditions, at relatively mild temperatures (well above freezing). Personnel should know the symptoms of hypothermia and look for them in their companions whenever working for extended periods in a cold, wet environment. Hypothermia can be fatal and requires immediate medical attention. 1. The early warning signs are:



   

excessive shivering blue lips and fingers slurred speech poor coordination

impaired thinking

2. Do the following as you wait for medical help to arrive:   



Give the victim dry clothes if theirs are wet. Give a conscious victim warm liquids (no alcohol) in small quantities. If you see an individual with any signs of hypothermia immediately assist them to a warm shelter. Do not delay. Prompt re-warming at the early warning signs can prevent serious problems. A mildly hypothermic victim will re-warm and return to normal health. 3. Do not:



Give the victim alcohol. Alcohol can cause a serious drop in body heat.  Submerse a victim in hot water. This may cause "Re-warming Shock" which could be fatal.  Allow a hypothermia victim to physically exert them self. This can cause heart failure and death. B. Frostbite – Frostbite is a cold weather injury caused by freezing of the body tissues and can occur when extremities do not receive sufficient heat from the central body due to restricted blood circulation or inadequate insulation (clothing). If you suspect frostbite:

1. Move to a warm place and re-warm affected areas.



2. Do not rub or massage affected area. 3. Remove tight clothing and jewelry. 4. Use yours or another persons body warmth to warm affected areas. 5. Obtain medical help as soon as possible. C. Trench foot and immersion foot – Trench foot is a thermal injury resulting from exposure to water that is just short of freezing. Immersion foot is caused by prolonged immersion of the extremity in water. The hands are also subject to these types of injuries. 1. The symptoms of the various stages of trench foot are:    

Minimal reddening of the skin, slight numbness Mild swelling, numbness Moderate swelling, redness, bleeding into the skin, nerve damage Severe swelling, bleeding into the skin, gangrene

2. Prevention  

Avoid wet feet for prolonged periods. Keep a spare pair of dry socks available. Change socks when feet become wet.  Remove boots and socks as soon as possible after work. Dry feet and massage well to promote circulation. D. Wind Chill Factors – Cold temperatures are intensified by the presence of wind. Workers should be aware of this effect so that they are prepared to perform in the actual cold conditions, rather than in the calm air temperatures indicated on a thermometer.

Ambient Temperature (°F) 40

30

Velocity mph

20

10

0

-10

-20

-30

-40

Equivalent Chill Temperature (°F)

0

40

30

20

10

0

-10

-20

-30

-40

5

37

27

16

6

-5

-15

-26

-36

-47

10

28

16

4

-9

-24

-33

-46

-58

-70

15

22

9

-5

-18

-32

-45

-58

-72

-85

20

18

4

-10

-25

-39

-53

-67

-82

-96

25

16

0

-15

-29

-44

-59

-74

-88

-104

30

13

-2

-18

-33

-48

-63

-79

-94

-109

35

11

-4

-20

-35

-51

-67

-82

-98

-113

40

10

-6

-21

-37

-53

-69

-85

-100

-116

Little danger if less than one hour exposure with dry skin

Danger exposed flesh may freeze within one minute

Great danger exposed flesh may freeze within 30 seconds

Trench foot and immersion foot may occur at any point on this chart Note: Wind speeds greater than 40 mph have little additional effect.



Ambient Temperature (°C) 4

-1

Velocity kph

-7

-12

-18

-23

-29

-34

-40

Equivalent Chill Temperature (°C)

0

4

-1

-7

-12

-18

-23

-29

-34

-40

8

3

-3

-9

-14

-21

-26

-32

-38

-44

18

-2

-9

-16

-23

-31

-36

-43

-50

-57

24

-6

-13

-21

-28

-33

-43

-50

-58

-65

32

-8

-16

-23

-32

-39

-47

-55

-63

-71

40

-9

-18

-26

-34

-42

-51

-59

-67

-76

48

-11

-19

-28

-36

-44

-53

-62

-70

-78

56

-12

-20

-29

-37

-46

-55

-63

-72

-81

64

-12

-21

-29

-38

-47

-56

-65

-73

-82

Little danger if less than one hour exposure with dry skin

Danger exposed flesh may freeze within one minute

Great danger exposed flesh may freeze within 30 seconds

Trench foot and immersion foot may occur at any point on this chart Note: Wind speeds greater than 64 kph have little additional effect. E. Wear items designed for cold weather service. Take maximum advantage of the protection this clothing affords. Dress as lightly as possible, considering the weather and the work you are going to be performing. The following guidelines should be considered when dressing for cold weather: 1. Keep clothing as clean as possible. Dirty or oily clothing loses much of its insulating value. 2. Wear clothing in layers. 3. Keep clothing as dry as possible. 4. Avoid wearing loose gloves, scarves or other loose clothing that could get caught in moving equipment and machinery. F. It is better to be a little cold than to be too warm. Overheating can cause sweating and dehydration. Due to sweating, clothes become wet, thus making you colder when you stop your activity. Prevent overheating by adjusting the neck, sleeves and ankles to allow fresh air circulation as needed while working.

G. During severe wind chill conditions, face protection should be worn. However, be sure to periodically check for frostbite of the nose, ears and cheekbones. H. To reduce the chance of frostbite or trench foot due to sweaty, wet socks, they should be changed several times during your tour. I.

Eat well-balanced meals.

J.

Liquid intake is essential to offset water losses caused by extra exertion and to avoid dehydration, which is prevalent in cold conditions. Warm liquids are preferable since they do not have to be warmed by the body after consumption.

K. Since the body loses three-quarters of its heat through the head, it is especially important to wear a proper head covering. L. The intense light reflection from snow, ice and water can cause snowblindness. Proper eye protection should be worn. M. When working on snow and ice take small steps to improve traction. Walk slowly on slippery, icy surfaces. Stop occasionally to break momentum. Be extra careful on ladders, maintenance stands, and stairways. Beware of icicles and avoid walking beneath them.

11.3

Cold Water Survival Cold water acts as a conductor, transferring heat from the human body twenty-five times faster than air. Obviously, this greatly accelerates the onset of hypothermia, which can very quickly lead to death. If conditions exist for personnel to enter into cold water, there are survival procedures, which can increase the chance for survival: A. Put on as much warm clothing as possible, covering head, neck, hands and feet. Make sure that the neck, wrist and ankles are snug fitting. This will reduce the exchange of water within your clothing. Wool is most preferable, as it retains its insulating quality even when wet. B. If a survival suit is available, put it on over other warm clothing. It must be fully zipped and sealed to work properly. If the survival suit is not the self-floating type, put on a lifejacket. C. Avoid jumping into cold water. Try to minimize the shock of sudden cold water immersion by lowering yourself in gradually. D. Once in the water, swim toward the life raft or other floating object immediately. Delay in the water may result in loss of the use of hands and legs before you reach a life raft. E. If there is no life raft or other people to swim to, remain still in the water. Unnecessary swimming will increase transfer of heat to the water from your body and pump out any warm water trapped within your clothing. Studies show that the average person swimming slowly in a lifejacket cools 35 percent faster than when remaining still. Unnecessary movement will send warm blood from the body core to the extremities, resulting in an increased lowering of body core temperature, hastening the onset of hypothermia. F. If you do not have a lifejacket or other flotation, tread water. Although you will lose heat 35 percent faster than remaining still in a lifejacket as mentioned above, it is preferable to drownproofing. Drownproofing involves floating on or just below the surface, raising the head about every 10-15 seconds to breathe. Drownproofing causes the body to cool 82 percent faster than remaining still, wearing a lifejacket.

G. While in the water with a lifejacket, you can reduce your heat loss further by: 1. Keeping your head out of the water at all times; 2. Keeping the inner sides of your arms held tightly against the sides of your chest; and 3. Keeping your legs together, with your thighs raised to your chest to protect the groin region (another high heat-loss area). This body position minimizes heat transfer from the body core to the water. H. If there are several people in the water, they should huddle closely, facing each other, making as much body contact as possible. I.

11.4

Try to board any floating objects available to minimize immersion in the water. If on an open raft or floating debris, try to shield yourself from the wind in any way possible.

Immersion Suit A. Tests have shown that individuals can survive in cold water for many hours in a properly worn and designed immersion suit. B. Companies should comply with statutory regulations based on geographic location for training and use of immersion suits.

11.5

Cold Weather Travel A. Safe driving techniques and regular vehicle maintenance should be practiced to avoid becoming stranded or disabled. The following is a list of items, which should be carried in the vehicle. 1. Properly inflated spare tire 2. Tire chains 3. Shovel 4. Container of sand 5. Flashlight with good batteries 6. Flares 7. Tow rope 8. Warm clothing and blankets 9. Small stove or survival candles and waterproof matches 10. Booster cables 11. Windshield scraper 12. Fire extinguisher

13. First aid kit 14. Motor oil 15. High-energy foods (chocolate, dried soups, dried fruits, etc.) 16. Do not carry engine-starting fluids in the passenger compartment of the vehicle. Accidental discharge of ether can cause drowsiness. B. Should your vehicle become immobilized, remember that it is always best to stay with the vehicle. While waiting for assistance, observe the following guidelines: 1. Conserve heat. Avoid over-exerting yourself. 2. Do not waste gas by running the engine and heater continuously. Because of the danger of carbon monoxide poisoning, open the down-wind window periodically for ventilation. Periodically clear away snow from the exhaust pipe. 3. Set vehicle directional lights to flashing, and hang a cloth from your radio aerial or vehicle window. 4. Use emergency food sparingly. 5. Do not eat snow. Eating snow hastens body cooling and increases the chance of hypothermia. Melt the snow and drink the warm water. C. During winter driving check traction regularly. Slow down and stop if traction is poor. Be prepared to stop. Allow a safe distance between you and other cars or obstacles. Keep your windshield and mirrors clean. Wear sunglasses if needed. Watch out for pedestrians. They are often bundled up in clothing and cannot hear or see your vehicle. Use signals well in advance of making turns or stops. Give your vehicle a walk around inspection before driving. Keep cold weather cloths and drinking water with you at all times when driving in extremely cold or stormy weather. Top off the fuel tank frequently keeping it over half full. Consider taking food, snowshoes, matches, and other emergency items if you are driving in remote locations. D. All the general survival rules apply in the event that you are in a downed aircraft. In addition, prepare signals for air search. Tires, green branches, and fuel or oil soaked rags provide good smoke signals. Fuel can also be burned for heat. Use signal fires, but do not waste them, particularly when a search plane is flying away from you. Your aircraft mirror can also be used to flash a signal. Above all, never give up hope and never stop trying to survive.

11.6

Safe Use of Steam A. Ice plugs in drill pipe and steam lines can occur. They can come loose at any time, with high velocity, so workers should not lean over drill pipe being run in the hole after a trip or look into a steam line that has been frozen. Razorbacks should be used on the racking floor so that the drill pipe can drain while it is set back. B. Use of steam around the drill floor can reduce visibility. The workers should take care so they do not injure themselves or others by leaving mousehole or rathole covers open, or walk into a turning rotary table.

C. Steam hoses lying in ditches and around mud tanks can create hazards such as sinkholes.

D. Steam hoses should not be used to clean footwear or clothing or to warm feet, as scalds can be the result. E. Open steam valves slowly and carefully to prevent the hose from jerking, snapping or escaping your grasp. F. Do not use hot water or steam water to mix caustic soda.

11.7

General Cold Weather Safety A. Have all heating appliances - furnaces, water heaters and wood stoves - checked and serviced yearly by a reliable professional. B. Make sure no flammable materials have been placed near any heating appliance.

C. Use space heaters with care and inspect electric heaters for damaged cords. D. Make sure there is a working smoke detector in accommodation units (Toolpusher’s House). Check the batteries every six months and replace them yearly. E. Consider installing carbon monoxide detectors on every accommodation unit, near sleeping areas where the audible alarm can be heard. F. Recognize the symptoms of carbon monoxide poisoning and exit the accommodation unit immediately if you suspect the presence of carbon monoxide. G. Give space heaters space. Keep all combustible materials away from portable and space heaters. Place all space heaters at least three feet from furniture, walls, curtains or anything else that could catch fire. Turn off space heaters when you leave home or go to bed. H. If the space heater burns liquid fuel such as kerosene, let the heater cool down before refueling it. Adding fuel to a hot heater can cause fumes to ignite. Always refuel the heater outdoors in an area away from structures where a spill won't present a fire hazard. Use only the type of fuel recommended by the manufacturer. Never use a substitute or a lower-grade fuel. Never put gasoline in any space heater. Use a fuel container for the space heater fuel that allows for safe storage of the fuel, and store the fuel in a garage or shed, not in the living area. I.

Natural Gas-Fueled Heaters: Check vents periodically to make sure they aren't blocked. Never install un-vented heaters in bathrooms or sleeping areas. Carbon monoxide can build up to dangerous levels in small, enclosed spaces.

J.

Electric Heaters: Inspect electric heater cords for cracks or other damage and have an electrician replace frayed or damaged cords. If cords overheat while the heater is on, have it inspected and serviced. Utilize electric heaters with a tip-over safety switch that turns the heater off if it is accidentally tipped over.

K. Central Heating Systems: Statistically, central heating systems are less likely than portable or space heaters to cause accommodation fires, but neglect can increase the risk to your safety. Never store combustible materials near a furnace and be sure that installation and automatic shut-off systems conform to local fire safety codes and are in good working order. Have your furnace inspected and serviced yearly by a qualified professional. This checkup can prevent the possibility of carbon monoxide poisoning.

SECTION TWELVE – OFFSHORE SAFETY 12.1

Rough Weather Procedures A. Rig personnel should be familiar with the rough weather limitations of the MODU, MIDU or Platform. B. A contingency plan should be developed and implemented. The following may be considered when developing the contingency plan:

1. Sufficient time margins should be allowed to secure the installation and the well. 2. A list of essential and non-essential personnel and modes for evacuation should be established. 3. Emergency radio frequencies and/or telephone numbers should be listed. 4. The helicopter(s) or crew/supply/standby boat should be alerted. 5. All personnel should be familiar with the contingency plan. 6. An adequate amount of equipment and supplies should be available. C. The following is an example of a storm procedure that has been divided into three phases. A brief outline of some activities which might be included in each phase are listed below: 1. Phase I – Warning that a storm will probably hit the area a. Alert the person in charge of every operating unit, both company and contract. b. Send all but essential floating equipment to safe harbor. c.

Check on critical supplies, particularly mud, to assure that a sufficient supply is on hand.

d. Store or tie down all equipment that may be washed away. e. Lay down all extra pipe which might be standing in the derrick. f.

Check fuel, batteries and operation of emergency generators.

g. Check navigation lights and foghorn for proper operation. h. Continue present operations such as drilling, completing, etc., but keep in mind that work may have to stop on short notice and plan accordingly. 2. Phase II – Notice to shut down with all convenient speed. a. Alert the person in charge of every operating unit, both company and contract. b. Send all remaining floating equipment not necessary for evacuation to safe harbor. c.

Have boats, helicopters, etc., ready to evacuate personnel.



d. Prepare well and derrick for temporary abandonment. e. Where applicable, ballast the rig to storm draft. f.

Secure the vessel and all remaining equipment.

g. Consider evacuating all non-essential personnel. 3. Phase III – Evacuation a. Turn on navigation lights and foghorns if either have been inactivated. b. Start emergency generators, if such are provided. c.

Notify base radio operator of the time each unit will be evacuated.

d. Evacuate personnel. e. Notify base radio operator of safe arrival so that he can account for all vessels, aircraft and personnel. f.

12.2

Secure all vessels and aircraft as safely as practicable.

Offshore Communications A. All MODUs, MIDUs and Platform rigs should have radio communications with the shore base and with standby vessels, supply vessels and aircraft. B. Under normal circumstances, only designated personnel should operate communication equipment. C. If rough weather conditions exist, or are imminent, a continuous radio watch should be maintained.

D. All rigs should comply with local governmental regulations concerning radio transmissions. E. All radio transmission equipment, cell phones, and other wireless communications systems such as GPS, wireless computer connections should be turned off and warning signs posted during shooting and perforating operations. Prior notification to other stations (land base) should be issued when going off the air. In addition, an announcement should be made to all boats in the area that the rig will be on radio silence until further notice. A request should be made to nearby vessels to observe radio silence. Lockout/tagout procedure should be followed to the letter on this. Any personnel arriving at the rig with cell phones should be required to notify the Supervisor and Company representative that they have a phone of this type. Companies should have a policy that controls all cell phones that are on location during these operations. F. Monitor local hailing as well as GMDSS frequencies. G. Anytime the rig receives a mayday signal, routine communications should cease, and personnel attending the radio should acknowledge the signal and standby for further communications or rendering of assistance. H. The radio antennas should be installed at a location that will minimize the risk of physical contact with the antenna.

I.

Only authorized personnel should be permitted to service or repair radio communications equipment.

J.

A list of emergency frequencies and stations should be maintained with the radio equipment.

K. The lifeboat and other emergency radio transmitters including EPIRBS should be tested and checked periodically. L. The Public Address (PA) System should be clearly heard throughout the rig/unit by personnel.

12.3

Life Saving Equipment All life saving equipment should be kept in a state of readiness. It should be checked, maintained and documentation retained in accordance with the company’s policies/procedures developed in consideration of the manufacturers’ recommendations and regulatory requirements. Individuals should receive thorough site-specific orientation that would include locations of all the life saving equipment on the rig. All personnel should participate in drills to practice the use of life saving equipment.

A. Personal Flotation Devices (PFDs) 1. PFDs should be readily accessible in adequate quantity. 2. Extra PFDs should be stored in properly identified containers near the lifeboat or escape capsule muster station (near the safe refuge as applicable). 3. PFDs should be properly maintained and checked periodically. 4. PFDs should be used only for their intended purpose. B. Life Rings (Buoys) 1. Each offshore rig should have adequate life rings with their required accessories placed in accessible locations. 2. Life rings are designed to be thrown to the person in the water and to be grasped and held, not worn by the user. 3. If a person falls overboard, a life ring should be thrown near the person, even if the person in the water cannot reach the buoy, so as to mark his approximate position and assist in the rescue operation. C. Immersion Suits (If applicable) 1. Immersion suits should be readily accessible in adequate quantity. 2. Extra immersion suits should be stored in special containers near the escape capsule and marked specifically “Immersion Suits.” 3. Immersion suits should be checked and maintained periodically. D. Lifeboat/Survival Capsule 1. Lifeboats and survival capsules should be kept in a state of readiness in order to evacuate personnel safely. They should be maintained in accordance with company © Copyright 2004 IADC All rights reserved


policies/procedures developed in consideration of manufacturer’s recommendations and regulatory requirements and have a periodic inspection. 2. All personnel should be fully trained in boarding. All personnel should also receive general information on launching and operation of the lifeboats and survival capsules. 3. Extreme care should be taken that the releasing mechanism is not prematurely operated. It is of paramount importance that the operating procedures for the releasing gear of the rig’s lifeboats and/or survival capsule(s) are fully understood by all personnel. 4. Manufacturer’s recommendation should be followed for towing. The lifeboat crew should receive training in the proper procedures. E. Life Rafts 1. Launching instructions should be displayed near the life raft station. All personnel should be familiar with the locations and launching procedures of all the life rafts. 2. Supplies or equipment should not block access to the life rafts. 3. Periodic inspection should be performed on all life rafts.

12.4

Helicopter Safety Procedures A. The pilot is in total command of the helicopter and will make the decisions concerning the flight. B. Passengers should report to the check in station early, as personnel and their baggage are subject to weighing and other security measures. C. Passengers should receive a preflight orientation and be instructed on the proper procedures for the specific helicopter before boarding. D. Personnel should familiarize themselves with exit routes for each particular type of helicopter as well as emergency escape procedures. E. Transportation of any potential hazardous material on the helicopter should be reported to the dispatcher or pilot.

F. Baggage should be stored according to the pilot’s instructions. G. Passengers should hold all lightweight articles, such as raincoats and hats, firmly to prevent them from being sucked into rotor blades. H. Personnel should not remain in the vicinity of the helideck area during landings and takeoffs. I.

All personnel should remain in the designated area until the pilot or Helicopter Landing Officer (HLO) signals it is safe to board.

J.

All personnel should stay clear of the tail rotor.

K. Smoking should not be permitted in or around the aircraft at any time. L. Prior to take off, each person should identify the location of the closest emergency exits, inflatable life rafts and other emergency equipment.

M. The seat belt should be fastened at all times during flight. The seat belt should not be unfastened until instructed by the pilot. N. Do not throw any material from the aircraft while in flight. O. Long items to be carried aboard helicopters should be carried horizontal onto the helideck, keeping clear of the rotor blades. P. Inflatable life jackets (immersion suites where required) should be worn during all over-water flights. Q. Any problems regarding safety equipment or safety precautions should be reported to the pilot. R. Designated rig personnel should signal or communicate with an approaching helicopter if a hazardous condition such as severe gas fumes or crane boom obstruction of the helideck exist. S. In an emergency situation, passengers should remain in their seats with seat belts fastened. Never attempt to jump out of the helicopter or inflate the PFD inside the cabin. Follow the pilot’s instructions. T. Cranes that are near the helideck should not be in operation when a helicopter is landing or taking off. While the helicopter circles, the crane should be shut down and the crane operator should step outside the cab where the pilot can see him. U. Hearing protection should be worn at all times while in a helicopter. The noise level can be greater than 100 decibels in most models. V. There is to be no horseplay while in a helicopter. Windows on some models are emergency exits and require very little pressure to push them out. W. Approach a helicopter in a crouched position from the side or as directed by the HLO. Sometimes main rotor blades can dip below 6 feet directly in front of the helicopter, especially in high winds. X. The pilot can and will refuse boarding privileges to anyone suspected of being under the influence of alcohol or drugs. This person should then be referred to the Company Officials for further actions.

12.5

Crewboat Safety Procedures

A. The boat captain is in total command of the boat. B. Prior to boarding the crew boat, personnel should be informed of the type of transfer procedures used to gain access to the MODU, MIDU or platform. It should be ascertained whether any persons are feeling ill, suffer from vertigo, or have any anxiety regarding transfer procedures. C. Passengers should remain in the designated passenger area until the captain has given the clearance to exit. D. A personnel carrier should be used to transfer personnel between the rig and boat. All personnel should wear approved PFDs or work vests (and immersion suite where required) securely donned during the transfer.

E. The person in charge should ascertain whether or not there are any first time riders. The number of personnel transferred per trip in a personnel carrier should not exceed the manufacturer’s recommendations. First time riders should receive proper instructions on how to safely ride the personnel carrier. F. Personnel should stay clear of tie up lines. G. The boat captain can and will refuse boarding privileges to anyone suspected of being under the influence of alcohol or drugs. This person should then be referred to the Company Officials for further actions. H. Baggage should be stored according to the captain’s instructions. I.

Personnel should not stand under a suspended load while on the deck of the boat. J.

12.6

The deck of the vessel should have a sufficient clear area to land the personnel transfer device.

Personnel Transfer with Swing Rope A. Personnel who may require transfer by a Swing Rope should receive training in the procedure. B. The person in charge of the platform along with the boat captain should determine if weather conditions are safe for Swing Rope Transfer. C. All personnel should wear securely donned PFDs or work vests at all times while using a swing rope.

D. Ropes and attachments should be clean, inspected and tested periodically. E. A deckhand should be available to assist personnel in boarding or leaving the boat. F. Manned platforms should have a person on the landing site to assist personnel as they swing from the boat. This person should be secured to the structure with adequate fall protection and wear a life preserver. G. Transfer by rope should be at the peak of the vessel’s rise. Both hands should be used. H. Hand articles and luggage should be transferred separately. I.

Swing Rope that provides more positive gripping than a regular rope should be used.

J.

Ill or injured personnel should not be transferred by swing rope unless it is determined that it is safe to do so.

K. Before personnel are transferred by swing rope, it should be determined that they have adequate upper body strength.

12.7

Personnel Transfer with Personnel Carriers A. Personnel Carriers are devices that are designed to transfer personnel to and from an offshore platform or MODU and a boat by use of a crane.

B. A Job Safety Analysis (JSA) should be created for personnel transfer via a personnel carrier. All personnel who may be required to make a transfer via a personnel carrier should review this JSA. C. Personnel who may be transferred by personnel carrier should receive personnel carrier procedure training. This training should be as per the personnel carrier manufacturer’s instructions, but at a minimum should include competency based orientation and JSA on the safe use of personnel carrier devices including: 1. Safe loading & unloading procedures; 2. Crane actions, movements, and signals; 3. Body positions, pinch points, and personal stability; 4. Personnel baggage loading procedures; 5. Personnel protective equipment requirements. D. The person in charge of the personnel transfer should ascertain whether any persons are feeling ill, suffering from seasickness / vertigo, or have any anxiety regarding the transfer. When using a net type personnel carrier, these individuals should be instructed to ride in the center of the personnel carrier. E. Personnel Carriers should be attached to the crane hook assembly as per the manufacturer’s instructions. In addition, the carrier should have the following: 1. A shock absorbing safety sling or lanyard designed to provide emergency fall containment should be attached between the personnel carrier and the crane hoisting line. These lines should be sized as per the manufacturer’s specifications. 2. A snag resistant tag line should be attached to either the center deck lashing point or the outside bottom platform ring in such a manner that the potential for tag line damage is minimized when the carrier is resting on a surface. The tag line should be attached with a minimum 5/8” (190 mm) bolt type anchor shackle. Personnel transfer device tag lines should be identified by a high visibility color or reflective external coating. 3. An anti-spin device should be affixed between the load line and the upper master link. The anti-spin device should be of a sufficient capacity to support the personnel carrier application. F. A pre-use inspection of the Personnel Carrier and rigging should be done prior to each use by a qualified person in accordance with company policies/procedures developed in consideration of manufacturer’s inspection procedures and API – RP 2D. The inspection procedures should include but are not limited to the following: 1. Visually inspect safety load line, swages and associated hardware when attaching to crane hook. 2. Inspect crane hook positive locking device for proper function and physical condition. 3. Inspect emergency fall containment line and attachment shackle. 4. Ensure snag resistant tag line is properly attached.

5. Ensure that no non-original equipment manufacturer’s modifications have been made to the personnel carrier. 6. Ensure that there is a clear area on the boat deck and/or rig deck to safely land the personnel carrier. G. Periodic inspections of Personnel Carriers should also be conducted following company policies/procedures developed in consideration of manufacturer’s inspection procedures and applicable regulations. H. Each facility that may be required to transfer personnel by personnel carriers should have established Personnel Carrier Transfer Procedures. These should include but are not limited to the following: 1. A pre-use inspection should be conducted prior to any personnel carrier transfer. 2. When not in use, the personnel carrier should be stored where it will not be damaged. 3. Crane hooks used for personnel transfers must have a positive locking latch. 4. Cranes assigned to personnel lifting duties should be suitable for this purpose per API – SPEC 2C. 5. Only qualified crane operators as per API RP 2D or local regulations should be assigned to personnel lifting duties. 6. Only Personnel Carriers specifically designed for personnel transfer should be used. 7. Personnel carriers should not be used as a workbasket. 8. A snag resistant tag line should be affixed to all personnel carriers. 9. Personnel carriers should be legibly marked with the maximum number of passengers and the maximum safe workload (SWL). 10. Only a limited amount of light personal luggage should be permitted inside the carrier when personnel are being transferred. Should there be any doubt about what is “light”, a cargo basket should be used to transfer the material. 11. Personnel carriers should not be used for material transfer. 12. Personnel carriers should not be utilized in weather, wind, or sea conditions that the person in charge or crane operator considers unsafe. 13. Before any attempt is made to lift personnel with a carrier, clear instructions should be given to all persons involved. 14. As part of an individual’s interview process companies should ascertain if the individual has concern about riding a personnel transfer carrier. 15. All personnel riding on a personnel carrier must wear an approved life vest or life preserver. When transfers are conducted at night, the PFD/life vest light should be operating during the transfer. 16. When transferring personnel by a net type personnel carrier:

a. Individuals should be instructed to stand on the outer rim, evenly spaced, and adjacent to a sidewall opening in the netting, facing inward. b. Passenger forearms should be interlocked on inside of sidewall netting. c.

In preparation for lifting off the deck, personnel should have one foot firmly placed on the basket rim and the other foot on the deck of the boat (facility) for stability.

d. As the crane operator begins to hoist the net type personnel carrier, passengers step off the deck and place both feet firmly on the outer rim. e. As the net type personnel carrier nears the deck, personnel should bend their knees slightly and be prepared to step off. 17. A designated signalman (banksman) should be assigned to the personnel transfer operation and provide clear instructions to the Crane Operator. The Crane Operator should have a clear line of sight to the personnel carrier at all times during the transfer. If obstructions block the Crane Operator’s view, it may be necessary to re-arrange cargo or reposition the boat so that the Crane Operator’s view is not obstructed. If this is not possible, a risk assessment should be conducted before proceeding with the operation. 18. A designated primary landing zone should be marked in a safe area as determined by the qualified person. Personnel carriers should not be landed on the boat or facility deck unless there is a clear area for the personnel carrier to be landed. Personnel carriers should not be landed on top of cargo. 19. Transferring personnel to or from a boat: a. The personnel carrier should be lifted only high enough to clear obstructions. b. The personnel carrier should be swung over the water and then lowered or raised (Do not lower or raise a personnel carrier directly over a boat.) c.

When the personnel carrier is at a safe height where it will clear obstructions on the boat or facility deck, it should be swung over the boat (facility) and gently lowered to the deck.

d. Personnel on the deck of the boat or facility should secure the tag line and steady the personnel carrier as it is landed on the deck. e. Once landed, the crane operator should play out sufficient line to prevent the personnel carrier from being moved across the deck or hoisted as the boat moves with the waves. 20. The crane operator may refuse to lift any person who does not comply with the operator’s instructions. 21. Injured, ill, or persons who lack confidence in their ability, may ride inside the basket type personnel carrier. A person experienced in personnel transfer procedures should escort the person.

12.8

Medical Evacuations A. Each rig should have a medical evacuation plan for each work location prior to start up. This plan should include contact with a designated hospital or doctor, method of transportation and a list of personnel to be notified in the event of a medical emergency or evacuation.

B. The person or persons in charge at the location should coordinate all medical evacuations by following the guidelines set out by the medical evacuation plan. C. After every rig move, new location coordinates should be determined and posted as necessary and provided to the medical evacuation provider. D. The coordinates of all hospitals should be available. The coordinates should be part of the emergency response plan and all rigs and on-call personnel should have them. E. Heliports with IFR capabilities should also be a part of the emergency plan.

12.9

Working Over Water A. A work permit should be completed and a JSA reviewed for the task. A JSA should be created if not available. B. A work vest should be worn when working on boats or when working over water. C. When personnel are working over or near the water, the standby boat (if available) should be notified. D. Personnel working over water should be kept under surveillance at all times by a designated person on deck. E. Work vests should be readily accessible in adequate quantity and stored in properly marked containers.

F. Work vests and PFDs should be used only for their intended purposes. (Refer to Section 12.2 Life Saving Equipment for use, storage, inspection and maintenance guidelines.) G. A ring buoy with a rope should be in close proximity to the over-water operation. H. When working over water and outside of handrails or other fall protection systems, the individual should wear a work vest and a full body harness with lanyard or retracting lifeline secured to a structural member of the rig. I.

When working over water in a work basket being supported by a crane, the following should be in place:

1. The crane operator should remain in the crane cab at the controls at all times. 2. Should the Crane Operator need to leave the crane operations or there is a change in crane operators, the operations should cease and the workbasket landed on the deck. If there is a change in crane operators, the workbasket should remain on the deck until the relief crane operator is apprised of the on-going operation, a pre-job safety meeting held, and the new Crane Operator indicates that he understands the instructions. Once the relief crane operator is in position at the controls and all is clear, the workbasket may be hoisted. 3. There should be a direct line of communication between the crane operator and the workbasket. 4. A signalman (banksman) should be assigned whose sole responsibility is to watch the worker in the workbasket and communicate with the crane operator in case of an emergency. Communications must be continuous (i.e. hand signal motion or radio

communication should be “up/up/up” or “down/down/down”) during movement of the workbasket. If communications are interrupted, movement of the workbasket should cease. Direct line of sight of the signalman (banksman) utilizing hand signals should take precedence over radio communication.

12.10 Cargo Handling Guidelines for Offshore A. Cargo Manifesting and Identification. These cargo-handling guidelines are designed to maintain the condition of items and materials during their movement, while being conducted in a safe manner and complying with regulations. Correct manifesting ensures that the handling and shipping of materials are in compliance with regulations for public safety and environmental conservation. It is recommended that offshore shipping manifests should: 1. Identify the rig or facility from which the material is being shipped. 2. Identify the cargo’s destination. 3. Identify the date and means of transportation. 4. Include an accurate and sufficient description to allow easy identification of the item. 5. Be in compliance with applicable regulations and should be accompanied by any other documents necessary for regulatory compliance. 6. Identify the cargo’s owner. 7. Identify the cargo’s weight. B. Boat Loading/Unloading Recommended Practices In order to provide a safe and efficient operation during the transfer of cargo to and from an Offshore Supply Vessel, the following practices are recommended. 1. Vessel Qualified Person A Qualified Person who is a member of the Offshore Supply Vessel’s compliment should handle all cargo on the vessel that is being transferred to or received from an offshore facility. 2. Responsibility For Loading & Unloading The Offshore Supply Vessel Master is responsible for the safety of the vessel, its crew and all cargo being transported to and from offshore facilities while onboard the vessel. The Vessel Master is responsible for all boat loading and unloading operations. When cargo is moved to a vessel it should be placed on board the vessel in a manner that facilitates safe access and emergency escape by cargo handlers, passengers, and vessel crew. The Vessel Master should determine the need to secure any items against shifting in a seaway and the appropriate means to do so. 3. Inspections Prior to transfer from the vessel and upon receipt by the vessel, the vessel’s Qualified Person should visually inspect all cargo to determine if the following criteria are met:

a. Containers used to transport cargo are fit for service.

b. Cargo weights are clearly marked and indicated on the manifest. c.

Other particulars of the cargo conform to the manifest. d. Slings on pre-slung cargo have been inspected for safe working condition and fit for purpose. e. Cargo in containers with slings attached is positioned to allow access for hook-up from the side of the container and not the top of the container or other cargo. 4. Receiving Loads and Backloading from Offshore Facilities (MODUs, Platforms, etc.) In order to provide a safe and efficient operation during the transfer of cargo to and from an offshore facility, the following practices are recommended. a. Facility Qualified Person A Qualified Person who is a member of the facility’s compliment should handle all cargo on the facility that is being transferred to or received from an offshore supply vessel. b. Responsibility For Loading & Unloading The offshore facility’s Offshore Installation Manager (Master in the case of selfpropelled MODUs) is responsible for the safety of the facility and its crew and all cargo being transported to and from offshore facilities while onboard the facility. Cargo should be placed on board the facility in a manner that facilitates safe access and emergency egress by cargo handlers and others. The OIM should determine the need to secure any items and the appropriate means to do so. c.

Inspections Prior to transfer from the facility and upon receipt by the facility a Qualified Person from the facility should visually inspect all cargo to determine if the following criteria are met: 1) Containers used to transport cargo are fit for service. 2) Cargo weights are clearly marked and indicated on the manifest. 3) Other particulars of the cargo conform to the manifest. 4) Slings on pre-slung cargo have been inspected for safe working condition and fit for purpose. 5) Cargo in containers with slings attached is positioned to allow access for hook-up from the side of the container and not the top of the container or other cargo.

C. Pre-slinging: To promote safety of personnel and efficiency of offshore cargo operations, cargo should be pre-slung at the point of origin or prior to offshore transport. Rigging should be designed so that personnel can hook/unhook cargoes from the deck, dock, rig or platform level without having to climb onto cargoes. Use of proper length slings will largely eliminate any need for personnel to climb or use ladders to hook / unhook cargo. Slings should be protected from damage during transport.

1. Pre-slinging Tubulars: All tubulars (casing, drill pipe, tubing, etc.) should be pre-slung or placed in engineered tubular handling devices that are pre-slung prior to transport to or from offshore facilities. All subs, stabilizers, bits and mills less than four feet in length should have a serviceable lifting cap installed and should be transported in a container or basket provided by the vendor, contractor or operator. All lifting caps should be designed for their intended loads. All subs, stabilizers and mills greater than four feet in length should be pre-slung with certified slings and/or transported in a container or basket provided by the vendor, contractor or operator. 2. Other Cargoes that should be Pre-slung: a. Exceed two thousand pounds (900 kilos); b. Exceed six feet (1.8 meters) in height; or c.

Would otherwise require a four point hook-up.

D. Loose Material Companies that are preparing “loose” material for transport (i.e. bottle racks, tool boxes, welding machines, etc.) should ensure cargo is designed appropriately for hoisting, that the load-bearing points and rigging have been inspected, and that its weight is prominently marked. If the material is not designed and equipped for hoisting, every attempt should be made to stow the cargo in a container or basket of adequate size and suitable working load. E. Palletized Material Pallet loading and securing practices that may be accepted for warehousing or road transport of materials may not be appropriate for handling of offshore cargos. The following precautions should be observed: 1. Cargo should not be accepted for transport if it is on damaged pallets. 2. The arrangements for securing the cargo to the pallet and against shifting should be examined for adequacy prior to transport. 3. The center of gravity of the cargo should be above the center of the pallet and topheavy loads, particularly of materials prone to shifting (e.g. sacked goods), should not be accepted. A load is considered top-heavy if the height of its center of gravity is greater than 50% of the minimum dimension of the pallet, e.g. more than 24 inches (0.6 meters) on a 48 inch (1.2 meter) pallet. 4. Devices designed for lifting palletized loads should be used to lift loaded pallets. F. Containers 1. All containers should be equipped with certified rigging. The safe working load of each container should be prominently marked on the container. 2. Containers should not be stacked unless they are specifically designed for stacking. Before any containers are stacked, a risk analysis should be performed. 3. Rigging should be designed so that personnel can hook/unhook containers from the deck, dock, rig or platform level without having to climb onto containers.

G. Other Considerations 1. Hazardous Materials All persons offering Hazardous Materials for transportation, whether the shipment originates at an onshore location or an offshore facility, and all carriers of such materials, have responsibilities under the Hazardous Materials Regulations and should establish programs to assure that these responsibilities are met. Particular attention should be paid to: a. Appropriate description of the material, its proper shipping name and completion of the shipper’s certification, if applicable. b. Selection of packaging appropriate for the material. c.

Completion of the shipping papers and/or manifest.

d. Marking and display of identification numbers. e. Provision of emergency response information, e.g., Material Safety Data Sheets. f.

Provision of a 24-hour response telephone number.

g. Hazardous Materials known to require special segregation or handling procedures should be clearly identified and prior notice of their intended shipment given. h. Procedures should be established for handling Hazardous Material which: i.

Does not conform to its shipping papers or manifest.

ii.

Has improper packaging or is leaking or otherwise defective.

2. Wastes Procedures should be established for all offshore facilities for the categorization, packaging and marking of all wastes prior to their being offered for transportation to shore. Manifests and other applicable documentation should be prepared in accordance with the applicable regulations, including the Hazardous Materials Regulations where the wastes are categorized as Hazardous Materials or Hazardous Wastes. Wastes known to require special segregation or handling procedures should be clearly identified and prior notice of their intended shipment given. 3. Engineered Or Non-Routine Lifts Non-routine lifting operations include engineered lifts (heavy lifts), lifting Hazardous Materials, or any lift considered non-routine to the procedures established for the facility, and/or which may include one or more of the following criteria: a. Lifts made directly over the top of operating production facilities. b. Lifts with a center of gravity that cannot be determined. c.

Lifts requiring non-standard rigging components or configurations.

d. Lifts in excess of 38,000 pounds (17,236 kilos).

e. Lifts in excess of 16 feet (4.8 meters) in height or width. f.

Lifts in excess of 60 feet (18 meters) in length.

g. Lifts requiring multiple primary lifting devices. h. Lifts within areas with restricted space for maneuvering the load. i.

Written procedures should be established for engineered or non-routine lifts. Such operations should be planned and directed by a Qualified Person, be subjected to a JSA, and documented in a written lifting plan.

12.11 Muster List (Station Bill) A. Muster lists should be prepared for on manned platforms, mobile offshore drilling units (MODUs), and mobile inland drilling units (MIDUs). Muster lists should provide detailed instructions on assigned responsibilities in the event of a fire, evacuation or other emergency. B. It is the responsibility of the owner, operator, and/or the person in charge of each unit to prepare a muster list and keep it current. C. Muster lists should be conspicuously posted on the platform or unit. D. All employees, employee, third party and operator personnel, and visitors should receive an orientation as to their emergency responsibilities and assigned muster point(s). E. Current POB (Persons on Board) rosters should be maintained at muster points. F. At a minimum, a muster list should include: 1. Show the duties assigned to different members of the complement, third party personnel and visitors. a. Person In Charge b. Medical / First Aid Personnel c.

Fire Fighting Teams: There should be at least two (2) fire-fighting teams on board. The fire fighting team should consist of at least the following:

i. One (1) Team Leader, ii. One (1) Nozzleman, and iii. Two (2) Hosemen. d. Survival Craft Manning: A lifeboat should be assigned a minimum of four (4) personnel (3 with single-fall provision): i. One (1) boat commander, (Should be a certified lifeboatman, as required. If more than one lifeboatman is required, one should be pre-designated as boat commander.) ii. One (1) release mechanism operator, and

iii. Two (2) others (one for single falls). (One person qualified to troubleshoot or repair the lifeboat.) e. Rescue team should consist of: i.

Medical / First Aid provider

ii.

Rescue boat operator(s)

iii. Retrieval personnel iv. Onboard Spotter(s) 2. Specify which personnel are assigned to ensure that life saving and fire appliances are maintained in good condition and are ready for immediate use; 3. Specify the substitutes for key persons who may become disabled, taking into account that different emergencies may call for different actions; 4. Identify muster points and survival craft assignments for non-emergency personnel (i.e. visitors, non-marine employees, third party employees); G. The muster list should be revised, as necessary, to reflect significant changes in the unit’s operations that effect the assignment of emergency duties, e.g. in the case of combined operations or precautionary evacuation.

12.12 Emergency Signals A. All offshore facilities should be equipped with a general alarm system that is detectable in all normally accessible parts of the facility. B. All personnel should know their responsibilities when an emergency alarm system is activated. C. In areas where an audio alarm may not be heard, flashing lights should also be provided. D. When conducting emergency drills, the appropriate signal for that drill should be sounded. E. A public address system should be provided to supplement the emergency alarm system in announcing emergencies.

12.13 Emergency Drills A. Drills are a means of practicing emergency response, building teamwork and providing training in basic safety and other elements of emergency response. B. Drills should be pre-planned to emphasize key learning points. C. Drills should not become repetitive and should be developed from a selection of elements relevant to current or planned operations. D. Unless a drill is designed to meet a specific training purpose (e.g. breathing apparatus procedures for the fire team members) then the drill should include mustering all personnel to both their normal and their alternate muster points.

E. At a minimum, drills should be held and documented according to regulatory requirements. F. Drills should be conducted to simulate an actual emergency. All personnel should report to their assigned stations and be prepared to perform their emergency duties. G. Drills should be conducted at a time, which minimizes disruption to operations without detriment to the drill objectives. H. Emergency response elements may include, but are not limited to: 1. Emergency Control Center a. Command b. Communications (both aboard and to shore) c.

Information availability

d. Establishing alternative location 2. Mustering a. Accounting for personnel b. Moving and controlling personnel c.

Communications

3. Evacuation/escape a. Survival craft boarding b. Survival craft launching c.

Escape systems

d. Protective equipment 4. Fire teams a. Leadership b. Communications c.

Fire containment and extinction

d. Dewatering procedures e. Search and rescue f.

Casualty handling

g. Casualty evacuation 5. Medical / First Aid

a. Casualty management b. Response team c.

Casualty handling

d. Casualty evacuation 6. Well Control a. Trip drills b. Kick drills c.

Well control

d. Well kill 7. Helideck Emergency a. Leadership b. Fire monitor and rescue equipment c.

Casualty handling

8. Collision / Flooding / Loss of Stability a. Manual operation of valves b. Preserving watertight integrity c.

Emergency dewatering

9. Man Overboard a. Rescue boat launching and recovery b. Standby boat communication 10. Severe Storm a. Securing equipment on deck b. Preserving watertight integrity c.

Evacuation of non-essential personnel

d. Evacuation of all personnel 11. Hydrogen Sulfide (if applicable) (refer to Section 13) 12.12.1 Man-Overboard Drills A. Man-overboard drills should include all personnel.

B. Drills should be pre-planned to emphasize key learning points. C. Occasionally, drills should be conducted during hours of darkness. D. The drill may consist of a man-overboard dummy being thrown in the water. The floatable doll or dummy should be the approximate size, shape and weight of a man. E. The cry “Man Overboard” should be shouted. A life ring may be thrown over the side in the vicinity as soon as the word has been passed. Lights and smoke flares may be used to add to the realism of the drill. (Notify nearby vessels and platforms of the drill if smoke/flares are used) F. The person in charge should call the rescue team to muster at the rescue boat or designated lifeboat. The standby boat, if available, should be notified to provide assistance. The crane operator (if rescue boat is lowered by a crane) should prepare to lower the personnel basket with rescue team crewmembers, if retrieval is possible by crane. (Notify other facilities and emergency responders.) G. Non-emergency personnel (drill crew and visitors) should muster at a pre-designated station for roll call. The results of the roll call should be passed to the person in charge. H. A lookout should be posted. This person’s sole responsibility is to watch the person who has fallen overboard and continually point toward him. I.

Rig communications procedures should be tested.

J.

At the completion of the drill, appropriate log entries should be made.

K. A critique should be held with the rescue team and the crew. L. On days of inclement weather, training can be conducted on the use of rescue equipment and assignment of duties instead of the actual drill. M. Occasionally, a variance in the drill should be conducted. For example, assume the closest crane, the rescue boat, or the designated lifeboat is out of commission. 12.12.2 Fire Drills A. Fire drills should be conducted with participation of all personnel. B. The drill should be pre-planned to emphasize key learning points. C. The drill should normally be announced as to day and time. D. Occasionally, the drill should be conducted during hours of darkness. E. Occasionally, the drill should include a mock injury or a rescue situation. F. Fire Team, as established by the Muster List, should go to their duty stations. G. The person who first observes the fire should immediately pass the alarm, giving the location of the fire. The appropriate alarm should be sounded. H. The person in charge, or his delegate, should immediately go to the predesignated command center.

I.

Rig communications procedures should be tested.

J.

The standby boat, if available, should be notified to be ready to provide assistance.

K. The fire fighting teams should be mustered at the scene or pre-designated location. L. Reports should be communicated to the designated command center during each phase of the operation. M. All personnel not involved in fighting the fire or in critical rig operations should be mustered at their designated locations. Roll call should be taken and reported to the person in charge. F. The fire fighting team response should include either actual performance or simulation of the actions that would be needed in an actual emergency. G. Drills should be designed to exercise the special precautions that may be required when addressing fires in areas that contain hazardous materials. H. Designated personnel, such as radio operator, first aid personnel and backup fire team members, should be available for action that may be necessary to support the emergency fire fighting team efforts. I.

After the fire is out, a fire watch should be posted to guard against rekindling.

J.

A critique should be conducted after the fire drill and the drill documented.

12.12.3 Lifeboat Launching Drills A. A lifeboat launching drill should be conducted and participation should include all personnel. B. All lifeboats should be periodically lowered and raised back up to the cradle and documented. C. All lifeboats should be launched, fully operated, and retrieved periodically. This drill should only occur during reasonable weather and sea conditions. D. Partial lowering and launching of lifeboats may be held in conjunction with the regular abandon-rig drill. E. While launching and raising the lifeboat, only necessary personnel should be aboard. F. The lifeboat sprinkler system and engine should be operationally tested periodically but should only be operated or tested if water is supplied to the engine-cooling water intake. G. Rig communication equipment and procedures should be tested. H. The standby vessel, if available, should be moved to the vicinity of the lifeboat landing area before commencing the lowering of a manned lifeboat. I.

The lifeboat commander should ensure a clear landing area below the lifeboat before starting to lower the boat. The person in charge or their designee should confirm that the area is clear and safe before the lowering of the lifeboat commences.

J.

Radio contact should be made before launching and maintained at all times on a predetermined clear frequency between the lifeboat commander and the person in charge or his designee.

K. Once the lifeboat leaves the davit(s), only the lifeboat commander/designee should direct any activity affecting the lowering of the lifeboat. L. For manual release lifeboats, the order to release the boat from the lowering line(s) should only be given by the lifeboat commander after he ensures by visual means that he is waterborne. M. The lifeboat commander should release and maneuver the lifeboat away from the rig to a predesignated point. All equipment should be operated to ensure proper functioning. N. The lifeboat commander should maneuver the lifeboat alongside the rig, direct the attaching of the hook(s) and signal for the boat to be raised back up to the embarkation level. O. If a permanent radio installation exists in the lifeboat, the current rig radio frequencies should be posted. Appropriate course headings should be predetermined. P. A critique should be held with the lifeboat commander and the crew. 12.12.4 Abandon Rig Drill A. Abandon rig drills should be conducted and participation should include all personnel. B. The drills should be pre-planned to emphasize key learning points. C. The drill should be held on various days and times. D. The designated alarm for abandon rig should be sounded. The type of alarm should be posted on station bills. An announcement may be made on the public address system, if available, that this is a drill. E. All personnel should report promptly to their assigned station unless excused to continue operations. A roll call should be taken. All personnel participating in the drill should sign a roster, indicating their participation in the drill. F. Rig communications equipment and procedures should be tested by notifying the standby vessel and other emergency responders that an abandon-rig drill is in progress. G. Appropriate clothing to abandon the rig should be worn to the drill, and all personnel should carry appropriate survival gear (e.g. Personal Flotation Device and where required a survival suit). H. Designated personnel should prepare the lifeboat for boarding. Maintenance/safety pendants should be attached. I.

Personnel should enter the lifeboat, following instructions by the lifeboat commander or designated personnel, and then fasten their seat belts.

J.

The lifeboat commander should explain the operation and lowering procedures.

K. Each drill should be recorded on the appropriate forms and logbooks. Discussion should include deficiencies observed and alternate abandonment procedures. A critique should be conducted after the drill and brief description of what was discussed included in the documentation. L. The person in charge should analyze the drill with the lifeboat commanders.


SECTION THIRTEEN – HYDROGEN SULFIDE 13.1

General Hydrogen Sulfide, also know as H2S, is a highly toxic, colorless gas, that is slightly heavier than air. H2S has an unpleasant odor, detected at low concentrations, which is characteristic of rotten eggs. Due to the rapid onset of olfactory fatigue and paralysis, odor should not be used as the warning for the presence of H2S. H2S may collect in low-lying areas, tanks, cellars or confined spaces, displacing oxygen and increasing the amount of H 2S. H2S is soluble in water based and oil based drilling fluids and will migrate as a gas out of the fluid while in tanks or pits. H2S will burn producing a blue flame. Sulfur Dioxide (SO 2), a very irritating gas with a pungent odor, is produced. SO2 is a colorless gas appreciably heavier than air. Although the most obvious source of H 2S on a drilling site is from the well bore or oil storage tanks, other sources where H2S can occur may be: 



When sludge in the bottom of water tanks is disturbed. Such tanks can include drill water tanks, pre-load tanks, or other water tanks where sludge can build up. When mud solids are cleaned from a drill mud tank. Each company with operations where hydrogen sulfide could be encountered should establish an H2S contingency plan. The company should obtain or develop an H 2S manual and follow appropriate regulations that include at least the following:

A. Physical effects of H2S, B. Pre-well planning, C. Precautionary measures, D. Emergency measures, E. Breathing apparatus, F. Problems in respirator use, G. First aid for hydrogen sulfide, and H. Detecting and monitoring H2S.

13.2

Initiation of H2S Procedures In some areas, H2S is a severe hazard, due to the serious effect exposure to even small concentrations can have. When exposed to H2S, the nasal organs can be temporarily deadened to the extent that additional exposure is not realized. Due to this false sense of security, test any areas known or suspected to have H2S to ensure the area is safe. Where applicable, rigs are equipped with H 2S detectors. After testing the well for H 2S, log the concentration on the tour report. If the concentration exceeds 10 ppm, cease operations until the well is killed with water or ammonia. Bring explosion-proof fans and respiratory protection to the well site if the concentration cannot be kept below 20 ppm. The maximum safe working level for an eight-hour day is 10 ppm (average).



NOTE: Take care to monitor for H2S gas when working on a back-flowing water injection well or during an acidizing operation. Drilling operations encountering hydrogen sulfide (H 2S) should be aware of the special materials, equipment, and personnel protection equipment required. Safety procedures should be initiated and training completed in advance of penetrating the shallowest zone suspected to contain hydrogen sulfide. If hydrogen sulfide conditions are unexpectedly encountered, precautions should be implemented as soon as possible.

13.3

Applicability In oil and gas well drilling operations, severity of the environment shall be assessed. As a minimum, the following measures shall be implemented: A. Personnel protection equipment and training should be provided if the work area concentration of hydrogen sulfide exceeds 10 ppm as an 8-hour time weighted average (TWA) or 15 ppm as a short-term exposure level (STEL) averaged over 15 minutes; or the work area concentration of sulfur dioxide exceeds 2 ppm as an 8-hour TWA or 5 ppm as an STEL averaged over 15 minutes. B. Detection equipment should be provided if/when the action levels for H 2S or SO2 are exceeded. C. Equipment and materials shall be selected on the basis of resistance to sulfide stress cracking and corrosion.

13.4

Training Training should be initiated and completed in advance of penetrating the shallowest zone suspected to contain H2S. Hydrogen Sulfide Safety instructors are persons who have successfully completed a course in hydrogen sulfide instructor training or have received equivalent instruction from a company-designated hydrogen sulfide safety instructor/trainer. Training should include:

A. H2S and SO2 safe workplace practices (use the buddy system) B. Hazards, characteristics and properties of H 2S and SO2. C.

Dangers of H2S and SO2.

D. Signs and symptoms of H2S and SO2 exposure. E. Sources of H2S and SO2. F. First aid for H2S and SO2. G. Locations and use of respiratory and other safety equipment. H. Locations of safe briefing areas. I.

Use of Detection equipment.

J.

Types of and location of alarms.

K. General safety precautions for H2S. L. Dangers of Confined space and enclosed facility entry procedures (if applicable). M. H2S and SO2 Emergency Drills. N. Wind direction awareness and routes of egress. O.

Rescue techniques and first aid to victims of H2S and SO2.

13.5

Rescue/First Aid Procedures – Hydrogen Sulfide The following are the rescue/first aid procedures for hydrogen sulfide:

A. Buddy system should be used when attempting rescue operations. B. Put on rescue breathing apparatus before attempting a rescue. You, too, can be overcome by H2S. C. Remove the person immediately to fresh air. Have someone call an ambulance. D. If the person is not breathing, start artificial respiration immediately. E. If the person’s heart has stopped, begin Cardio Pulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) immediately. F. Keep the person warm. G. Once a person is removed to fresh air and normal respiration is restored, keep the person under medical observation until released by a doctor.

13.6

Detection An adequate number of fixed, portable or both types of detectors should be provided for the safety of personnel working. There should be a clear understanding of alarms and responsibilities when the alarm sounds. Fixed hydrogen sulfide atmospheric monitoring systems should include visual and audible alarm(s), located where the alarm can be seen or heard throughout the work area. Detection equipment should be calibrated and serviced per manufactures recommendations. The following are H2S detection methods: A. There are several ways you can be alerted to the presence of H 2S gas. The scent is usually the first and, unfortunately, sometimes the last indicator. You can smell as little as one part of H2S per million parts of air. However, if the concentration of gas is in the 100 to 150 ppm range, the sense of smell is quickly lost, giving a false sense of security.

B. When testing for H2S gas, be prepared for deadly concentrations. C. To determine the amount of H2S present in your work area, use one of the following means of detection: 1. Lead acetate ampoules or coated strips: These change color (usually turn brown or black) in the presence of H2S. The degree of color indicates the concentration. These © Copyright 2004 IADC All rights reserved


are not completely accurate and should be used only as an indicator for the presence of H2S. 2. Electronic Detectors: This type of personal device is belt-mounted or hand-held and gives audible alarms (and in some cases a read-out) upon exposure to a predetermined level of H2S. 3. Air-Sampling Gas Detector Tubes: The concentration of H 2S is registered by the length of discoloration when air is drawn through the detector tube. There are several reliable makes and types available, but their accuracy depends on the training and practice of the operator. Tubes must be certified by NIOSH or other equivalent certifying agency. 4. Fixed Systems: In larger plants and fields, a fixed system of continuous monitoring is often used. Where these units monitor an area continuously, an alarm system will give warning when the H2S concentration gets above a certain fixed limit. 5. Sensors should be located at the following locations as appropriate:

   

 

Bell nipple Mud-return line receiver tank (possum belly) and/or shale shaker

Pipe-trip tank Well-control fluid pit area Driller’s/operator’s station Living quarters, if located in close proximity to the well  All other areas where hydrogen sulfide may accumulate that are not part of the confined-space entry program

13.7

Properties of H2S The following are properties of H2S:

A. Color – Colorless. B. Odor – In low concentrations, it can be very offensive and is commonly referred to smelling like “rotten eggs.” In high concentrations, it is odorless. C. Vapor density - H2S is heavier than air. It will settle in low areas such as cellars, tanks, etc. o

o

D. Boiling point – 76 F (-60.2 C). E. Explosive limits – 4.3 to 46 percent by volume, in air. o

o

F. Auto Ignition temperature – 500 F (260 C). o

o

G. Water-soluble – Yes (4 volumes gas in 1 volume water at 32 F (0 C). H. Flammability – Forms explosive mixture with air.

13.8

H2S Exposure Limits Where H2S is present, the following limits of exposure should apply. (Certain local or federal regulations may have different standards.)

A. Ceiling value = 10 PPM

B. Time weighted average (TWA) = 10 PPM C. Acceptable maximum peak above the acceptable ceiling concentration for an 8 – hour shift is 15 PPM (10 minutes, once only, if no other measurable exposure occurs.)

13.9

Toxicity of H2S The toxicity of H2S is defined below:

A. 1 ppm = .0001% (1/10,000 of 1%) – Can smell (rotten egg odor), no risk. B. 10 ppm = .001% (1/1000 of 1%) – Allowable for 8 hours exposure over the allowable concentration, protective equipment will be necessary. Beginning or slight eye irritation. C. 100 ppm = .01% (1/100 of 1%) – Kills smell in 3 to 5 minutes. May burn eyes and throat. Coughing, eye irritation, within 2 - 15 minutes. Altered respiration, pain in the eyes and drowsiness after 15-30 minutes followed by throat irritation after 1 hour. Several hours exposure results in gradual increase in severity of these symptoms and death may occur within the next 48 hours. D. 500 ppm = .05% (5/100 of 1%) – Lose sense of reasoning and balance. Loss of consciousness and possibly death in 30 minutes to 1 hour. Respiratory disturbances occur in 2 to 15 minutes. Need prompt artificial respiration. E. 700 ppm = .07% (7/100 of 1%) – Will become unconscious quickly. Breathing stops and death results if not rescued promptly. Need immediate artificial resuscitation. F. 1000 ppm = .10% (1/10 of 1%) – Unconscious at once. Permanent brain damage may result unless rescued promptly and resuscitation is administered immediately. NOTE: ppm = parts of gas per million parts of air by volume. 1% = 10,000 ppm.

13.10 Breathing Equipment (SCBA) A. Self Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA) should be selected based on the usage of the unit. For example, 30 minute SCBA rescue unit, 5 minute escape pack, and cascade work units. B. The user should be instructed and trained in the proper use of SCBAs and their limitations. C. SCBAs should be cleaned and disinfected after each use. D. SCBAs should be inspected during cleaning. Worn or deteriorated parts should be replaced. SCBAs for emergency use should be thoroughly inspected at least once a month and after each use. E. SCBAs should be stored in a convenient, clean, and sanitary location. F. Persons should not be assigned to tasks requiring the use of self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) unless it has been determined that they are physically able to perform the work and use the equipment. G. Equipment needing repair should be appropriately tagged and removed from equipment stock until it is suitably repaired or replaced.


SECTION FOURTEEN – PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT 14.1

General In recent years, there has been a growing emphasis placed on protection of the environment. Federal, state and local governments have taken various approaches in designing programs to accomplish this goal. This guide highlights important environmental information but does not include all the information a company may require. This information is intended to assist in the development and maintenance of company and site-specific environmental procedures. The regulatory requirements in your area of operation may differ from the elements in this section and appropriate personnel are expected to consult the applicable regulations for their jurisdiction.

14.2

Spills Prevention and Control

A. Spill Control and Countermeasure Plan 1. Each land rig or facility should have a Spill Control and Countermeasure Plan or Procedure to follow in the event of a spill. Generally, but not exclusively, the Operator will provide the plan for the well site. Mobile equipment such as a drilling rig may be required to have a Mobile Equipment SPCC plan. The Plan should be reviewed by management on an annual basis, and should be reviewed every five years, or as required by local regulations. 2. Employees should be familiar with their roles should a pollution event occur. 3. If there is an incident, and if it is safe for the employee or will not create greater hazard for rig personnel employees should do whatever is necessary to control the spill, blowout, or rupture to protect personnel and environment, then notify your supervisor. The supervisor will determine if further actions are needed. B. Shipboard Oil Pollution Emergency Plan 1. Mobile Offshore Drilling Units should have a Shipboard Oil Pollution Plan. 2. All employees on board the vessel should be aware of the plan and their role should a pollution event occur.

14.3

Drilling Site Environmental Considerations A. All drilling operations should be planned and carried out in a manner that meets regulatory requirements and industry best practice. When planning a drilling program consideration should be given to the environmental impact of:

    

Drilling method; Mud type; Timing; and Camp set-up. Consideration should be given for options for drilling waste treatment and disposal.

14.4

Material Storage A. Safe material storage practices are essential to protecting the environment and worker health and safety. All environmentally hazardous materials should be stored in accordance with © Copyright 2004 IADC All rights reserved


company policies and procedures developed in consideration of the manufacturer’s recommendations and regulatory requirements. B. Personnel should be instructed as to the storage and handling requirements for the products and materials being used. C. When establishing material storage requirements, consider the following: 1. Separation of incompatible materials (i.e. oxidizers and flammable materials should not stored together); 2. Containers should come from the manufacturer with appropriate labels that accurately detail content and any hazardous properties (in accordance with applicable federal and local regulations. Container labels should be maintained so that they are readable, if they become destroyed, they should be replaced; 3. Use proper containers; 4. Protect containers from the weather exposue unless they are designed for outdoor conditions; 5. Observe all requirements pertaining to heat exposure, direct sunlight or extreme cold; 6. Be aware of regulatory requirements with respect to secondary containment, inspection programs and leak detection systems; and, 7. Do not allow surplus materials and wastes to accumulate onsite.

14.5

Waste Management A. Effective waste management involves a cradle to grave approach to the generation, tracking and disposal of wastes. A Waste Management Plan should consider opportunities to minimize waste generation and the storage, transportation and disposal requirements of the specific waste. Responsibility for waste begins at the point a material that may become or create a waste comes under a generator’s control. Third party acceptance of a waste for treatment and/or disposal does not release the generator from future liability. The generator should keep this in mind when contracting waste disposal and transportation companies. B. General Waste Management Procedures 1. All wastes should be managed in a manner that minimizes the potential for adverse impact to the surrounding human and ecological environments. 2. Appropriate personnel should be aware of the fact that the liabilities associated with storage, transportation and disposal of wastes are not readily transferred to others.

C. Waste Minimization Training is one of the best waste minimization opportunities. A company’s efforts to minimize waste and gain the associated benefits will only be effective if the people in the field understand waste classification and the concept of waste minimization. 1. Personnel should be encouraged to minimize waste disposal through materials management and reuse/recycling programs. 2. Reduce

a. Waste reduction is best achieved by evaluating all processes. Some specific actions include: 

Ordering materials in appropriate quantities without excessive packaging;  Where possible, returning containers, packaging, etc. to the suppliers for reuse or recycling; and  Substituting materials that are more readily recycled or that generate fewer or less hazardous waste products where feasible. 3. Reuse a. Consider the lifecycle, environmental and cost implications of reusing a product. For example, having a filter system on a parts washing tank may allow the solvent to be reused and extends useable life of the solvent. 4. Recycle

a. Wastes that may be recycled may include:        

Plastics; Scrap metal; Tires; Glass; Used oil; Certain types of solvents; Batteries; and Paper products. b. Recyclable wastes are subject to some restrictions, therefore careful sorting and segregation of recyclable materials is required. For example, waste oil that has been mixed with cleaning solvents; transmission fluids or coolants may not be acceptable for re-refining. D. Hazardous wastes and materials often represent an environmental risk as well as a potential health and safety concern. For this reason, it is essential that all appropriate personnel understand and comply with the rules, guidelines and regulations pertaining to hazardous waste management. A waste can be considered hazardous waste either due to characteristics or being included on a list created by federal environmental agencies. 1. Characteristics that cause a waste to be hazardous are: a. Ignitability - Ignitable wastes represent a risk of fire during routine handling operations. Included are liquids with a flash point less than 140°F. (60°C), a solid that can cause fire easily and burn vigorously, or gases that ignite and burn readily. Rig Wastes could include:

   

Ignitable Paint waste, Thinners and brush cleaners Stripping agents  Naphtha, Ethanol, Ethylene Dichloride, Isopropanol, Kerosene, Petroleum solvents (flash point less than 140°F or 60°C), white spirits Epoxy resins, adhesives, rubber cements, and marine glue



b. Corrosivity - Corrosive wastes are those that can eat through standard containers and cause releases into the environment. A waste is considered corrosive if it has a PH of 2 or less or a PH of 12.5 or more. Rig Wastes could include: 

c.

Spent Acids/Bases: Nitric Acid, Ammonium Hydroxide, Sulfuric Acid, Sodium Hydroxide  Rust removers containing acid base solutions  Corrosive cleaning solutions  Alkaline degreasers

Reactivity - Reactive wastes tend to be unstable, may react with water or are capable of generating toxic gasses or vapors. These wastes tend to explode during routine handling. Rig Wastes could include:    

Chromic Acid Hypochlorites Organic Peroxides Sulfides

d. EP Toxicity - EP toxicity refers to extraction procedures as it relates to the hazards of a waste leaching toxic substances through soils and into ground water. Rig waste could include:     

Batteries containing lead Paint wastes containing certain metals such as lead or chromium Parts soak tank bottoms containing lead Insecticides Pipe dope containing lead

2. Hazardous waste identification codes: Waste Type Ignitable Waste Corrosive Waste Reactive Waste Toxicity Characteristic Waste Acute Hazardous Waste Toxic Waste

Identification Code (I) (C) (R) (E) (H) (T)

3. Approval of Vendors Hazardous waste disposal sites, hazardous waste transporters, recycling companies, drilling fluid disposal sites, waste oil recyclers, and waste oil transporters should be preapproved prior to contracting their services. The following are some items to be considered when pre-approving vendors. a. Hazardous waste and waste oil transporters should provide evidence from the federal or local regulatory agency of their transporter number and their certificate of insurance. b. Hazardous waste treatment, storage and disposal facilities and hazardous waste incinerators should provide documentation of their federal or local regulatory registration number indicating what types of hazardous waste they are allowed to accept and their certificate of insurance.

c.

Oil Recyclers should provide evidence of their federal or local regulatory agency registration number, a letter on their letterhead stating what is being done with the waste oil, their certificate of insurance and mutually executed master service contract.

d. Drilling Fluid disposal sites should provide state and, if available, federal approval of their disposal site and their certificate of insurance. e. Trash disposal sites should provide evidence of regulatory agency approval for dump sites, and the trash haulers should be required to verify that the waste taken from the rig site is taken to an approved disposal site. E. Recordkeeping: A record of all listed materials purchased or brought on location should be kept. Records should include but are not limited to: 1. The amount of material purchased, date brought on location, dates and amounts used, where or what it is used on or in, what happened to it. A record such as the engine log may be used to document the use of oil. 2. The results of oil testing which is conducted for equipment maintenance should be kept with the waste oil manifests or should be referenced on a document attached to the waste oil manifests. 3. An inventory of all material considered hazardous or which could become hazardous waste. 4. Waste inventory including the hazardous waste and waste oil produced and shipped. This list is to be updated weekly or as waste is added to containers. 5. Manifests or bill of lading from the hauler who removes the waste. Final copy of the manifest that is signed by the recycling or disposal company should be returned to the generator. 6. Regulatory number(s) of the waste hauler and disposal site if required by the definition of the waste as noted on the manifest form. 7. If waste oil haulers are required to be permitted by the state or local government, a record of this permit should be kept with waste oil manifests. 8. A letter from the Disposal Company or recycler as to what was done with the hazardous waste or waste oil. This letter should include the name of the recycling or disposal facility along with any permit numbers issued to the facility including documentation from the permit-issuing agency. 9. Manifests, Hauling Permits, and Bill of Lading should be filled out completely. Hauling permit and bill of lading are normally used for non-hazardous waste while manifests may be either for hazardous waste or non-hazardous waste depending on the type of manifest. Waste manifests should be kept at the rig/site as required by local or federal regulation. F. Storage, Labeling and Transporting Hazardous Waste

1. Whenever waste is determined to be hazardous and is put in a container for disposal, the container should be dated. There may be regulatory guidelines relating to accumulation

versus storage. Accumulation is when material is held for a period of time until a transporter comes to pick it up, whereas storage is where hazardous waste is stored for a long period of time. Regulations may require a label to be affixed and dated as soon as the container is filled or moved to the accumulation area. 2. When hazardous waste is removed from a MODU, yard or rig into a yard or to a landing dock, it no longer falls under the accumulation rule. A manifest should be completed before the waste leaves the generator’s site and should accompany the waste. Hazardous waste transport rules should be followed. When material is stored at storage or transport locations the site(s) should have the appropriate operating permit(s). 3. Hazardous waste may be stored in 55-gallon drums, tanks, or other containers suitable for the type of waste generated if the following rules are followed. a. The container should be marked with the words "HAZARDOUS WASTE" in bold print, plus a label as required by federal or local regulations. The type of waste should be indicated on the container and the date this waste was first placed in the container. The description of the material entered on the label for the material in the container must be correct. b. Containers used for storage of hazardous waste should be kept in good condition, handled carefully and replaced immediately if leaks occur. Containers should be inspected weekly and records of the inspections kept. c.

Containers should be kept in an open, properly marked area out of the weather and kept closed except to fill or empty them.

d. Ignitable or reactive waste containers should be placed in an isolated zone separate from each other and separate from other hazardous waste. The specific waste storage zone should be clearly marked, with appropriate fire fighting equipment located in the vicinity. e. Never mix wastes, hazardous with non-hazardous or two different types of hazardous wastes. A small amount of hazardous waste such as a chlorinated solvent mixed into a drum of waste oil could make the entire drum of waste oil hazardous waste. Although waste oil is considered non-hazardous, when mixed with chlorinated solvents (i.e. carburetor cleaner, or paint remover) it becomes difficult and expensive to dispose of. Two different types of hazardous wastes could react together causing fire or release of toxic fumes. f.

Prior to shipping, the proper approved shipping labels should be affixed to all containers identifying content according to waste stream and characteristic, if applicable.

g. Used oils or greases should be kept separately, marked as "NON-HAZARDOUS OIL" or "NON-HAZARDOUS GREASE" or as required by local or federal regulations. h. Solvents should not to be mixed with waste oil, grease or waste diesel fuel. i.

Spent oil cartridge filters should be drained or crushed to remove all free oil then placed in an open top drum suitably marked and disposed of at an approved facility.

j.

Prior to shipping hazardous waste, waste oil, and oil filters, the containers should be inspected to ensure that no leakage might occur.

k.

Hazardous waste should be listed on a hazardous waste manifest while waste oil and oil filters may be manifested on non-hazardous waste manifests, depending on local and federal regulations.

G. General Waste and Debris In addition to rules for the storage and disposal of wastes on land, there are rules that vessels must comply with such as Annex V of Marpol, which is the International Treaty To Prevent & Reduce Pollution to the Oceans from Vessels. A company’s vessel waste management plan should include the provisions of Annex V.

14.6

Air Emissions A. Air quality is a product of emissions and environmental conditions (wind, humidity, altitude). The major emissions of concern for the petroleum industry are Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S), Carbon Monoxide (CO), Ozone (O3), Particulate Matter (PM), Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx), Sulfur Dioxide (SO2), Methane (CH4), and Carbon Dioxide (CO2). Other emissions of concern are volatile organic compounds (such as benzene), visible emissions (black smoke), and other sulfur compounds. B. General atmospheric conditions have a significant impact on local air quality. Prevailing wind direction and velocity determine what receptors will be most affected by an emission source. Terrain can modify wind direction effects. In addition, wind patterns may vary with height, season, and time of day. Areas prone to temperature inversion (a weather condition where a cap of warm air traps emissions near the ground) may have periods of poor air quality. C. Some regions have more stringent emissions requirements than others. Local, state, and federal regulations should be reviewed prior to moving a rig into an area.

1. All facilities and operations should meet regulatory requirements for air emissions; 2. Fugitive air emissions should be reduced wherever possible; and, 3. Complaints or concerns from the public or nearby land users should be addressed.

14.7

Camp Expectations

A. General expectations with respect to camp construction and operation include: 1. All camps should be constructed and maintained in accordance with the applicable construction codes and regulatory permit/approval requirements; 2. All camps should be sited and operated in a manner that minimizes environmental impact to the extent practicable; 3. Sewage and/or garbage should be managed in accordance with regulatory requirements and in a manner that mitigates:    

Risk contamination to soil, surface water or groundwater; Create a health risk to camp occupants or the public; Create a fire risk; or, Attract wildlife.

4. Sewage should be managed in a way that mitigates impact to soil, surface water and groundwater, and does not create a nuisance or pubic health hazard. Specific sewage management requirements to help achieve these objectives include: a. Appropriately design and size all sewage treatment and disposal systems for the location and anticipated volume of waste. b. Use appropriate personnel when designing, constructing and permitting sewage systems. c.

Ensure that effluent quality is monitored at sufficient intervals to ensure compliance with regulatory discharge requirements.

d. Discharge only sewage and gray water to the sewage systems. The discharge of other chemicals such as fuels, cleaning solvents and chlorine can adversely affect the performance of the system and impair effluent quality; and, e. Do not allow sewage to be directly discharged near:     

14.8

Residences; Food service areas; Storage areas; Groundwater wells; or, Surface water bodies.

Noise A. While in many areas noise from oil and gas well drilling operations does not affect the public or the environment, in areas of increased industrial and residential activities cumulative noise effects may be relevant. When required, offsite noise may be reduced by control measures such as acoustical shielding, rig layout and equipment selection.

14.9

Sumps All sumps should be constructed and utilized in an environmentally sound manner and in accordance with applicable regulations.

14.10 Recommended Maintenance Practices The companion of good housekeeping is preventive maintenance. Regularly scheduled preventive maintenance on equipment, pumps, piping systems and valves, and engines will minimize the occurrence of leaks and releases of chemicals and other materials to containment systems, or if there are no containment systems, to the environment. A. Suggested general maintenance practices aimed at minimizing or mitigating environmental risk include the following: 1. Be aware of potential drips or leaks from piping systems, tanks or transfer areas and use drip pans where necessary. 2. Clean up, store and dispose of wastes promptly and in an approved manner. 3. Keep diked areas and drip pans free of standing water, following regulatory requirements for testing and discharge or disposal.

4. Maintain paint or other coatings on equipment and above ground tanks to protect against corrosion. 5. Maintain the manufacturer’s labels of any materials or chemicals stored onsite. 6. Store materials in accordance with product compatibilities and regulatory requirements.

14.11 Groundwater Protection A. All surface and subsurface activities should be conducted in a manner that protects groundwater resources to the extent practicable. Groundwater may be affected through: 1. Surface spills; 2. Diversion or extraction of groundwater for human or industrial uses; 3. Improperly cased wells that connect previously isolated groundwater regimes; 4. Subsurface contamination from poorly designed or constructed injection wells.

14.12 Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material (NORM) [Refer to Section 2 paragraph 2.9] A. Naturally Occurring Radioactive Materials (NORM) occur in low levels all around us. Sometimes oil and gas industry production activities can concentrate NORM to higher levels. B. Site-specific hazard assessments with respect to NORM exposure should be completed where the potential for NORM impacts exists.

14.13 Storage Tanks A. Leaks from storage tanks and associated piping may be a source of soil and groundwater contamination. These potential environmental and safety hazards may be reduced by: 1. Selecting appropriate tanks that are designed and appropriately rated for the fluids they are intended to contain;  

Ensure that all storage tanks are appropriately permitted, installed and maintained in accordance with all applicable regulations. Develop a program for the routine inspection and maintenance of tanks, distribution lines, secondary containment, corrosion protection systems and leak detection systems to avoid deterioration.

2. Use of secondary containment; 

Secondary containment should be kept free of standing water.  Ensure that standing water meets the discharge criteria for the applicable receiving environment prior to pump-off or haul the water to a permitted disposal facility.

3. Monitoring and maintaining the integrity of tanks and distribution lines; and 4. Training appropriate personnel in loading and dispensing operations. B. General Product Storage & Transfer

1. The inspection, maintenance, secondary containment and leak detection requirements for storage tanks and product transfer systems are usually specified by regulation. a. Recordkeeping varies with jurisdiction. As a minimum, maintain the following:       c.

Inventory records; Manifests; Inspection records; Leak detection systems and environmental monitoring records; Maintenance records; and, Copies of applicable regulatory documents.

Material transfer procedures should be developed setting out responsibilities, spill prevention and control.

SECTION FIFTEEN – EMERGENCY ACTION PLAN(S)

15.1

General Various regulatory agencies may require work site emergency action plans. Each Rig Site should have emergency action plans for the various emergencies that may occur at the site. An emergency action plan should be in writing, kept in the workplace, and available to employees for review.

15.2

Minimum Elements of an Emergency Action Plan(s) An integrated plan that includes all types of emergencies may be established, or a company could develop individual plans for each type of anticipated emergency. The following should be covered by emergency action plan(s): A. Procedures for reporting the emergency to management, response contractors, or regulatory authorities. A list of emergency contacts and their contact information should be posted on the rig; B. Employees should be designated for emergency duties as needed. The designated employees should be trained in their duties. The plan should designate an on site emergency commander and indicate the job title(s) of emergency response personnel; C. The emergency action plan should include procedures that should be followed by employees performing emergency duties; D. Procedures for emergency evacuation (egress), including type of evacuation and exit route assignments; E. Procedures to be followed by employees who remain to operate critical rig operations before they evacuate;

F. Procedures to account for all employees after evacuation; and G. Each rig should have and maintain an alarm system. The alarm system should use a distinctive signal for each type of emergency. H. Emergencies could include but are not limited to: 1. Medical Emergency. 2. Fire (For additional information refer to Section 5). 3. Well Control. 4. Hydrogen Sulfide Gas (For additional information refer to Section 13). 5. Evacuation (For additional information refer to Section 12). 6. Pollution Event (For additional information refer to Section 14). 7. Man overboard or lost. 8. Emergency rescue. © Copyright 2004 IADC All rights reserved


I.

The emergency action plan should include the job title (name) of the employee who may be contacted by employees who need more information about the plan or an explanation of their duties under the plan.

J.

Emergency action plans should be reviewed with each employee covered by the plan:

1. When the plan is developed or the employee is assigned initially to a job; 2. When the employee's responsibilities under the plan change; and 3. When the plan is changed. K. Emergency action plans should be reviewed annually and updated as needed.

15.3

Medical Emergency Action Plan When a medical emergency occurs, take the following steps:

A. Survey the scene. B. Determine the nature and the severity of injuries and illness. C. Qualified personnel are to administer proper first aid or medical treatment as required. D. Notify the district office. E. If required, arrange to transport any injured persons to the nearest approved medical facility. F. Return operations to safe condition, if this can be done, or if necessary and safe do so, shut down the operation. G. Notify safety representatives and supervisors. H. Complete reports and investigations as soon as practical.

15.4

Media Crisis Communication In the event of an incident resulting in injuries, vehicle or rig damage, or a hazard to the public, notify the district office. The district office should then immediately notify the area and corporate offices. Public statements to the media should follow the company policy and be handled by the designated person. If rig personnel are asked about an incident, they should politely tell the news media that the matter is being investigated and that a statement will be released as soon as the facts are determined.

15.5

First Aid and CPR Training and Supplies The following are first aid and CPR training requirements: A. Each rig supervisor (Driller and Rig Manager) and operator should maintain a current certification in first aid and CPR. B. Each location should have a first aid kit and a bloodborne pathogen kit approved by the safety department. Company vehicles should have a 10 unit kit readily accessible at all times.

C. Inspect the first aid kit and bloodborne pathogen kit weekly and re-supply the kit as required. D. Each rig should have a basket stretcher and accessories available for use. E. Post-emergency numbers at each office and at each rig location.

15.6

Emergency First Aid NOTE: For precise procedures, refer to a First Aid Handbook or Medical Emergency Response Book. A. The first objective in first aid is to save lives. Before attempting any first aid, the aid-giver should call or send for emergency medical assistance, if possible.

B. The person providing first aid must strive to: 1. Maintain breathing and circulation, 2. Prevent heavy loss of blood, 3. Prevent further shock, and 4. If possible, without causing further complications, transport the patient to a physician, the emergency room, or a hospital. C. There are three “hurry” cases in first aid: 1. Breathing – A person will die within 4 to 6 minutes if breathing is not restored. 2. Bleeding – If a large vessel is cut, blood loss may be sufficient to cause death within less than a minute. Each company should follow its bloodborne pathogen procedure. 3. Poisoning – Every second of delay causes further injury. D. If victim is unconscious: 1. Check for breathing and pulse; administer mouth-to-mouth resuscitation and/or CPR if necessary, according to the guidelines set up by American Red Cross. 2. If the victim is breathing, check for bleeding, and control as needed (direct pressure, elevation, pressure point). 3. Check for other injuries. 4. Do not move an injured person unless their position poses an immediate danger. E. If victim is conscious: 1. Talk to the patient. 2. Make sure the patient is breathing. 3. Check and control bleeding. 4. Find out where the patient hurts, provide reassure and comfort the patient. © Copyright 2004 IADC All rights reserved


5. Do not move the patient unless it is absolutely necessary. F. Treat for shock. 1. Keep the patient calm and reassured. 2. Keep the patient lying down with legs elevated unless he has suffered fractures or is suspected to have sustained a back injury. 3. Cover with a blanket to retain body heat; however, do not let the victim become overheated. 4. Get the patient to a doctor; call an ambulance.

15.7

Fire Emergency Plan A. A fire prevention plan should be in writing, be kept in the workplace, and be made available to employees for review. (Refer to Section 5 for additional information on fire protection.) B. A fire prevention plan should include: 1. A list of all major fire hazards, proper handling and storage procedures for hazardous materials, potential ignition sources and their control, and the type of fire protection equipment necessary to control each major hazard; 2. Procedures to control accumulations of flammable and combustible waste materials; 3. Procedures for regular maintenance of safeguards installed on heat-producing equipment to prevent the accidental ignition of combustible materials; 4. The job title of employees responsible for maintaining equipment to prevent or control sources of ignition or fires; and

5. The job title of employees responsible for the control of fuel source hazards. 6. Formal and informal training. 7. Periodic inspections. 8. Preventative maintenance and repair. 9. Emergency/rescue squads should be maintained to ensure effective control and extinguishment of fires and treatment of personnel as required. Emergency personnel should receive training relevant to their duties. C. An employer should inform employees upon initial assignment to a job of the fire hazards to which they are exposed. An employer should also review with each employee those parts of the fire prevention plan necessary for self-protection. D. The following is a generic sample of a fire plan. Depending on the type of rig the plan may require more or less information. 1. Fire Emergency Signal will depend on the emergency signal systems available on the rig.

2. Emergency Response Procedure: STEP 1: STEP 2: STEP 3: STEP 4: STEP 5: STEP 6/7:

Observe fire or emergency situation. Person first observing the fire should sound alarm before attempting to do anything else. Observer shall notify the Rig Manager. Rig Manager will direct the emergency squad's actions once assembled and the situation has been assessed. Rig Manager contacts local fire department for necessary support. Division Management / Oil Company base notified of situation.

E. Fire Emergency Procedures and Drill 1. Fire Team may consist of the following: Rig Manager - In Command - Directs operation. Floormen - Fire Team members (4 members depending on the type of rig). 2. Personal protective equipment for personnel fighting the fire may include: Fireman's outfit. Rubber boots and gloves. Helmet that meets ANSI Z89.1 or equivalent CE Standard. Self contained breathing apparatus (worn if necessary). 3. A partial list of equipment may include: Fire detection and alarm system. Rig main water system. Portable fire extinguishes. Equipment in Emergency Locker. 4. Drill Procedures A realistic fire drill should be conducted frequently or as per regulation. The Rig Manager in coordination with the operator representative should execute the drill. The Rig Manager will execute the alert and follow with an announcement over the public address system (if rig is so equipped) "THIS IS A DRILL! THIS IS A DRILL!!" The drill should be recorded in the IADC Daily Drilling Report. 5. Operational Procedures a. The individual discovering the fire should sound the fire alarm IMMEDIATELY before attempting to control the fire. b. All fires should be reported to the Rig Manager no matter how small or whether they self-extinguish. c. Situation Evaluation, the "on scene" leader of the emergency squad should determine as quickly as possible.  

Class of fire (what combustible materials are burning). Appropriate extinguishing agent.

  

Appropriate method of attack. How to prevent extension of fire. What manpower is required to contain a fire.  Communications will be established between the "on scene" leader and the Rig Manager by telephone, radio, or messenger.

  

A staging area will be established in a smoke free area, as near as possible to the fire area. The staging area shall also be near a communication system. All supplies needed to support the fire-fighting effort shall be brought to the staging area.

d. Personnel who may be on location but off tour should assemble at a predetermined point. By the time the fire emergency situation has been accessed, these personnel should be mustered and received briefing by the Rig Manager. e. Off duty personnel should act as the rescue squad as the emergency squad fights the fire if rescue has not already been completed. If rescue is complete, these personnel should be directed/placed by the Rig Manager so as to better contain the fire or support the fire fighting effort. 6. The rescue of trapped personnel should be the first step in any operation; however, it may have to be delayed because of circumstances. 7. Clean Up should include checking for ambers at time that debris is cleaned up and free water removed. Any unsafe condition should be corrected if possible, but if not possible should be marked and all personnel notified of the condition. 8. All personnel who were on site at the start of the emergency should be accounted for.

15.8

Hydrogen Sulfide / Gas Alert Procedures A. For detailed information on H2S safety procedures refer to Section 13.

B. The H2S emergency team should consist of: 1. Rig Manager: Directs Operations 2. Driller: On Scene Leader 3. Messenger (Floorman): Relays Messages 4. Derrickman / Floorman: Assists as directed.

SECTION SIXTEEN – DROPPED OBJECT PREVENTION 16.1

General Although the derrick/mast is the area where the need for a dropped object program is most obvious, other areas such as the substructure have potential for dropped objects as well. The main scope of this section is on derrick/masts but the principles can be applied to the substructure, moon pool, Texas deck and other areas as well. To understand the importance of a good derrick/mast equipment inspection program, consider the following: An object in freefall will continue to speed up until it is acted on by something else, whether it’s air (it will reach a point when air resistance stops the acceleration, called terminal velocity), a stationary object (the rig floor will stop most items) or personnel, with potentially devastating consequences. A 12” adjustable wrench weighing ¾ of a pound falling from the derrick can accelerate until it is traveling at about 78.4 ft/sec or approximately 54 miles per hour or similar to the impact of a 45 mm bullet. A direct hit by the wrench WILL cause a significant amount of damage to personnel working on the rig floor. Just think what a dropped 8 lb. sledgehammer or 14 lb sheave would generate.

16.2

Equipment Inventory Each rig should maintain a complete inventory of standard equipment that is permanently installed in the derrick/mast. A. Equipment such as the following should be listed, as applicable:

  o o o o o o o              

Hoisting sheaves Wire ropes Tong hanging line Block hanging line Mud bucket line Static lifeline Hoisting lines Mule line Lost pipe recovery system Line Guide, rope, and attachments Shackles Tong sheaves and cables/attachments Tong weight buckets Light fixtures Derrick/mast climbing devices Fall protection devices (arrest devices) Mule winches Wire line survey sheaves Stabbing board Standard equipment installed on the derrick/mast board Derrick/mast escape device(s) Top Drive Racking arms © Copyright 2004 IADC All rights reserved


 

Crown Sills Pins and keepers





Anchor points and/or pad eyes B. The inventory should include:

   

Description of the equipment and location installed in the derrick/mast. Part number and serial number of equipment (if applicable). Date installed or replaced in the derrick/mast. Date(s) and inspection results of equipment in the derrick/mast inventory.

16.3

Fastening Requirements for Equipment in Derrick/Mast A. All light fittings in the derrick/mast should have safety lines attached. This line should prevent the light from falling if a failure occurs. B. All bolts fitted in threaded holes should be torqued, lock wired then marked in a visible way so that a visual inspection would identify bolts that are loose. C. All nut and bolt arrangements must be torqued, and then secured with a safety pin behind the nut, these should also be painted with a visible line to ensure loose bolts are quickly identified. D. Nut and bolt arrangements should be fitted with one spring washer only. Flat washers, or any combination of the two, should not be used. E. All shackles used in the derrick/mast should be of the nut and bolt type secured with a safety pin of the correct size. Current color code, SWL and ID number should be clearly visible. F. All brackets and clamps used in the derrick/mast should be galvanized or otherwise coated to fully protect against corrosion. G. All pad eyes used for rig floor winch sheaves should be rated to at least two times the SWL of the winch. H. The derrick/mast equipment inventory should be updated immediately with location and precise details of all new/modified equipment in the derrick/mast and date logged on an Update Record. I.

16.4

The Rig Manager (Toolpusher) and Rig Superintendent should approve fastening systems on all equipment prior to installation in the derrick/mast.

Derrick/Mast Equipment Guidelines It goes without saying that one of the most important items in any drops program is to conduct periodic inspections of equipment in the derrick/mast. A derrick/mast inspection list may include but is not limited to the items in the following sample list of items . Refer to the IADC Rotary Rig Inspection Sheet for additional information. A. Derrick/Mast Lights Inspection:

1. Is the light working; is the unit defective i.e. cracked or dirty glass, water ingress, etc? 2. Does it have an effective safety line; will it prevent all parts of the unit from falling if they come loose? 3. Is the sling secure, in good condition and of the correct type? 4. Is the clamp in good condition, i.e. tight, free from rust, etc.?

5. Is the clamp secured with an approved locking method, i.e. double nut or lock wire? 6. Are cables, ground wires, etc., in good condition? B. Cable Trays / Junction Boxes 1. Are cable trays firmly attached to the derrick/mast structure, e.g. no excessive movement? 2. Are the clamps / fixings secured with an approved locking method, i.e. double nut, lock wire? 3. Are the cable trays in good condition, e.g. free from rust and cables secured with appropriate tie-wraps? 4. Are cables, ground wires, etc. in good condition (visual inspection)? 5. Are junction box bolts secured with double nuts or lock wire? 6. Are junction box face bolts tight and cable glands in good condition (visual inspection)? C. Winch / Tong Line Sheaves 1. Is the sheave the correct rating and type for the application? 2. Is the safety line effective; will it prevent all parts of the unit from falling if they come loose? 3. Is the safety line of the correct rating, e.g. can it support the maximum SWL of the winch? 4. Do the shackles / pad eyes have the correct rating for the winch? 5. Is the shackle of the approved type, i.e. bolt type shackle with safety pin, SWL, and ID number on it? 6. Is the grease line nipple in good condition, and does the sheave turn freely? 7. Ensure that all safety lines do not foul winch/tong lines. D. Crown Block 1. Check indicator marks on crown block hold down bolts to ensure they have not slackened off. 2. Check crown sheaves for defects, i.e. excessive noise or melted grease (signifying sheave running hot). 3. Check hold down arrangement on each individual sheave and ensure it is tight and secure. 4. Check crown sheaves for excessive tar build-up, especially below the crown block. Check from all possible angles to ensure there is no build-up on steelwork, which has been the cause of many dropped objects in the past. 5. Consult with the Driller prior to removing excess tar. Ensure the drill floor is blocked off, in case of dropped tar. © Copyright 2004 IADC All rights reserved


6. Check all grease lines and grease nipples, ensuring grease lines are properly secured. 7. Check the drill line-retaining device on crown sheaves. Report any signs of fouling keeper bars or excessive movement on bars. Report any changes from previous inspection. E. Ladder / Steelwork Inspection 1. Check ladders and derrick/mast steelwork as you climb to ensure you identify defective areas before you get onto them. 2. Check paint marks on ladder brackets to ensure bolts have not slackened off. 3. Check steelwork for bent or damaged sections. 4. Report any excess movement of any ladder, even if the bracket is secure. 5. Check ladder cages (back scratchers) for damage, if applicable. 6. Check climbing assist devices, especially around top sheave and wire line termination. 7. Check secondary fall protection system. F. Walkways and Platforms Inspection 1. Are handrails and gates secure and in good condition, i.e. free from rust, no excessive movement? 2. Are clamps/brackets secured with an approved locking method? 3. Are grating welds intact? 4. Are all hinges on crown area hatches in good condition with safety lines fitted? 5. Are all walkways free from debris and loose equipment? E. Wind Walls 1. Are all wind walls in good condition, i.e. free from rust and securely attached to the structure? 2. Are clamps/brackets secured with approved locking methods? 3. Are all hatches, gates and doors securely attached with hinges in good condition? 4. Check for holes, tears or other defects. 5. Ensure that no unauthorized equipment has been fitted or is stored in the area (ropes, toolbox, etc.). 6. Care should be taken when inspecting new sections of the wind wall due to possible installation faults. F. Deficiencies found during a derrick/mast equipment inspection should be corrected immediately. Items that for some reason cannot be corrected immediately should be documented so that other rig personnel are aware of the deficiencies, the Rig Manager

(Toolpusher) can obtain materials, or make arrangements for repairs. Corrections of items on this list should be addressed in the most expeditious manner possible. A copy of the latest derrick/mast equipment inspection should be retained as a reminder of outstanding items.

16.5

Temporary Equipment in Derrick/Mast Temporary equipment installed in the derrick/mast should be documented as to the date installed and location in the derrick/mast. A. Driller Responsibilities

1. The Driller should have the authority to deny access to the derrick/mast to anyone. 2. The Driller should check with personnel who are planning to work in the derrick/mast understand the requirements/proper procedures for fall protection and personnel hoisting. 3. The Driller is responsible to get all personnel, equipment and/or tools accounted for and documented as appropriate, prior to granting access to the derrick/mast. 4. The Driller is responsible for ensuring all equipment that went up the derrick/mast has either been brought down or has been properly installed (update Derrick/Mast Inventory as required). 5. No tool and/or equipment should be allowed to remain in the derrick/mast unattended for any period of time. 6. Other personnel should be notified that equipment is being installed in the derrick/mast and reminded to remain off of the rig floor. B. Temporary Equipment in Derrick/Mast 1. Temporary equipment, such as wire line sheaves, coiled tubing equipment and casing handling equipment, which has to be rigged up in the derrick/mast should be subjected to the same degree of scrutiny as the fixed derrick/mast equipment. A designated person should visually inspect all lifting points, shackles, safety slings and lifting slings. 2. The Rig Manager (Toolpusher) or his designee should inspect all third party equipment prior to installation of the equipment in the derrick/mast. 3. The third party equipment representative should confirm and provide documentation, as applicable, that the equipment has been inspected for defects (e.g. damage during shipping). 4. To ensure that all temporary items are accounted for and have been removed from the derrick/mast after the completion of any task, the installation of temporary equipment should be documented on the daily drilling report or other type of record that is readily available to the drilling crew. C. Derrick/Mast Temporary Equipment Inspection 1. Prior to installation of equipment in derrick/mast, the Rig Manager (Toolpusher) should ensure that a derrick/mast temporary equipment inspection has been completed or if it is third party equipment, the third party provides equipment inspection documentation.

2. Any temporary equipment discrepancies found during a derrick/mast inspection that cannot be rectified immediately (i.e. due to having to order parts, etc.) should be documented. All discrepancies discovered should be corrected immediately or as soon as physically possible. 3. Temporary Equipment Check List: a. All Securing methods to be used for temporary equipment should comply with the company requirements and guidelines. b. Appropriate rigging equipment is to be used to anchor temporary equipment in the derrick/mast (e.g. A derrick/mast beam clamp should be use in stead of a sling wrapped around derrick/mast steelwork). c.

Pad-eye or structure from which the temporary equipment is suspended is adequate for the maximum possible load.

d. Proposed location of temporary equipment in the derrick/mast has been assessed by the Rig Manager (Toolpusher) to check for potential clashes with derrick/mast traveling equipment (e.g. Top drive, winch wires, etc.). e. If applicable, the senior third party representative has given written verification that his equipment has been inspected for defects (e.g. damage during shipping) prior to use. 4. As long as temporary equipment is in the derrick/mast it should be included whenever permanent derrick/mast equipment is inspected.


16.6

Sample Derrick/Mast Permanent Equipment Inventory This is a sample form only. Not all derricks/masts will have the equipment listed below and other derricks/masts may have additional equipment. In addition many items such as shackles and other attachment devices may be part of sheaves and be included in the particular sheave registry or they may be listed separately as per company policy. Some companies may choose to have the equipment inventory divided up into the various sections of the derrick/mast and list the equipment located in those areas on that particular section of the inventory. For example: Level One Crown or Water Table could include the crown assembly, sheaves and pins lighting and other attachments in the crown; Level Two could include all items between the Derrick Board and Crown Area; Level Three could include Derrick Board, Fingers and accessory attachments and equipment; Level Four could include Traveling Equipment and accessories; Level Five could include the derrick/mast area between the drill floor and the derrick board; Level Six could include the area under the rig floor (Substructure and BOP area). Equipment Description

1.

2. 3.

4. 5.

6.

Equipment Manufacturer

Part or Inventory ID #

Sheaves Rig Floor Winch Sheave(s) Personnel Hoisting Sheave Wire-line Survey Sheave Boom Line Sheave Tong Sheaves Shackles / Attachment Mechanisms Wire Lines Tong Hanging Lines Block Hanging Line(s) Mud Bucket Line Static Lifeline Rig Floor Winch Line (s) Mule Line Lost Pipe Recovery System Line Guide, Rope and Attachments Derrick Escape Device Derrick Attachment Cable Escape Device Buggy Tong Equipment Sheaves Weight Bucket Attachments



Date Installed

Date Latest Inspection

Inspection Results


Equipment Description 7. 8.

9. 10.

11.

12.

Equipment Manufacturer

Part or Inventory ID #

Light Fixtures Cord attachments Crown Area Crown Sills Crown Block Assembly Crown Block Guards Walk around guardrails Walk around decking Crown Light and Other Equipment Fall Protection Devices Fall Protection Device Attachments Traveling Equipment Blocks Block Sheave Guards Hook Top Drive Elevators Swivel Derrick Board Fingers Mule Assembly / line / attachments Other Accessory Equipment Stabbing Board Basket Assembly Stabbing Board Positioning Assem. Other Accessory Equipment



Date Installed

Date Latest Inspection

Inspection Results


SECTION SEVENTEEN – WELL SERVICING 17.1

Well Servicing Units A. When raising a mast, the required clearance of ten (10) feet (3 meters) should be available to avoid contact with overhead electrical lines. This clearance should be maintained between all components of the mast and guying components. B. The raising mechanism should be inspected in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. All pins and dogs should be checked and greased as required by the manufacturer. C. A supplemental footing should be provided, if necessary, to distribute the concentrated loads from the mast and mast mount to the ground. The manufacturer’s load distribution diagram indicates the magnitude and location of these concentrated loads. In the absence of the manufacturer’s load distribution diagram, the supplemental footing should be sized to carry the gross weight of the mast and mast mount under maximum anticipated hook load, and to carry the mast and mast mount weight during mast erection. The supplemental footing should also be sized such that the safe bearing capacity of the soil at the location is not exceeded. The soil below the footing should be reasonably level. The cellar should be constructed to prevent cave-in. D. Before the mast is raised off the cradle, the jacks under the rear end should have a solid footing, tightened and leveled. After the mast has been raised a foot, the jacks should be retightened and re-leveled. Both footing and jacks should be inspected frequently, especially if the location is wet. Always refer to manufacturer’s recommendations as to where to position the carrier jacks once the derrick has been raised. E. Pulleys used for telescoping upper sections of the mast should be inspected and lubricated in accordance with company policies and procedures developed in consideration of the original manufacturer’s recommendations prior to telescoping. F. The supervisor responsible for the operation should be consulted before raising or lowering the mast during windy conditions. G. All personnel, except the operator, should stay clear while the mast is being raised, lowered, or telescoped up or down. No one should be allowed on the mast while it is being raised or lowered. H. When raising, lowering or telescoping a single-pole unit, the cab of the unit should be unoccupied unless the operating controls for the pole are located in the cab, and the unit has “headache” posts designed to prevent the cab from being damaged if the pole or mast should fall. I.

When telescoping masts are raised, proper seating of the pawls in the pawl rest assembly should be verified before applying any load to the mast. The locking mechanism should be engaged. Proper deployment of the ladder and secondary fall protection should be verified before personnel climb the mast.

J.

The telescoping winch line should be spooled evenly to prevent jerking when telescoping up or down.

K. If a unit is spotted incorrectly, the mast should be lowered and placed in a horizontal position before the unit is moved. © Copyright 2004 IADC All rights reserved


L. Masts requiring guy lines should be guyed as soon as the proper height is reached and before starting the job. M. Guy line tension should not be used to bring the crown block over the well. Manufacturer’s recommendations for guy line size and tension should be followed. N. All guy lines shall be fastened to anchors meeting manufacturer’s specifications or API’s recommended practices (see RP 4-G) for loads and patterns. O. Chain guards should be installed on power transmission chains when rotaries are powered by the unit. P. The mast should be equipped with a derrick escape device. The escape line should be anchored at the ground at an angle that is in accordance with the manufacturer of escape device or general industry recommendations. The derrick escape device should be available at the rod or tubing board, whichever is in use. An employee should not ride the escape device from the mast except in emergencies. The escape device should be maintained and inspected as per the manufacture’s recommendations. Q. Workers should use a full body harness attached to a fall arrest system when working in or on the mast. R. Derrick ladders should be equipped with secondary fall protection systems. S. All tubing elevators with detachable bails should have bolts or pins through the hole in the ears, or other positive locking method, to hold the bails in place. If bolts or pins are used, keepers should be used to hold them in place. T. To prevent shifting, the pipe racked in the derrick should be tied off to the tubing board as each row of pipe is completed. Soft line or sash cord used to secure pipe should be routinely inspected and replaced as needed. U. All anchors and guy lines should be visually inspected after pulls exceeding 75% of the rated hook load capacity or after exposure to winds in excess of 40 mph (64 kph). The inspection should be documented on the rig report. V. Prior to lowering the mast, air should be purged from any hydraulic cylinders and the cylinders properly pressured. Company policies and procedures developed in consideration of the manufacturer’s recommendations for lowering the mast should be followed. W. Tension on hoisting screws should be partially released when the mast is cradled. X. When the telescoping mast that uses a winch line is cradled, all slack should be taken out of the telescoping winch line, and the winch line should be locked if applicable. Y. All loose equipment such as blocks, elevators, and mud hoses should be secured before the unit is moved. Z. In the event of close tolerances, well servicing units may need to be rigged down before any pumping unit is started. AA. An operator should ensure that the hoist and winch gears are disengaged before the carrier is changed into road gear.

BB. Bridges, overhead wires and soil conditions should be checked before a portable mast is moved over unfamiliar roads. CC.The great weight of the unit prevents sudden emergency stops; therefore, when moving a portable mast, the vehicle should be driven at speeds safe for road or traffic conditions. When moving the rig, the crew truck should follow behind the rig at least six (6) seconds back with warning flashers on.

17.2

General A. A pulling unit or other engine-powered equipment used within 100 feet (30 meters) of a well should be equipped with spark arrester exhaust systems. Utmost precautions should be taken to minimize the hazards inherent in the use of engine-powered equipment around producing wells. B. Weather conditions, such as wind direction, should be considered when blowing down wells or lines.

C. The crown block should be visually inspected before each rod-and-tubing job. D. Traveling blocks should be provided with a safety housing that does not contain abrupt projections that might snag the tubing collars or tubing board. E. Studs and bolts holding the safety housing of traveling blocks in place should be inspected regularly. F. Rigging (cables, chains, fabric slings, anchors, connectors) used for hoisting should be checked before each use. Thorough monthly inspections should be conducted of all rigging equipment and faulty equipment removed from service. A signed and dated monthly report should be made on the condition of rigging equipment. Chains used for making overhead lifts should be of alloy material. These chains should have a durable tag provided by the manufacturer that states the size, grade rated capacity and reach (if the chain is part of a premade sling the tag should include the rated load and angle on which the rating is reached, number of legs, and sling manufacturer.). G. For all masts or other hoisting equipment, the loading hooks, the operating mechanism and the structure should be checked daily or before each use. Depending upon the severity of the equipment usage, more thorough inspections of these same items should be made at one-month to one-year intervals (Refer to API RP 8 B and RP 4 G). H. A secondary hanging device is required for securing the electric cable guide wheel when an electrical submersible pump is run or pulled. I.

All crown sheave journals should be provided with bearing caps or metal straps to prevent the bearings from jumping out of the sheaves.

J.

When pulling tubing, refer to manufacture’s specification as to required number of hoisting lines.

K. Field repairs of hoisting and load bearing equipment should be made with like for like parts. Hoisting and load bearing equipment should not be welded on or holes be cut upon except as directed by the manufacturer or qualified engineer if the manufacturer is not available. (Refer to API RP 4 G, SPEC 4 F for structures, and RP 8 B, SPEC 8 C, for hoisting equipment)

L. Blowout preventers and other well-control equipment should be inspected and maintained according to recommended practices.

M. An approved bell nipple or rod stripper should be used in the top of the tubing to prevent sucker rods from hanging up on the tee while the rods are being run in the hole. N. Gloved or bare hands should not be used for stripping oil or paraffin from sucker rods, swabbing or tubing lines. Rod strippers equipped with suitable drains are recommended. O. When pulling the first stand of rods or tubing, the derrickman should stay on the ground. The well pump should be unseated before the derrickman climbs the mast. P. Floor workers should suspend work and get out of the way when the derrickman is using hand tools in the mast. Hand tools used overhead should be secured with a lanyard. Q. Tools, cable or any other equipment should be lowered to the ground by a controlled means. Nothing is to be dropped from the mast. R. The derrickman should inspect mast and other overhead equipment and report the condition to the supervisor. Any defective material should be repaired before work is started. S. Tools should not be placed in the rod basket. Before a rod job begins and the rod transfer device leaves the floor, the rod transfer cable should be untied and straightened out. T. Workers should keep their feet out from under rods when hanging rods in the mast. U. Tests on rod hook latching mechanisms should be made before every job and as often as practical during each job. V. Only approved rod shucks should be used on rigs that use a rod finger system. They should be inspected before each rod job. If rod fingers show signs of weakness, the condition should be reported and repairs made immediately. Safety cables should be attached to each rod finger. W. When a well is being serviced, beam hangers and bridles should be tied back or taken off, not left swinging free. X. A wireline or chain sling attached to the traveling block should be used for raising or lowering the walking beam or other heavy equipment. Y. When tubing is run in a well, caution should be used when the bottom of the tubing is passing through the top of the liner. If it hangs briefly and then slips off, it might cause the tubing to part, the tubing line to break, or the mast to fall.

17.3

Swabbing A. Swabbing should be restricted to daylight hours, except as authorized by management. Well control equipment should meet company guidelines. B. When swabbing, scraping paraffin or using bailing lines, employees should not stand near the cable. C. Flags should be placed on the swabbing line to verify depth meter readings so that the swab or bailer will be stopped at a safe distance from the wellhead control equipment. D. When a well is being swabbed through a flowline and the flow is going into the same pit as is the flow from the steam exhaust line, the outlets should be at least 30 feet (9 meters) apart to prevent the possibility of a static discharge starting a fire.

17.4

Well Testing A. A flare or test line from a high-pressure gas well to the atmosphere should have as few elbows, tees, and bends as possible. It should be at least 150 feet ( 45 meters) long and anchored securely. Bull-plugged tees should be used at turns instead of elbows. Where 90 degree turns or choke tees exist, the line should be secured with stakes driven through holes in a steel anchor plate. It should be secured to counteract the reverse thrust caused by freezing or plugging of the line, and the sudden release of pressure.

B. A gaseous fluid stream should not be produced directly into a test tank. C. All temporary facilities should include bleeders. D. Personnel should not stand in front of the orifice fitting when removing an orifice plate. E. Test tanks should have fixed ladders and a landing platform or spiral staircase.

17.5

Wireline Operations A. Prior to beginning wireline operations, a ground wire should be connected from the well head to the wireline truck. B. Gloved or bare hands should not be used to clean a wireline coming out of a hole. A mechanical or rubber device should be installed to clean the wireline. C. Safety flags or barrier tape and warning signs should be placed between the unit and the lubricator while wireline operations are in progress. D. Personnel other than the operator should stay away from the well, wireline and rear of the pulling unit, except when they are needed for the operation. E. A wireline sheave should be located vertically over the lubricator to relieve strain on the lubricator. A wireline sheave should be properly secured to the production tree at some point below the bottom lubricator connection. Secondary safety slings should be installed on both wire line sheaves. F. Standing on a wellhead connection should be avoided. Where possible, workers should be provided a platform or similar device.

G. Workers should not jump to the ground from a platform or production tree. H. During paraffin cutting or similar operations that require a lubricator, the well valve should be closed and the pressure bled from the lubricator before it is unflanged or removed. I.

It is advisable to attach guy lines to the lubricator under the following conditions: working during windstorms, using lubricators more than 20 feet (6 meters) in length, working with extremely high pressure or working on deep wells.

J.

Long lubricators should be hoisted in place with a gin pole anchored to a production tree. An alternate method is to use an A-frame truck or mast truck with an extension or stinger to raise a heavy lubricator and tools. When a self-contained swabbing unit is used, the mast or pole will be used to raise the lubricator.

K. If it is required to conduct work near the wireline, the motion of the wireline should be stopped. L. During repetitive operations such as jarring, the wire should be cut and slipped periodically to prevent fatigue and subsequent failure around the sheaves and other areas.

17.6

Acidizing A. Before acidizing operations begin, wellhead fittings and injection lines should be hydrostatically tested to the appropriate test pressure. A check valve should be installed at or near the wellhead to prevent flowback. B. When acid is being pumped, all persons should remain a safe distance from the injection lines and pumps to avoid being sprayed with acid in the event of failure of a gasket or some other part of the equipment. C. Some acids may contain auxiliary reagents, which are dangerous to skin cuts. Therefore, all actual handling of the acid, including repair of acid leaks in injection lines, should be done by qualified personnel. D. Acidizing operations, especially acid displacement and clean up of acidizing equipment, may generate dangerous amounts of hydrogen sulfide (H 2S) or chlorine gas. Appropriate respiratory protection should be worn when such a condition exists. E. Potable water or eyewash should be on hand for immediate eye flushing. A means to utilize fresh water to flush chemicals from the body should be available. F. Proper personal protective equipment (PPE) as recommended by the MSDS should be available and worn as required.

17.7

Formation Fracturing and High Pressure Pumping A. Formation fracturing or the high-pressure pumping of liquid hydrocarbon should be in accordance with the detailed procedures and equipment specifications set out by management. Before each job, thoroughly review and resolve all questions you have on the procedure. B. A safety meeting should be held before the start of a job. With all personnel present, discuss procedures, hazards, safety precautions and work signals. Only necessary personnel should be on location. A “safe area” should be designated for assembly in the event of an emergency. C. The discharge lines of any pump not driven through a torque converter or equipped with an automatic high-pressure shutdown device should have a relief valve. However, you should not use a relief valve when pumping cryogenics. The relief valve should be anchored to prevent movement. Relief-valve discharge should be piped to a non-hazardous location. The discharge piping should be securely anchored to prevent whipping. D. Each discharge line should have a full swing at the well and at the truck manifold and should be anchored sufficiently to prevent whipping or bouncing. Rubber or steel-wrapped rubber hoses should not be used in discharge lines for well fracturing operations. E. To prevent flow back, check valves should be installed in each discharge line as near the wellhead as possible.

F. The discharge lines should be pressure tested from the pump to the well to the maximum pressure anticipated. If any leaks occur, they should be repaired and the lines re-tested. Connections should not be tightened while the line is pressurized. G. Pressure bleed-off lines should not be vented to truck tanks. H. If possible, pumping operations should be conducted in the daylight. Pumping should not occur during electrical or severe dust storms. I.

Smoking and smoking materials, including matches, lighters and cigarettes, should be prohibited within 150 feet (45 meters) of the well and related equipment before, during and after the operation.

J.

All personnel not needed to perform the operation should leave the site. All vehicles and equipment not necessary to the operation should be moved to a point at least 150 feet (45 meters) from the well.

K. Adequate fire fighting equipment should be on location, in good working condition and strategically located. In addition, personnel familiar with this equipment should be properly stationed on-site during the job. L. If possible, the pumping trucks and tanks should be located crosswind at a minimum of 150 feet (45 meters) from the well. The vehicles should be headed away from the well in case quick evacuation is necessary. Access roads should remain clear. M. Discharge lines should not be routed under trucks or other vehicles. N. Standing on or near discharge lines that are under pressure should not be allowed. O. All trucks and blenders should be electrically bonded by means of a groundwire clip to a central point, such as the sand transport, to eliminate the possibility of static electricity generation. The central point should be grounded to a rod driven into the ground. Water should be poured around the rod if the ground is not moist. (Refer to NFPA Life Safety Code or similar code for ground rod details.) P. Oil should not be placed in the open tanks of truck-mounted fracturing or cementing units. Q. Recording pressure gauges should be at least 150 feet (45meters) upwind from the well or at a safe position, if available, using velocity check valve connections. The connection hose should be secured within two (2) feet (0.60 meters) of the gauge. R. A safety valve or monitoring device should be installed on the casing tubing annulus to ensure that maximum pressure ratings for the casing are not exceeded. S. When a blowout preventer is used to contain pressure, it should be checked for proper working pressure and operating condition prior to pumping. T. If the maximum anticipated fracturing pressure exceeds the rated working pressure of the wellhead, the wellhead should be replaced with a blowout preventer of suitable working pressure, or it should be isolated from the fracturing pressure by a production tree bypass tool. U. When a Production tree bypass tool is used, the supervisor should check all connections, pressure rating, seal element and operating condition of the bypass tool.

17.8

Gun Perforating and Percussive Sampling A. On land locations, the perforating truck should be parked so that the truck or perforating cable will not be near or under power lines. B. When a perforating gun is fished out of the hole after being lost in the well, a representative of the respective service company should be present at the wellsite to ensure safe handling and defusing of the gun. C. Radio, cellular telephones, global locater devices, and radar transmitters should be turned off within 1000 feet (300 meters) of perforating operations, electrically fired back-off operations and electric blasting caps. (Note some vehicles have factory installed global locater devices, these devices should be turned off or vehicle moved outside the required parameter.) D. When a perforating gun is being loaded or run, temporary signs that prohibit the operation of radio transmitters should be placed in the vicinity of the operations and for land operations on roads entering the location at least 1000 feet (300 meters) from the well bore. E. In some cases, radio silence may be broken with no danger if the gun is in the well at least 200 feet (60 meters) or deeper from ground level. Always contact the service company supervisor anytime radio silence must be broken during perforating operations. Microwave equipment may remain operative during the entire perforating operation if the antenna is not focused toward the operations. F. Three principal components, (1) the perforating truck, or unit, and equipment, (2) the wellhead tubular goods, and (3) the mast and rig equipment should be at the same electrical potential to avoid an accidental detonation. Therefore, an electrical connection should be made between each of the three components and the potential difference determined between components. Operations should be shut down any time a voltage greater than 0.25 volts is observed between any two components of this trio. Note: 0.25 volts may not be a safe difference in potential when electric blasting caps with an internal resistance less than 50 ohms are used. G. Only personnel required to rig up or rig down the lubricator and perforating gun should be allowed in the vicinity of the wellbore. All personnel should stand clear of the lubricator when pressure testing with perforating tools in the lubricator. H. All welding machines should be shut down during perforating operations. While perforating operations are being conducted, all engines, motors and any other source of ignition not essential to the operation should be shut down until the explosive device has been lowered 200 feet (60 meters) or more into the well. I.

A wire line blowout preventer, lubricator, stuffing box or control head should be used in all perforating operations. The lubricator should be long enough to contain the entire tool assembly. Installing a pump-in tee for killing a well should be considered if the lubricator is rigged up on tubing or drill pipe.

J.

Operations involving perforating guns at the surface should not be conducted during electrical storms or dust storms.

K. Before perforating equipment is lowered below the blowout preventers, the lubricator packoffs and hand pumps should be tested using appropriate procedures. Grease injectors should be used on all wells with greater than 2000-psi shut-in pressure.

L. Whenever possible, under-balanced perforating operations should be conducted during daylight hours. M. The wellbore pressure and/or fluid level should be monitored to ensure proper well control throughout the perforating operation. Refer to the API RP 67 “Recommended Practices for Oilfield Explosive Safety” for further reference.

17.9

Guy Lines and Anchoring Systems A. All guyed structures should have all guy lines in service for the entire operation. In the event it is necessary to replace a damaged line, operation of the system being guyed should cease and the local supervisor in charge of the operation or system should be present during the replacement. B. Attachments of guy lines to structures or to other termination points (including structure details) should be accomplished in a manner consistent with the original structure manufacturer’s or a qualified Registered Professional Engineer’s documented recommendations. Refer to API RP 54 and RP 4 G. C. Repairs and modifications to a structural or other guy line termination point, including an anchor, which may affect the strength of the guy lines and anchoring system, should be made in a manner consistent with the original manufacturer’s specifications and API Spec 4 F. D. Guy lines should be sized so as to have a nominal strength of at least 2.5 times the maximum guy load resulting from the design loading condition, calculated in conformance, at a minimum, with methods specified in API Spec 4 F. E. The size and type of wire rope for guy lines should be as specified in API Spec 9 A and API RP 9 B. F. Guy lines should not be used with a splice in the load-carrying portion, except in an emergency. The spliced wire rope should be replaced as soon as practical. G. Permanent guy lines should be inspected on a regular, scheduled basis and replaced if: 1. Three (3) randomly broken wires are visible in one (1) rope lay length; or 2. Two (2) broken wires are found at the end connection in the strand valley; or 3. The original diameter of any outside wires has been reduced by one-third, or more, as a result of wearing or scraping; or

4. Permanent kinks are visible in the load-carrying portion of the wire; or 5. There is any evidence of corrosion or heat damage (rust); or 6. There are any splices in the load-carrying portion of the line. H. Temporary guy lines should be inspected before each rig-up and replaced if: 1. Three (3) randomly broken wires are visible in one (1) rope lay length; or 2. Two (2) broken wires are found at the end connection in the strand valley; or

3. The original diameter of any outside wire has been reduced by one-third, or more, as a result of wearing or scraping; or 4. Permanent kinks are visible in the load-carrying portion of the wire; or 5. There is any evidence of corrosion or heat damage (rust); or 6. There are any splices in the load-carrying portion of the line. I.

Chains, boomers, threaded tensioners and any other devices not constructed entirely of wire rope used in the load-carrying portion of any guy line, or used to attach the guy line to the structure or anchor, should satisfy the load requirements per company policies and procedures developed in consideration of the manufacturer’s recommendations and utilize a “closed eye” in lieu of an “open hook” to effect attachment to a guy line or structure or anchor. Boomers should be equipped with safety latches on the handles to prevent accidental opening of the boomer. All such devices should be visually inspected prior to each use and physically pull-tested in accordance with company policies and procedures developed in consideration of the manufacturer’s recommendations.

J.

Both permanent and temporary anchors for portable drilling and well servicing units should be installed in a pattern consistent with the minimum spacing requirements of API Spec 4 F. All anchors, permanent or temporary should be pull tested in accordance with company policies and procedures developed in consideration of the manufacturer’s recommendations or API RP 4 G.

K. Metal components of permanent anchors should be protected against corrosion. L. Stakes should not be used for anchors. M. The location of all permanent anchors should be marked to prevent the possibility of loss or damage to an anchor or portable equipment. N. Permanent anchors should be visually inspected prior to each use. If visible damage or deterioration to an anchor or to the soil is apparent, the anchor should be mechanically pulltested before use, regardless of when last tested. (Refer to API RP 4 G) O. A structure should be properly positioned and leveled before it is guyed. If the unit is not properly positioned, it should be repositioned before attempting to guy it. The mast should be lowered and placed in a horizontal position before the unit is moved to be re-spotted. P. Masts requiring guy lines should be guyed as soon as the proper height is reached and before starting the job. Guy line tension should not be used to bring the crown block over the well. Q. Guy lines should be tensioned consistent with company policies and procedures developed with consideration of the original designer’s or structure manufacturer’s recommendations. Excessive tension on the guy lines should be avoided. R. Guy lines should have at least a 15-foot (4.5 meters) clearance from any overhead electrical lines and located so that they are never positioned over electrical lines. S. Permanent guy lines should not extend over roads. When a temporary guy line extends over a road, the road should be barricaded and the traffic rerouted. T. All guy lines should be flagged to allow proper visibility for both ground and air traffic.

U. When a temporary structure has been left unattended for more than eight hours, all guy lines and anchoring systems should be visually inspected before work is resumed. The inspection and findings should be documented on the daily rig report. V. Structures used in offshore operations, whether or not designated as free standing with externally anchored guy lines, should be anchored to welded pad eyes, or other wire suitably attached to the main platform structures or decking. All guy line anchor installations should be approved.

17.10 Pumping Units A. Vehicles should be parked upwind and a safe distance from the pumping unit. Be aware that some gas is produced in all oil operations and gas vented from casing on a rod-pumped well can be ignited by a spark, open flame, hot catalytic converter, etc. B. Before approaching the pumping unit, visually inspect the general condition of the bridle, belts, belt guards, horsehead, carrier bar, bearings, bearing seals and guardrails. Also, look for excessive vibration. C. The pumping unit should be stopped while it is being worked on or serviced. Electrical power should be shut off or the gas driver shut down, the clutch disengaged and the brake set before the unit stuffing box or wellhead equipment is worked on or serviced. D. To prevent a flash and eliminate a fire hazard, the “stop” button should be pressed before using the double-throw switch on a pumping unit motor to change speeds from high to low, or from low to high. E. When a job requires that a unit be worked on or work is to be done in close proximity to the unit, the pole (main) switch should be locked out by following lockout/tagout and testing procedures. If the unit is in operation, first turn the control panels switch to the “off” position and then throw the pole (main) safety switch. For start-up, reverse this procedure. F. When the position of a pumping unit counterweight is being changed, the brake should be set and the crank spotted so the counterbalance will not move when it is loosened. Counterbalances should be either in balance in the down position, tied down, or blocked. G. When re-fusing electrified pumping wells, the following procedures may be used as a guide: 1. Turn the Hand-Off-Auto switch to the “off” position. Push the reset buttons. Check the fuses before attempting to start the unit. 2. As you approach the main safety switch on the pole, be sure to notice whether or not it is attached to a ground wire. This ground wire should be tied into a pole ground wire or a ground rod at the base of the pole. Be sure the ground wire connections are tight. Check for burned spots, blistered paint, smoke marks around the lip of the door, or the odor of burned insulation. 3. Use a current detector to check the control box for stray current and or electrical shorts. If feasible, an alternative may be to have a qualified electrician check for current prior to physical contact. Refer to API RP 54. 4. When opening or closing a safety switch, stand to the side of it, never in front. Open or close in one quick motion. 5. Open the door of the switch box and latch it. Requires a qualified person under the electric standard.

6. Check the inside of a switch for burned spots, blistered paint, smoke marks, and for the odor of burned insulation. Be sure the switchblades are all in the “open” position. Requires a qualified person under the electric standard. 7. Using a fuse puller, remove all three fuses and replace them with fuses of the same rating. Make sure the fuses are tight in the fuse clips. Requires a qualified person under the electric standard. 8. Close the switchbox and latch it. When closing the safety switch, stand to the side of it, never in front. 9. Turn the “Hand-Off-Auto” switch on the motor control to the “On” position. If the unit fails to start, advise the immediate supervisor. 10. Keep fuse pullers clean and dry. If they get wet or have a buildup or grease and dirt on them, the moisture or dirt may form a conductor for electricity. 11. Never replace a fuse you remove from a switch with a fuse of a different rating. Always replace with a fuse of the same ampere rating. If a smaller fuse is used, the unit will run only a short time before the fuse blows again. Using a larger fuse may create a hazard for operating personnel or severely damage the equipment. The rating is stamped on the brass ring on the end of the fuse. H. Low-voltage, renewable-element fuses below the 100 ampere size should be prohibited. I.

Before replacing a fuse, always make sure the disconnect is open. Only authorized persons should replace primary fuses such as transfer, disconnect and line fuses. A person should not be authorized to replace such fuses unless they have been fully instructed on the approved safety procedure for doing so. This procedure should include the use of a fuse puller.

J.

Makeshift substitutes for fuses such as pennies or slugs should be absolutely prohibited.

K. When replacing belts, shift the prime mover such that belts have slack sufficient for easy removing and replacing. Belts should not be forced. L. For oiling and greasing, as well as for other work performed around the pumping unit, on the wellhead equipment, or on a chemical pump, the prime mover should be shut down or the clutch disengaged and the brake set. M. When stopping the unit, make sure the brake is in good operating condition. If it is not, block the unit and repair the brake before making other repairs. N. The unit can be stopped with the counterweights balanced in either the 12 o’clock position or the 6 o’clock position. For most units, the brake unit should be set at the top of the stroke and the weights should be at the bottom of the rotation. Apply brakes so that the rotational movement will stop smoothly. O. When work is to be performed inside the weight guard area or on the unit members, the unit should be locked in a positive manner to prevent movement. On units which have stop pawls installed, the stop pawls should be engaged with notches in the brake drum. On units, which do not have stop pawls, the weights should either be chained or blocked. P. When respacing the pump, the counterweights may be stopped in positions other than 12 o’clock or 6 o’clock, provided the brake is in good operating condition.

Q. Major repair jobs involve massive weights and thus require tools of proper design and rating. Overstressing small tools or using makeshift tools should be prohibited. R. During repairs, the work area should be kept clean and free of oil and grease. S. Before working on wellhead equipment, properly rated pressure gauges should be installed. Check the casing annulus, tubing and flowline pressures. Bleed off any pressure. Then clean up any fluids around the wellhead work area according to local guidelines. T. Stuffing boxes should be supported by clamps or another suitable method during stabbing and makeup. Hands should not be put on polished rods. When laying down a polished rod, keep the stuffing box and other loose equipment at the bottom of the rod. U. Before a polished rod stuffing box is packed, bleeder valves should be opened. During the packing, the top half of the box should be held by clamps specifically designed to hold it. V. A proper packing hook, not a screwdriver, should be used to remove old packing. W. When pressuring tubing, recognize that high pressures can build up very rapidly in certain wells, especially when testing for leaks with the existing rod pump, and particularly in installations having long-stroke units longer than 64 inches. X. Pressure testing with a long-stroke unit should be performed by two persons. One should observe the pressure, and the other should operate the motor controls and brake. Y. To observe the pressure being placed on a well, a pressure gauge of adequate range should be used. Z. To respace a pump, the following procedures may be used as a guide: 1. Plan the job with all personnel involved before starting work. 2. Check the condition of belts, brake, throat bolt on horsehead, bridle, latch on carrier bar, rotation of units, etc. 3. Stop the unit near the bottom of the stroke by shutting off the electrical motor or by disengaging the clutch on the gas engine and setting the brake. 4. Clean up any fluids spilled around the wellhead work area. 5. Install a pressure gage in the wellhead flowstream and bleed off any pressure. 6. Loosen liner packing and set screws. Use a loose polished rod clamp to drive the liner down to the top of the stuffing box. Use spacers or adjusting nuts to protect the stuffing box packing. Install the polished rod clamp and tighten it in position on top of the liner. If a “suitcase” (or sleeve) is used between the polished rod liner head and the stuffing box to support the rod string, be sure to use one with a positive locking device to prevent it from jumping out and dropping the rod string.

7. To position a polished rod clamp on top of the carrier bar: a. Have all personnel move away from the wellhead area. b.

Release the brake and start up the unit.

c.

Set the brake.

d. Move the polished rod clamp to the desired location. e. Release the brake slowly to allow the carrier bar to move up to the polished rod clamp and engage the rod string load. 8. To respace the liner: a. Remove the polished rod clamp above the liner. b. Move the liner to the desired position. If possible, clear the stuffing box and allow space for the polished rod clamp above the liner. c.

Remove the spacers or loosen the adjusting nuts. Tighten the liner packing and set screws.

9. To resume pumping: a. Have all personnel move away from the wellhead area. b. Run the unit through a cycle slowly to check clearance and pump spacing. c. If pump spacing is not satisfactory, repeat the respacing procedure. 10. To tighten or loosen the polished rod clamp: a. Always position the clamp with its open face toward one of the bridle cables. b. Work from ground level, when possible. If an elevated platform is required, use an appropriate structure with fall protection as needed. (Refer to Section 20) c.

Use a box-end wrench or a socket wrench with an extension. Do not use a pipe wrench or a crescent-type wrench.

d. One individual should perform the wrench work. e. Stand to one side of the wrench, not directly in front of it. AA. Pumping units should be checked after initial installation on a periodic basis and after major repairs are completed to ensure that nuts and bolts are properly torqued.

SECTION EIGHTEEN – AIR AND GAS DRILLING 18.1

General The following safety rules and safe practices should be observed when air drilling. A. The compressor(s) should be located at the required distance from the rig. Compressor(s) should be equipped with the following safety features:

1. Unloaders, 2. Pressure relief valves, 3. Discharge temperature and pressure gauges, 4. Engine governors, 5. Fuel shut-off valves, 6. Check valve and block valve on the discharge line, and 7. Oil scrubbers or separators after each stage of compression. B. Fuel and oil storage should be at least the required distance from the compressor(s). Supply lines should have cutoff valves at the tanks and engines. C. A minimum of one remote control valve should be installed in the air supply line at a safe distance from the rig floor. At least one person should be stationed off the rig floor as a watch while air is being used for circulation. D. Crewmembers should be shown where the air line connections that lead to the standpipe are located and taught how to use them. E. Open fires should not be allowed within a close proximity of the rig floor. F. Engine exhaust systems should be equipped with spark arrestors or directed through a water spray. During each tour, the water spray should be inspected to ensure that an adequate amount of water is being used and that it is covering all the exhaust. G. Rig lighting should be appropriate for the area used. H. The air flow line should be straight with no bends or elbows. All connections should be weldend flanged. The air inlet line and the blooey line should be anchored securely. I.

A pilot light should be kept burning at the end of the flowline. A flame arrestor should be installed in the flowline.

J.

A manifold should be installed on the rig floor to direct air to the kelly and gas jet line. This allows the air supply to be shut off and pressure to be vented from the drill pipe. A shutoff valve and bleed line should be installed in the air supply a safe distance from the rig.

K. The rotating head should be anchored in four directions with turnbuckles.



L. A bottom-hole float should be run in the bottom drill collar. A fire ring should be installed in the float. M. Pressure should be bled-off of all pressure lines before connections are broken, including string and other gas/air lines.

SECTION 19 – PERSONNEL HOISTING OPERATIONS 19.1

General This document discusses operations where personnel are lifted by a lifting device (winch) six feet (1.8 meters) or more and / or are suspended at the work location six feet (1.8 meters) or more above the deck or ground. This includes personnel suspended in the derrick, below the rig floor, over the side of a vessel (over water) and anywhere the employee is suspended from a single line device in order to perform work. It is not the intention of this document to address devices used to transfer employees to and from vessels in an offshore environment or lifting of personnel by cranes. Working environments include both land and offshore operations. Differences in the working environments, personnel manning, equipment design and layout between the smallest land rig and the largest offshore rig are immense. Given these substantial differences, it is difficult to set specific guidelines that would apply to all types of rigs. Each company should assess their specific requirements and develop their own procedures. This document is intended to provide information on possible procedures and available equipment so companies may make informed decisions with regard to hoisting and / or suspending personnel in an elevated situation.

19.2

Alternative Methods While it is necessary to utilize personnel lifting devices in certain operations, employers should first assess the risk involved against the availability of alternative methods of accomplishing the same task. Examples might be waiting until the derrick can be laid down (in a land situation), or lowering equipment to the rig floor for servicing, etc.

19.3

Job Safety Analysis / Pre-Job Checklist A Job Safety Analysis (JSA) specific to Personnel Lifting should be established (rather than including the personnel lift as part of a larger task JSA or checklist). The Personnel Lifting JSA should be reviewed prior to each personnel lift and analyzed in comparison to the task JSA for which the specific personnel lift is required. See Section 1.4 and 1.9 for additional information on creating JSAs.

19.4

Pre-Job Safety Meeting A brief safety meeting should be held to discuss possible alternatives to complete the task, Personnel Hoisting safety procedures, as well as review of the JSA / Pre-Job Checklist and inspection of lifting equipment.

19.5

Harnesses and Associated Equipment A. Personnel Hoisting Harness (Full body harness along with a board or sling type seat integrated with a leg, torso and shoulder suspension arrangement.) should be considered. B. Personnel Hoisting Harnesses are also available that have three point connection arrangements that can assist in maintaining an upright position. © Copyright 2004 IADC All rights reserved


C. Personnel lifting gear/harness used for personnel hoisting should be properly rated (ANSI, etc.) by the manufacturer.



19.6

Connecting Devices The connection device between the full body personnel lifting harness, or personnel hoisting basket and the lifting line should be a triple action carabineer, a bolt type shackle with a retaining device such as a split pin or equivalent, or an alternative attachment device that is rated by the manufacturer for personnel lifting equipment.

19.7

Winches and Lifting System A. Certain jurisdictions in the world require dedicated personnel lifting winches. Local regulatory requirements should be reviewed to determine applicability. B. Certain winches are designed to include load-limiting mechanisms, line speed-limiting mechanisms, automatic secondary brake systems along with the normal braking systems, and controlled descent features. These devices may be considered as alternatives for future purchase when deemed appropriate. C. Winches should have a spring-back throttle device that automatically returns to neutral when it is released. The winch should have a manually operated brake. Several manufacturers provide winches with automatic secondary braking systems. D. The winch should be equipped with an emergency shut-off valve within easy reach of the winch operator. E. Winches that have a transmission disconnect that would allow the hoist to free fall a load should not be used for personnel lifting unless they are equipped with a positive locking device that will not allow the transmission disconnect to be released when in use. Winch operators must be trained to understand the importance of this transmission disconnect locking device. F. The winch should be equipped with a drum guard and a mechanism that ensures that the line is properly wound on the drum. G. The load hoisted by the winch, wire rope, and associated connection devices should not exceed the manufacturers’ recommendations. Winch capacity information should be posted and personnel operating these winches should be informed of the capacity of the winch and associated attachments. H. Companies should establish inspection procedures as part of their Preventative Maintenance Program. This inspection system may include but is not limited to the following:

1. Lifting lines should be inspected for wear or damage. 2. The path of the lifting line should be inspected to ensure that the line does not come in contact with any derrick member or may be caught by moving equipment. 3. The winch drum brakes should be inspected for wear and proper action. 4. The line guiding mechanism and drum guard should be inspected. 5. The hoist line sheave should be inspected for wear. 6. The sheave attachment to the derrick or rig structure should be inspected to ensure that it has a secure connection to the derrick or rig structure.

7. The winch controls should be inspected for proper operation and to ensure that they automatically return to neutral when released. 8. The winch base connections should be inspected for loose connections, damage, rusting or wear. 9. The hoisting line anchor to the drum should be inspected for proper attachment and wear. 10. The secondary brake of winches so equipped should be tested periodically for proper operation.

19.8

Secondary Independent - Connection Fall Protection A. Devices are available for independent anchor point connections for secondary fall protection. These include self-retracting lifelines (SRL’s) and static lines used in conjunction with fall arrest devices. B. Derrick design and the type of drilling equipment used may affect secondary independent connection fall protection. Employers must determine for themselves if it is appropriate in their specific situations. C. Secondary fall protection should only be considered if it can be utilized without creating additional hazards.

19.9

Personnel Lifting Operations

A. Pre-Lift Procedures: 1. Determine if an alternative method is available to complete the task. 2. Visually inspect fall protection equipment, full-body personnel lifting harness that includes a board or sling type seat, lifting equipment including wire rope, connections, winches, and other system components prior to use. 3. The status of the well should be considered to ensure that it is safe to conduct the personnel lift. 4. Evaluate concurrent activities for hazards that may affect or be affected by the Personnel Lifting task. Personnel hoisting operations on the rig floor may require equipment such as the rotary, swivel, top-drive to be shutdown. Personnel hoisting operations in other areas of the rig should be evaluated for possible hazards due to equipment in operation. 5. Other personnel who may be working on the rig floor or otherwise below the task that will be performed overhead should be instructed to stay out of the area below the lifting operation. Warning signs or barrier tape may need to be posted. 6. Weather conditions should be considered (lifting personnel in adverse weather conditions should be avoided). 7. Relevant communication must be established prior to beginning the personnel hoisting operation. It must be continuous throughout the lifting operation. Should the communication system fail, all movement of the person being hoisted must be stopped immediately, the situation evaluated and if adequate communication cannot be



established, and it is safe to return the hoisted person to the work surface, it should be done immediately. 



Personnel being hoisted should remain in continuous sight of and in direct communication of the winch operator or signal person. If the winch operator cannot see the person being hoisted, flagging person(s) should be stationed so that line of sight is maintained from the winch operator to the person being hoisted through the assigned person(s). Situations may arise where direct visual contact between the winch operator and the person being hoisted is not possible. In those situations, two-way radio communication may be used if: (1) A watch person with a two way radio is stationed so that the watch person and the person being hoisted are in direct line of sight of each other. (2) The person being hoisted has two-way radio communication. (3) The winch operator has two way communication with the person being hoisted and the watch person.

8. Where personnel lifting operations are carried out below the rig floor (deck), consideration should be given to utilizing hoists that are located below the rig floor. If this is not possible, a signalman should be assigned who has direct line of sight with the person being hoisted and is in direct sight of the winch operator. 9. If it is anticipated that the task will take some time, plans for a relief person should be considered. Personnel coming onto the job should be fully briefed on the situation at hand and should review the JSA prior to providing relief. B. Lifting Procedures 1. The winch operator should operate the winch at a slow, steady rate and stay alert to the situation and flagging person(s) (if applicable) at all times. 2. The employee being lifted should avoid dragging his feet on the beams or kicking out to swing away from the derrick. 3. The winch operator should set the manual brake anytime the load is in suspension. 4. The winch operator must not leave the winch controls unattended while personnel are suspended. Should the operator need to leave the controls, the person being lifted should be lowered to the rig floor or other safe landing area prior to the operator leaving the controls. 5. To control the side-to-side movement of the person being hoisted a tagline should be attached to the lifting cable eye, not the person being lifted. Care should be taken to ensure that the tagline does not catch while the person is being hoisted or lowered. The tag line should be made of a light material that will break easily should it snag during the personnel hoisting operation. If “Static Line” type of secondary fall protection is being used, the static line may be used for controlling the movement of the person being hoisted.

19.10 Winch Operator(s) Supervisors should ensure that any employee who is to operate a winch to hoist personnel is trained in the proper use, operation, inspection and maintenance of the involved winches. This training should include but is not limited to the information in this section. At a minimum, the assigned winch operator should be able to demonstrate understanding and can do the following:

A. Be able to carry out a Pre-Personnel Lifting Task visual and operational inspection that should include:      

Proper brake and throttle movement and operation; Wire rope inspection for wear and proper design for fall protection requirements; Proper wire wrapping on the drum; Inspecting the total rigging package for wear; Proper fall protection and connecting devices; Check for items on the wire and rigging that might catch on obstacles during the lift.

B. Understand that they must stay at the winch controls from the beginning to the end of the lift. C. Understands basic flagging procedures and line-of-sight and communication requirements. D. Understands that should the communications system fail, lifting or lowering of the person must be stopped until communication is reestablished and it is determined that it is safe to continue. E. Understands that other operations related to the rig floor (area of the Personnel lifting operation) may need to be shutdown during the lift. This may include the rotary, kelly, topdrive, blocks and/or other lifting equipment. F. Understands that personnel lifting should not be carried out in adverse weather conditions. Also understands that, should the weather conditions change the situation should be evaluated to determine the safety of continuing the personnel lifting operation. G. Understands their role in assuming responsibility for supervising the lift.

19.11 Additional Information For additional information, refer to the IADC HSE Reference Guide Section 3.7 Airhoists, Section 1.4 & 1.9 Job Safety Analysis and Job Safety Analysis Form, and Section 20 Fall Protection.

19.12

Man-Riding Winch Signals

EXTEND ARM HORIZONTALLY OUTWARD TURN PALM UP AND CONTINUOUSLY MOVE ARM UP AND DOWN FROM YOUR SIDE

ARM POINTING DOWNWARD CONTINUOUSLY ROTATE IN HORIZONTAL CIRCLES

ARM OUTSTRETCHED HORIZONTAL FROM BODY MAKE SIDE TO SIDE MOVEMENT

WINCH OPERATOR – REMEMBER: TO RAISE OR LOWER REQUIRES CONTINUOUS SIGNALS – NO SIGNAL – NO MOVEMENT 14 July 2003

SECTION TWENTY – FALL PROTECTION 20.1

General These guidelines apply to operations, where there is potential risk of personnel falling. Guardrails and decking should be the primary means of fall protection for work areas 6 feet (1.8 meters) or more above ground, deck, water, or floor. Other means of fall protection should be used when decking and guardrails are not feasible.

20.2

General Fall Prevention

A. To prevent falls on surfaces that are at the same level: 1. Fill/cover holes or repair structural defects before work begins. 2. Practice good house keeping. Keep floors, decks and landings free of water, grease, oil trash, debris or other potential hazards. Watch for oil and water spills or leaks, and tools left on floors. Repair the leak and clean up the unsafe conditions. 3. Anti-slip flooring should be used where oil or water is a constant problem. 4. Use footwear with slip-resistant soles and tread patterns. 5. Provide adequate lighting for interior and exterior walkways. 6. Mark any significant transitions in floor height clearly. 7. Remove snow and ice from rig floor, decks, parking lots and sidewalks. 8. Use appropriate non-slip floor surfaces, cleaners and waxes. B. To prevent falls to lower levels, such as falls from a ladder or over a railing: 1. No makeshift platforms should be used. Standard scaffolds or moveable platforms should be used when a temporary platform is needed. 2. Use ladders that give you an easy reach to work or storage areas. 3. Use mechanized material handling devices to access higher levels, if available. 4. Inspect all ladders and lifting equipment regularly and perform required maintenance. 5. Provide railing protection for areas with abrupt floor level changes (such as a loading dock). 6. Avoid storing heavy or awkward items above the reach of an average-sized person, if possible. 7. Deck or floor openings should be protected with chain/rope and caution tape. If rope is to be used, ½” (1.72 cm) should be the minimum accepted. 8. Whenever work is to be performed from a walkway or location six or more feet above surrounding surfaces, if a standard guardrail is not provided, then a full body harness with an independent tie off, and lanyard with shock absorber should be used. © Copyright 2004 IADC All rights reserved


9. Install handrails on stairs with four or more risers. 10. Install handrails on ramps that rise four feet or more. 11. Install slip-resistant treads on stairs. 12. Do not use stairways or walkways for storage of any kind. 13. All stairways and ramps should be maintained in a clean, dry condition. 14. Install nets when other types of fall protection equipment cannot be used. 15. Ladder access openings to landings such as derrick walk around, crown deck, cranes’ etc. should have safety doors that may be closed when personnel are on the deck (landing). C. To prevent falls from fixed ladder systems: 1. Utilize ladder cages or fall arrest systems on all fixed ladders over twenty feet (6 meters) in height. Caged ladders shall have a maximum unbroken length of 30 feet (9.15 meters). 2. Fall arrest systems may be used in conjunction with a climb assist device. Types of fall arrest systems that can be used with fixed ladders are: a. Climb Assist / Fall Arrest System with a counterweight use in conjunction with a full body harness. b. Fixed cable or rail attached to the ladder in conjunction with a fall arrest sleeve and full body harness. c.

Self Retracting Life Line System used in conjunction with a full body harness.

3. Ladders over 10 feet in length (3 meters) that originate from small landings that are 10 feet (3 meters) above the ground, deck, or rig floor should be equipped with ladder cages or fall arrest systems. 4. On narrow landings for ladders with cages, extend the outside edge of the cage to the landing guardrail.

20.3

Fall Arrest System vs Fall Restraint System It is important to understand the difference between a fall arrest system and fall restraint system. These are most commonly used in the industry, but may apply to many other situations where employees must work at heights. FALL RESTRAINT: A fall restraint system consists of the equipment used to keep an employee from reaching a fall point, such as the edge of a deck, rig floor, or the edge of an elevated working surface. The most commonly utilized fall restraint system is a standard guardrail. A tieoff system that "restrains" the employee from falling off an elevated working surface is another type of fall restraint. FALL ARREST: A personal fall arrest system means a system used to arrest an employee in a fall from a working level. It generally consists of an anchor point, connectors, a body belt or full body

harness and may include a lanyard, deceleration device, lifeline, or suitable combinations of these. The entire system must be capable of withstanding the impact forces involved in stopping

or arresting the fall. The forces increase with the fall distance due to acceleration (a person without protection will free fall 4 feet (1.2 meters) in 1/2 second and 16 feet (4.8 meters) in 1 second.).

20.4

Key Requirements for Fall Arrest Systems

A. Full Body Harness B. The system must be rigged so that employees can neither free-fall more than 6 feet (1.8 meters) nor contact a lower level. After the free-fall distance, the deceleration shockabsorbing component of the system must bring an employee to a complete stop within 3.5 additional feet (1.05 meter). C. The anchorage point must be capable of supporting at least 5000 pounds (2268 kilos)per employee. Most standard guardrail systems are not adequate anchorage points because they are not built to withstand the impact forces generated by a fall. D. The system's D-ring attachment point for body harnesses should be in the center of the employee's back near the shoulder level. E. The system components must be inspected for damage and/or deterioration prior to each use. All components subjected to the impact loading forces of a free-fall must be immediately removed from use and appropriately inspected and/or serviced. F. Construction of, and the standard applicable to full body harnesses and other fall arrest devices, specifies a weight limit of 310 pounds (140 kilos). This criterion assumes the device is in like new condition. This limitation includes the weight of the user, clothing, and tools/equipment being supported with or by the user.

20.5

Work at a Height Any work being performed 6’ or more above the ground or another working surface should require the use of a full body harness with lanyard. Key Work Activities or Areas located 6 feet (1.8 meters) or more above the ground, deck, landing, etc. that lack railings where Fall Arrest Systems should be used are: A. In conjunction with hoisting personnel with a winch. B. Working in the derrick (mast) at the monkey or stabbing board. C. Working in other areas of the derrick (mast) outside of the landings equipped with fall restraint systems. D. Working on the Well Control Stack or other areas of the substructure. E. Rigging up the substructure and/or derrick (mast).

20.6

Fall Restraint System and Equipment

A. Fall Restraint for temporary deck or floor openings. All deck (floor) openings accessible to personnel must be covered, guarded, or made inaccessible. The use of a temporary (portable) barricade system may be used (Barrier tape is not a fall protection barrier.). If the use of portable barricade system or fall arrest system is not possible, safety netting may be used. The following are guidelines to consider when barricading temporary openings: © Copyright 2004 IADC All rights reserved


1. The barricade should be constructed such that employees cannot easily get through it. 2. The barricade should have a top rail 42 inches (1.2 meters) from the deck, a mid-rail located 16 1/2“ (42 cm) below the top rail and an optional bottom rail located 16 1/2“ (42 cm) below the mid-rail. 3. It should be strong enough to prevent employees from falling through it. Temporary Guardrail systems should be capable of withstanding at least 200 pounds of force applied within 2 inches of the top edge, in any direction and at any point along the edge, and without causing the top edge of the guardrail to deflect downward to a height less than 39 inches above the walking/working level. 4. Midrails, screens, mesh, and other intermediate members must be capable of withstanding at least 150 pounds of force applied in any direction at any point along the midrail or other member. 5. Guardrail systems must not have rough or jagged surfaces that would cause punctures, lacerations, or snagged clothing. 6. The barricade should have only one entry/exit point and preferably have some form of closure. It should also be identified with signs, flagging, etc. 7. The barricade should take up as little workspace as possible around the floor opening. 8. A barricade or hole covering should be placed in/over or around the rig floor opening whenever the rotary table or master bushings are removed. 9. When used with rigid supports, rope, chain or cable of sufficient strength may be used provided it has sufficient number of supports (uprights) and adequate tightness to prevent deflection below 39 inches. B. Deck/Landing Guardrails 1. Guardrails should be installed on platforms, rig floors, mud pits, crane, rig dog house roof, etc. and on all open sides and ends of such platforms which are more than 6 feet (1.8 meters) above surrounding working surfaces, where personnel are routinely required to work. a. Guardrail: The Standard Guardrail consists of a Top Rail, Intermediate Rail, and optional Bottom Rail, Toe Board, and Posts. b. Top Rail – Smooth throughout the entire length of the railing with a vertical height of 42 inches (107.5 cm) from the upper surface of the top rail to the floor of the platform, runway, or ramp. c.

Intermediate (Mid) Rail - 16 1/2 inch (42 cm) below the top rail. d. Optional Bottom Rail - 16 1/2 inch (42 cm) below the intermediate rail. e. Toe Board – 5 inches (12.7cm) (minimum) of vertical height from its top edge to its bottom edge securely fastened in place and has no more than 1/4 inch (64 mm) clearance above floor level.

f.

Posts – Should be at least 1-1/2 inches (3.84 cm) in diameter and spaced not more than 5 feet (153 cm) on centers.

C. Stairs should have anti-slip treads, and ramps should have anti-slip surfaces. The tread shall be structurally sound and level. Stairs consist of the stairs, stair tread, and guardrails, with top-rails, mid-rails, and optional bottom rails. Portable stairs (i.e. removable stairs for land rigs) should be securely fastened in place before personnel are allowed to use them. 1. Rig personnel should not be allowed to slide down handrails. 2. Stairs should have guardrails with a top handrail, a mid-rail and optional bottom rail on both sides. When a stairway has a closed wall on one side, only a handrail is required on the wall side and a standard guardrail is required on the open side. 3. Vertical clearance above any stair tread to an overhead obstruction should be at least 7 feet (215 cm), if possible. 4. Every flight of stairs having four or more risers (steps) should be equipped with standard stair railings. 5. Stairway platforms should be a minimum of 30 inches (77 cm) in length when measured in the direction of travel, if possible. 6. Stairs should be installed at angles to horizontal of between 30 and 50 degrees, with tread widths per the following table: Angle to Horizontal 30° 35’ 32° 08’ 32° 41’ 35° 16’ 36° 52’ 38° 29’ 40° 08’ 41° 44’ 43° 22’ 45° 00’ 46° 38’ 48° 16’ 49° 54’

Rise in Inches (cm) 6 1/2 (16.6) 6 3/4 (17.3 7 (17.9) 7 1/4 (18.6) 7 1/2 (19.2) 7 3/4 (19.8) 8 (20.5) 8 1/4 (21.1) 8 1/2 (21.8) 8 1/2 (22.4) 9 (23) 9 1/4 (23.7) 9 1/2 (24.3)

Tread run in Inches (cm) 11 (28.2) 10 3/4 (27.5) 10 1/2 (26.9) 10 1/4 (26.2) 10 (25.6) 9 3/4 (25) 9 1/2 (24.3) 9 1/4 (23.7) 9 (23) 8 3/4 (22.4) 8 1/2 (21.8) 8 1/4 (21.1) 8 (20.5)

7. Stair Tread should be of a non-slip material (design), level, spaced uniformly throughout the length of the stairs and securely attached to the stair side rail. 8. Stair Guardrails (Handrails) should be 30 (77 cm) to 34 (86 cm) inches from the upper surface of the handrail to the surface of the stair tread in line with the leading edge of face of the riser. Vertical support posts should be no more than 5 feet (153 cm) apart with a mid-rail located 15 (38 cm) to 17 (43 cm) inches from the top of the guardrail and top of the leading edge of the stair tread.

20.7

Illustrations

A. All steps and handrails should be in good condition and inspected regularly. Refer to Section 20.5 – C.

B. Handrails and mid-rails should be provided for walkways and platforms where necessary. Refer to Section 3.10.Q.

C. Derrickman Utilizing fall protection while climbing derrick ladder.

APPENDIX HEALTH SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT MATERIALS AVAILABLE FROM IADC PUBLICATIONS Documents and Manuals Health Safety and Environmental Reference Guide Weekly Safety Meeting Report Forms 52 Safety Topics Forms Five Minute Rigs Safety Meeting Topics Guide to Safe Stairways, Walkways and Railings How to Keep Drugs off Your Rig H2S Safety Handbook Planning for Drilling in an H2S Zone Rotary Rig Safety Inspection Checklist IADC ASP Program Year End Report IADC ASP Rig Recognition Plaques IADC Safety Posters (English, Spanish and Russian) are available for free on the IADC web site: http://www.iadc.org/posters.htm IADC Safety Alerts are available free on the IADC web site at: http://www.iadc.org/alerts.htm Videos H2S Safety in Drilling and Production Hearing Conservation: A sense of Importance There’s Safety in Teamwork Accident Evaluation Fire on the Rig, Part I: Fire Fighting Tactics for Onshore Rigs Rigging Up: The Safe Way Safe Practices in Marine and Offshore Drilling and Workover Safe Practices in Well Drilling and Workover Safe Use of Catheads and Air Hoists Safe Use of Drill Pipe Tongs Hand Injuries in Well Service and Workover Operations Accreditation Rig Pass (Training for employees) WellCAP

Please contact IADC Publications (FAX 1-713-292-1946 or email [email protected]) for a complete catalog of safety, training, operations and reference books, forms, tapes and videos.

IADC HSE Reference Guide.docx

Recommend Documents